巴利语辭典

诸大德合编

Virāga: {'def': '【阳】冷静，无欲望。 ~tā, 【阴】无贪欲。 ~gī, 【形】没热情的，释放的。(p296)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[vi+rāga] 1. absence of rāga, dispassionateness, indifference towards (Abl. or Loc.) disgust, absence of desire, destruction of passions; waning, fading away, cleansing, purifying; emancipation, Arahantship. ‹-› D.III,130 sq., 136 sq., 222, 243, 251, 290; S.I,136; III,19 sq., 59 sq., 163, 189; IV,33 sq., 47, 226, 365; V,226, 255, 361; A.I,100, 299; II,26; III,35, 85, 325 sq.; IV,146 sq., 423 sq.; V,112, 359; Th.1, 599; Sn.795; Ps.II,220 sq.; Nd¹ 100; Kvu 600=Dh.273=Nett 188 (virāgo seṭṭho dhammānaṁ); Dhs.163; Nett 16, 29; Vism.290 (khaya° & accanta°) 293. -- Often nearly synonymous with nibbāna, in the description of which it occurs frequently in foll. formula: taṇhakkhaya virāga nirodha nibbāna, e. g. S.I,136; Vin.I,5; A.II,118; It.88; -- or comb^d with nibbidā virāga nirodha upasama . . . nibbāna, e. g. M.I,431; S.II,223; cp. nibbāna II.B¹ & III,8. -- In other connection (more objectively as “destruction”): aniccatā saṅkhārānaṁ etc., vipariṇāma virāga nirodha, e. g. S.III,43; (as “ceasing, fading away”:) khaya(-dhamma liable to), vaya°, virāga°, nirodha° M.I,500; S.II,26. -- 2. colouring, diversity or display of colour, dye, hue (=rāga 1) J.I,89 (nānā°-samujjala blazing forth different colours); 395 (nānā° variously dyed); PvA.50 (nānā°-vaṇṇa-samujjala). (Page 634)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi离+rāga‹raj著色), 梵巴同),【阳】离染，无欲望。virāgatā,【阴】无贪欲。virāgī,【形】没热情的，释放的。A.5.32./III,35-36：“Yāvatā Cundi, dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā, virāgo tesaṁ aggamakkhāyati, yadidaṁ-- madanimmadano pipāsavinayo ālayasamugghāto vaṭṭupacchedo taṇhākkhayo virāgo nirodho nibbānaṁ. Ye kho, Cundi virāge dhamme pasannā, agge te pasannā. Agge kho pana pasannānaṁ aggo vipāko hoti.(准提(公主)！於一切有为或无为法中，离欲可说为最上，即是：憍慢粉碎、渴引离、阿赖耶(执著)的连根拔起、轮回断、渴爱尽、离染、灭、涅盘。准提(公主)！凡信离染之法者，为最上信，而最上信者，有最上的果报。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Virāgatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. rāga] disinterestedness, absence of lust Kvu 212=Ud.10. (Page 634)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Virāgeti: {'def': '[for virādheti, as in BSk. virāgayati (e. g. Divy 131, 133) to displease, estrange, the fig. meaning of virāgeti like BSk. ārāgeti for Pāli ārādheti in lit & fig. meanings] to fail, miss; only at M.I,327 (puriso narakapapāte papatanto hatthehi ca pādehi ca paṭhaviṁ virāgeyya “would miss the earth”; differently Neumann: “Boden zu fassen suchte,” i. e. tried to touch ground). -- Perhaps also in virāgāya (either as ger. to virāgeti or as Instr. to virāga in sense of virādha(na)) Pv.I,11⁷ (sukhaṁ virāgāya, with gloss virāgena, i. e. spurning one’s good fortune; expl^d as virajjhitvā virādhetvā at PvA.59). Cp. virāye (=virāge?) at Th.1, 1113 (see virādheti). (Page 634)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Virāgin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. virāga 2, cp. rāgin] 1. discoloured, fading in colour J.III,88 (fig. saddhā avirāginī), 148 (rāga° fading in the original dye, of citta). -- 2. changing, reversing A.III,416 (of dukkha: dandha° & khippa° of slow & quick change; v. l. M6 is viparāgi, which may represent a vipariyāyi, i. e. changing). (Page 634)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Virāgita: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vi+*rāgeti, denom. of rāga?] at J.V,96 is not clear. It is said of beautiful women & expl^d by C. as vilagga-sarīrā, tanumajjhā, i. e. “having slender waists.” Could it be “excited with passion” or “exciting passion”? Or could it be an old misreading for virājita²? It may also be a distorted vilāka (q. v.) or vilaggita. (Page 634)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Virāguṇa: {'def': 'in meaning “fading away, waning” in verse at It.69 (of viññāṇa) is doubtful reading. It corresponds to virāgadhamma of the prose part (virāgudh° vv. ll.). The v. l. is pabhaṅguṇa (which might be preferable, unless we regard it as an explanation of virāgin, if we should write it thus). (Page 634)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Virājati: {'def': '[vi+rājati] to shine PvA.189 (=virocati). (Page 634)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+rāj +a), 照耀，照亮。【过】virāji。【过分】virājita。【现分】virājamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + rāj + a), 照耀，照亮。【过】 virāji。【过分】 ~jita。【现分】~jamāna。(p296)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Virājeti: {'def': '(vi + rāj + e), 丢弃，除去，破坏。【过】 ~esi。【独】 ~jetvā。(p296)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see virajjati. (Page 634)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+rāj+e), 丢弃，除去，破坏。【过】virājesi。【独】virājetvā。【现分】virājenta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Virājita: {'def': '¹ [pp. of virājeti] cleansed, discarded as rāga, given up S.IV,158 (dosa); J.III,404 (=pahīna C.). (Page 634)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [pp. of Caus. of virājati] shining out, resplendent J.II,33 (mora . . . suratta-rāji-virājita here perhaps =streaked?). Cp. virāgita. (Page 634)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Virāva: {'def': 'see virava. (Page 634)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Virūhana: {'def': '【中】 ~nā, 【阴】成长，生长。(p297)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】virūhnā,【阴】成长，生长。【反】avirūhnā(不成长)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Virūhanā: {'def': '(f.) & °a (nt.) [vi+rūhanā] growing, growth J.II,323 (f.); Miln.354; Vism.220; DA.I,161; PvA.7. (Page 635)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Virūhati: {'def': '[vi+rūhati¹] to grow, sprout It.113; Miln.386; DA.I,120. -- Cp. paṭi°. -- pp. virūḷha. -- Caus II. virūhāpeti to make grow, to foster Miln.386. (Page 635)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+ruh上升+a), 生长，使发芽，增加。【过】virūhi。【现分】virūhanta。【独】virūhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + ruh + a), 生长，使发芽，增加。【过】 virūhi。【现分】 ~hanta。【独】 ~hitvā。(p297)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Virūpa: {'def': '【形】不成形的，丑陋的。 ~tā, 【阴】丑陋。(p297)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(梵virūpa),【形】不成形的，丑陋的。virūpatā,【阴】丑陋。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [vi+rūpa] deformed, unsightly, ugly Sn.50; J.I,47; IV,379; VI,31, 114; PvA.24, 32, 47; Sdhp.85.

at Sn.50 virūpa is taken as “various” by Bdhgh (SnA 99), and virūpa-rūpa expl^d as vividha-rūpa, i.e. diversity, variety. So also the Niddesa. (Page 635)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Virūpakkha: {'def': '(梵Vaiwravaṇa),【阳】广目天王，四大王天之一，在西方广目天王统治诸龙(nāga)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】毗卢巴卡（龙王名）。(p297)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '广目天王，四大天王之一，守护西方，统领诸龙。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': 'm. [BSk. Virūpākṣa] 広目天, 毘楼博叉 [四天王の一, 竜の主神].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Virūḷha: {'def': '(virūhati 的【过分】), 已生长，已增加。(p297)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of virūhati] having grown, growing S.II,65 (viññāṇe virūḷhe āyatiṁ punnabbhav’âbhinibbatti hoti). (Page 635)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(virūhati‘生长’的【过分】), 已生长，已增加。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'm. [BSk. Virūḍhaka] 増長天, 毘楼勒 [四天王の一, 鳩槃陀の王].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Virūḷhaka: {'def': '(梵Virūḍhaka)﹐增长天王，毘琉璃，四大王天之一，在南方增长天王统治鸠盘荼(kumbhaṇḍa)，即守护森林、山岳、宝藏的守护神。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '增长天王，四大天王之一，守护南方，统领瓮睾鬼。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Virūḷhi: {'def': '【阴】生长。(p297)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】生长。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [vi+rūḷhi, of ruh] growth M.I,250; S.III,53; A.III,8, 404 sq.; V,152 sq., 161, 350 sq.; It.113; Miln.33; Mhvs 15, 42; VbhA.196. --avirūḷhi-dhamma not liable to growth Sn.235; DhA.I,245. (Page 635)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visa: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Vedic viṣa; Av. viš poison, Gr. i)όs, Lat. vīrus, Oir. fī: all meaning “poison”] poison, virus, venom M.I,316=S.II,110; Th.1, 418; 768; Sn.1 (sappa° snake venom); A.II,110; J.I,271 (halāhala° deadly p.); III,201; IV,222; Pug.48; Miln.302; PvA.62, 256; ThA.489. -- On visa in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 137. Cp. āsī°.

--uggāra vomiting of poison SnA 176. --kaṇṭaka a poisoned thorn or arrow, also name of a sort of sugar DhsA.203. --kumbha a vessel filled with p. It.86. --pānaka a drink of p. DhA.II,15. --pīta (an arrow) dipped into poison (lit. which has drunk poison). At another place (see pīta¹) we have suggested reading visappita (visa+appita), i. e. “poison-applied,” which was based on reading at Vism.303. See e. g. J.V,36; Miln.198; Vism.303, 381; DhA.I,216. --rukkha “poison tree,” a cert. tree Vism.512; VbhA.89; DA.I,39. --vaṇijjā trading with poison A.III,208. --vijjā science of poison DA.I,93. --vejja a physician who cures poison (ous snake-bites) J.I,310. --salla a poisoned arrow Vism.503. (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵visa),【中】毒药，毒液。visakaṇṭaka,【中】1.毒刺。2.一种糖的名。visapīta,【形】浸毒药的(即：毒箭)。visarukkha,【阳】有毒的树。visavejja,【阳】治疗毒药的医师。visasalla,【中】毒镳。ghoravisa,【中】剧毒。 tri-visa(梵)﹐三毒( 3 main blemishes of character。三毒：贪欲、嗔恚、愚痴是也。此毒能生万咎。--《法门名义集》T54.195.3。(北传)涅盘经曰：「毒中之毒无过三毒。」)。visamūla﹐毒根。Visamūlassāti dukkhavipākassa (毒根的：苦根的。)(SA.1.71.)。Dukkhanibbattakakammassa hetubhāvato visamūlā.(从苦产生业的因，称为‘毒根’) (Sṭ.1.1./CS:p.1.50)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】毒药，毒液。 ~kaṇṭaka, 【中】 1. 毒刺。 2. 一种糖的名。 ~pīta, 【形】浸毒药的（即：毒箭）。 ~rukkha, 【阳】有毒的树。 ~vejja, 【阳】治疗毒药的医师。 ~salla, 【中】毒镳。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Visabhāga: {'def': '【形】不同的，相反的，不寻常的。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】不同的，相反的，不寻常的，异常的，异分，异类。visabhāga-dhātu﹐他界。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [vi+sabhāga] different, unusual, extraordinary, uncommon Miln.78 sq.; DA.I,212; Vism.180 (purisassa itthisarīraṁ, itthiyā purisa-sarīraṁ visabhāgaṁ), 516; DhA.IV,52; PvA.118. --°ārammaṇa pudendum muliebre J.II,274 ≈ III,498. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visada: {'def': '【形】干净的，纯粹的，显然的。 ~kiriyā, 【阴】解释。 ~tā, 【阴】~bhāva, 【阳】明朗，纯净。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. viśada] 1. clean, pure, white D.II,14; Miln.93, 247; Dāvs v. 28. -- 2. clear, manifest Miln.93; DhsA.321, 328 (a°); VbhA.388 sq.

--kiriyā making clear: see under vatthu¹. --bhāva clearness Vism.128; Tikp 59. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】乾净的，纯粹的，显然的。visadakiriyā,【阴】解释。visadatā,【阴】visadabhāva,【阳】明朗，纯净。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Visadatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. visada] purity, clearness Vism.134 (vatthu°). (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visaggatā: {'def': 'see a°. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visahati: {'def': '[vi+sahati] to be able, to dare, to venture Sn.1069 (=ussahati sakkoti Nd² 600); J.I,152. -- ppr. neg. avisahanto unable VvA.69, 112; and avisahamāna J.I,91. -- ger. visayha (q. v.). (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+sah胜过+a), 能，敢，冒险。【过】visahi。【现分】visahamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + sah + a), 能，敢，冒险。【过】 visahi。【现分】 ~hamāna。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Visajjana: {'def': '& visajjeti: see viss°. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visajjati: {'def': '[vi+sajjati, Pass. of sañj; the regular Act. would be visajati] to hang on, cling to, stick to, adhere (fig.); only in pp. visatta (q. v.). -- The apparent ger. form visajja belongs to vissajjati. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visakkiya: {'def': '[vi+sakkiya?] in °dūta is a special kind of messenger Vin.III,74. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visalla: {'def': '【形】无伤心的，拔掉飞镳的。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】无伤心的，拔掉飞镳的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [vi+salla] free from pain or grief S.I,180; Sn.17, 86=367. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visama: {'def': '(adj.) [vi+sama³] 1. uneven, unequal, disharmonious, contrary A.I,74; PvA.47 (vāta), 131 (a°=sama of the “middle” path). -- 2. (morally) discrepant, lawless, wrong A.III,285; V,329; Sn.57 (cp. Nd² 599); Miln.250 (°diṭṭhi). -- 3. odd, peculiar, petty, disagreeable A.II,87; Miln.112, 304, 357; J.I,391 (nagaraka). ‹-› As nt. an uneven or dangerous or inaccessible place, rough road; (fig.) unevenness, badness, misconduct, disagreeableness A.I,35 (pabbata°); S.IV,117; Vbh.368 (two sets of 3 visamāni: rāga, etc.); Miln.136, 157, 277, 351; J.V,70; VvA.301. --visamena (Instr.) in a wrong way Pv IV.14. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+sama3),【形】1.不平顺的，不相等的，不调和的。2.无法的，错误的。3.奇异的。avisama, 【反】无不平顺的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】不平顺的，不相等的，不调和的。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Visamāyati: {'def': '[denom. fr. visama] to be uneven D.II,269 (so read for visamā yanti). (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visanna: {'def': '[pp. of visīdati] sunk into (Loc.), immersed J.IV,399. The poetical form is vyasanna. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visappana: {'def': '【中】奋斗。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】奋斗。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'in Visappanarasa at Vism.470 is not clear. Is it “spreading” [vi+sṛp], or misprint for visa-pāna? (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visara: {'def': '[vi+sara] a multitude DA.I,40. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visarati: {'def': '(vi+sr动转)﹐散布。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Visaritā: {'def': '(f.) at D.II,213 in phrase iddhi° is doubtful reading. The gloss (K) has “visevitā.” Trslⁿ (Dial. II.246); “proficiency.” It is comb^d with iddhi-pahutā & iddhivikubbanatā. Bdhgh’s explⁿ is “visavanā” [fr. vi+sru?]. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visati: {'def': '(vis + a), 参考 Pavisati。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '-visati,(vis(梵viw)进入+a) 进，入(to enter；只出现在有字首的upavisati, pavisati, parivisati, saṁvisati, abhisaṁvisati, etc. see also vesma (house).)。参考 Pavisati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': ' [viś, cp. viś dwelling-place, veśa; Gr. oi/kos house, oi)kέw to dwell; Lat. vīcus, Goth. weihs=E. °wick in Warwick, etc.] to enter, only in combⁿ with prefixes, like upa°, pa°, pari°, saṁ°, abhisaṁ°, etc. . . . See also vesma (house). (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visatta: {'def': '【形】强烈地执着的，纠缠的。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of visajjati] hanging on (fig.), sticking or clinging to, entangled in (Loc.) A.II,25; Sn.38, 272; Nd² 597; J.II,146; III,241. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】强烈地执著的，纠缠的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Visattikā: {'def': '【阴】执着，渴望。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】强烈地执著。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [visatta+ikā, abstr. formation] clinging to, adhering, attachment (to=Loc.), sinful bent, lust, desire. -- It is almost invariably found as a syn. of taṇhā. P. Commentators explain it with ref. either to visaṭa (diffused), or to visa (poison). These are of course only exegetical edifying etymologies. Cp. Dhs. trslⁿ § 1059; Expositor II.468: Brethren 213 n. 3, K.S. I.2, n. 6, and the varied exegesis of the term in the Niddesas. ‹-› S.I,1, 24, 35, 107, 110; A.II,211; IV,434; Sn.333, 768, 857, 1053 sq.; Th.1, 519; Nd¹ 8 sq., 247; Nd² 598; DhA.III,198; IV,43; DhsA.364; Nett 24; Dhs.1059. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visaya: {'def': '(梵visaya, fr. vi+wī),【阳】境界，地方，区域，物体，范围，肉体上的快乐，立足点，尘(真谛等旧译家将之译作‘尘’，新译作‘境’或‘境界’。引起眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、意六根的感觉思惟作用的对象。计有六种，即色、声、香、味、触、法，称之六尘、六境。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. viśaya, fr. vi+śī] 1. locality, spot, region; world, realm, province, neighbourhood Sn.977. Often in foll. comb^ns: petti° (or pitti°) and pettika (a) the world of the manes or petas M.I,73; S.III,224; V,342, 356 sq.; A.I,37, 267; II,126 sq.; III,211, 339, 414 sq.; IV,405 sq.; V,182 sq.; Pv.II,2²; II,7⁹; J.I,51; PvA.25 sq., 59 sq., 214. (b) the way of the fathers, native or proper beat or range D.III,58; S.V,146 sq.; A.III,67; J.II,59. Yama° the realm of Yama or the Dead Pv.II,8² (=petaloka PvA.107). -- 2. reach, sphere (of the senses), range, scope; object, characteristic, attribute (cp. Cpd. 143 n. 2) S.V,218 (gocara°); Nett 23 (iddhi°); Miln.186, 215, 316; Vism.216 (visayī-bhūta), 570=VbhA.182 (mahā° & appa°); KhA 17; SnA 22, 154 (buddha°), 228 (id.); PvA.72, 89. --avisaya not forming an object, a wrong object, indefinable A.V,50; J.V,117 (so read for °ara); PvA.122, 197. -- 3. object of sense, sensual pleasure SnA 100. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】地方，区域，领域，物体，范围，肉体上的快乐，立足点。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Visayha: {'def': '(ger. of visahati),【形】可忍受的，可能的。avisayha,【反】不可忍受的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [ger. of visahati] possible Pv IV.1¹² (yathā °ṁ as far as possible); a° impossible M.I,207=Vin.I,157. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】可忍受的，可能的。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Visañña: {'def': '~ññī, 【形】无意识的。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Visaññī,【形】无意识的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [vi+sañña=saññā] 1. having wrong perceptions Sn.874. -- 2. unconscious J.V,159. In composition with bhū as visaññī-bhūta at J.I,67. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visaññin: {'def': '(adj.) [vi+saññin] unconscious, one who has lost consciousness; also in meaning “of unsound mind” (=ummattaka Nd¹ 279) A.II,52 (khitta-citta+); Miln.220; Sdhp.117. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visaŋsaṭṭha: {'def': '【形】分开的，分离的。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Visaŋvāda: {'def': '【阳】欺骗，谎言。 ~ka, 【形】不能信赖的。 ~na, 【中】说谎。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Visaŋvādeti: {'def': '(vi + san + vad + e), 欺骗，说谎，食言，失信。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~vādita。【现分】 ~denta。【独】 ~detvā。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Visaŋyoga: {'def': '【阳】切断，与…分离。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Visaŋyutta: {'def': '【过分】已卸轭，已与…分离。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Visaṁ: {'def': 'is P. prefix corresponding to Sk. viṣu (or visva° [see vi°] in meaning “diverging, on opposite sides,”) apart, against; only in cpd. °vādeti and derivations, lit. to speak wrong, i. e. to deceive. (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visaṁhata: {'def': '[vi+saṁhata²] removed, destroyed Th.1, 89. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visaṁsaṭṭha: {'def': '(vi+saṁsaṭṭha结合),【形】分开的，分离的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [vi+saṁsaṭṭha] separated, unconnected with (Instr.) M.I,480; DA.I,59. (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visaṁvāda: {'def': '[visaṁ+vāda] deceiving; neg. a° Miln.354. (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】欺骗，谎言。visaṁvādaka,【形】不能信赖的。visaṁvādana,【中】说谎。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Visaṁvādaka: {'def': '(adj.) [visaṁ+vādaka] deceiving, untrustworthy Vism.496; f. °ikā J.V,401, 410. -- a° not deceiving D.III,170; A.IV,249; M.III,33; Pug.57. (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visaṁvādana: {'def': '(nt.) & °ā (f.) & °atā (f.) [fr. visaṁvādeti] deceiving, disappointing A.V,136 (°ā); Vin.IV,2. -- a° honesty D.III,190 (°atā). (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visaṁvādayitar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. visaṁvādeti] one who deceives another D.III,171. (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visaṁvādeti: {'def': '[visaṁ+vādeti; cp. BSk. visaṁvādayati AvŚ I.262, after the Pāli] to deceive with words, to break one’s word, to lie, deceive Vin.III,143; IV,1; Nett 91. -- Neg. a° J.V,124. (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+san+vad说+e), 欺骗，说谎，食言，失信。【过】visaṁvādesi。【过分】visaṁvādita。【现分】visaṁvādenta。【独】visaṁvādetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Visaṁyoga: {'def': '【阳】切断，与…分离。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(& visaññoga) [vi+saṁyoga] disconnection, separation from (-°), dissociation Vin.II,259 (ññ)=A.IV,280; D.III,230 (kāma-yoga°, bhava°, diṭṭhi°, avijjā°; cp. the 4 oghas), 276; A.II,11; III,156. (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visaṁyutta: {'def': '【过分】已卸轭，已与…分离。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(& visaññutta) (adj.) [vi+saṁyutta] 1. (lit.) unharnessed, unyoked Th.1, 1021 (half-fig.). -- 2. detached from the world A.I,262=III,214; S.II,279 (ññ); Th.1, 1022; Sn.621, 626, 634; DhA.III,233 (sabba-yoga°); IV,141, 159, 185. (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visaṅka: {'def': '(adj.) [vi+saṅka; Sk. viśaṅka] fearless, secure; a° Sdhp.176. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visaṅkhita: {'def': '(visaṅkharoti 的【过分】), 已破坏。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(visaṅkharoti 的【过分】), 已破坏。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[vi+saṅkhata] destroyed, annihilated Dh.154; J.I,493 (=viddhaṁsita DhA.III,129). (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visaṅkhāra: {'def': '【阳】所有物质事物的剥除。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】所有物质的剥除(divestment of all material things)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[vi+saṅkhāra] divestment of all material things Dh.154 (=nibbāna DhA.III,129). See saṅkhāra 3. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visaṅkita: {'def': '【形】可疑的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】可疑的。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of vi+śaṅk] suspicious, anxious ThA.134 (Ap. v. 78). -- neg. a° not perturbed, trusting, secure Sdhp.128. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visaṭa: {'def': '& visata [pp. of vi+sṛ, Sk. visṛta] spread, diffused, wide, broad D.III,167 (ṭ); Sn.1 (T. reads t, v. l. BB has ṭ); J.II,439; IV,499 (t); Miln.221, 354 (ṭ; +vitthata), 357. Cp. anu°. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'visata (visarati 的【过分】) 已散布，已散播。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'visata (visarati 的【过分】) 已散布，已散播。na ca visaṭaṁ,不东张西望。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Visaṭā: {'def': '& visatā (f.) [abrh. formation fr. vi+sañj, spelling t for tt: see visatta. The writing of MSS. concerning t in these words is very confused] “hanging on,” clinging, attachment. The word seems to be a quasi-short form of visattikā. Thus at Sn.715 (=taṇhā C.; spelling t); Dhs.1059 (trslⁿ “diffusion,” i. e. fr. vi+sṛ; spelling ṭ)=Nd² s. v. taṇhā (spelt with t). (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '& visatā (vi+sañj, spelling t for tt：see visatta) 【阴】漫无止境的贪。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Visaṭṭha: {'def': 'see vissaṭṭha. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visaṭṭhi: {'def': '(for vissaṭṭhi, fr. vi+srj),【阴】1.射出(emission; in sukkavisaṭṭhi emission of semen射精)。2.渴望(probably stands for visatti in meaning “longing,” clinging to, or “love for” (Loc.))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [for vissaṭṭhi, fr. vi+sṛj] 1. emission; in sukka° emission of semen Vin.II,38; III,112; Kvu 163. -- 2. visaṭṭhi at S.III,133 and A.IV,52 (T. visaṭṭhi) probably stands for visatti in meaning “longing,” clinging to (cp. BSk. viṣakti AvŚ II.191), or “love for” (Loc.). (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viseneti: {'def': 'to discard, dislike, get rid of (opp. usseneti) S.III,89; Ps.II,167. See usseneti. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viseni°: {'def': '[vi+sena in combⁿ with kṛ and bhū; cp. paṭisena] “without an enemy,” in °katvā making armyless, i. e. disarming Sn.833, 1078. Expl^d in the Niddesa as “keep away as enemies, conquering” Nd¹ 174=Nd² 602 (where Nd¹ reads paṭisenikarā kilesā for visenikatvā kilesā). --°bhūta disarmed, not acting as an enemy Sn.793=914, where Nd¹ 96=334 has the same explⁿ as for °katvā; S.I,141 (+upasanta-citta; trslⁿ “by all the hosts of evil unassailed” K.S. I.178). Kern, Toev. s. v. differently “not opposing” for both expressions. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visesa: {'def': '【阳】 1. 卓越，差异。 2. 造诣。 ~ka, 【阳】特征。 ~gāmī, 【形】造诣非凡的。 ~bhāgiya, 【形】导致非凡的，导致进步的。 ~sādhigama,【阳】特殊的造诣。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. vi+śiṣ, cp. Epic Sk. viśeṣa] 1. (mark of) distinction, characteristic, discrimination A.I,267; S.IV,210; J.II,9; Miln.29; VvA.58, 131; PvA.50, 60. -- 2. elegance, splendour, excellence J.V,151; DhA.I,399. -- 3. distinction, peculiar merit or advantage, eminence, excellence, extraordinary state D.I,233 (so for vivesa all through?); A.III,349 (opp. hāna); J.I,435; VvA.157 (puñña°); PvA.71 (id.), 147 (sukha°). -- 4. difference, variety SnA 477, 504; VvA.2; PvA.37, 81, 135 (pl.= items). Abl. visesato, distinctively, altogether PvA.1, 259. -- 5. specific idea (in meditation), attainment J.VI,69: see & cp. Brethren 24, n. 1; 110. -- Cp. paṭi°.

--âdhigama specific attainment A.IV,22; M.II,96; Nett 92; Miln.412; DhA.I,100. [Cp. BSk. viśeṣadhigama Divy 174]. --gāmin reaching distinction, gaining merit A.II,185; III,349 sq.; S.V,108. --gū reaching a higher state or attainment J.VI,573. --paccaya ground for distinction VvA.20. --bhāgiya participating in, or leading to distinction or progress (spiritually) D.III,272 sq., 277, 282; Nett 77; Vism.11, 88 (abstr. °bhāgiyatā). (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】1.卓越，差异(distinction )。。visesaka,【阳】特徵。visesagāmī,【形】造诣非凡的。visesabhāgiya,【形】导致非凡的，导致进步的。visesādhigama,【阳】特殊的造诣。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Visesaka: {'def': '(m. or nt.) [fr. visesa] 1. a (distinguishing) mark (on the forehead) Vin.II,267 (with apaṅga). -- 2. leading to distinction VvA.85. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visesana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. viseseti] distinguishing, distinction, qualification, attribute Vv 16¹⁰; J.III,11; VI,63; SnA 181, 365, 399; VvA.13. -- Instr. avisesena (adv.) without distinction, at all events, anyhow PvA.116. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】非凡，性质，形容词。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】非凡，性质，形容词。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Visesato: {'def': '【副】特殊地，全部。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【副】特殊地，全部。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Visesatā: {'def': '【阴】卓越。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '=visesa Sdhp.265. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】卓越。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Viseseti: {'def': '(vi+sis +e), 取得资格，定义，辨别。【过】visesi。【过分】visesita。【独】visesetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of visissati] to make a distinction, to distinguish, define, specify J.V,120, 451; SnA 343; grd. visesitabba (-vacana) qualifying (predicative) expression VvA.13. -- pp. visesita. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi + sis + e), 取得资格，定义，辨别。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~sita。【独】 ~setvā。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Visesikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. visesa] the Vaiśeṣika philosophy Miln.3. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visesin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. visesa] possessing distinction, distinguished from, better than others Sn.799, 842, 855, 905; Nd¹ 244. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visesita: {'def': '[pp. of viseseti] distinguished, differentiated Mhvs 11, 32; KhA 18; PvA.56. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visesiya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of viseseti] distinguished Vv 16¹⁰ (=visesaṁ patvā VvA.85); v. l. visesin (=visesavant C.). (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'visesitabba,【形】有资格的，有定义的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'visesitabba, 【形】有资格的，有定义的。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Visesī: {'def': '【形】有特点的，合格的人。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有特点的，合格的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Visevita: {'def': '(nt.) [vi+sevita] 1. restlessness, trick, capers M.I,446 (of a horse; comb^d with visūkāyita). -- 2. disagreement S.I,123 (=viruddha-sevita K.S. I.320). Bdhgh at K.S. II.203 reads °sedhita. Cp. visūkāyita. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viseyyati: {'def': '[vi+seyyati, cp. Sk. śīryati, of śṛ to crush] to be broken, to fall to pieces J.I,174. -- pp. visiṇṇa. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visibbeti: {'def': '(vi + siv + e), 拆掉针缝的线，取暖。【过】 ~esi。【独】 ~betvā。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[vi+sibbeti, sīv] to unsew, to undo the stitches Vin.IV,280. -- Caus. II. visibbāpeti ibid. -- Another visibbeti see under visīveti. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+siv缝+e), 拆解，拆线，取暖。【过】visibbesi。【独】visibbetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Visibbita: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of vi+sibbeti, sīv to sew] entwined, entangled Miln.102 (saṁsibbita° as redupl. -- iter. cpd.). (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visikhā: {'def': '(cp. *Sk. (lexicogr.) viwikhā),【阴】街道(a street, road)。\xa0visikhākathā﹐街谈巷议(gossip at street corners)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. *Sk. (lexicogr.) viśikhā] a street, road Vin.IV,312; J.I,338; IV,310; V,16, 434.

--kathā gossip at street corners D.I,179; M.I,513; Dh.I,90. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】街道。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Visineti: {'def': 'see usseneti. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visissati: {'def': '[Pass. of vi+śiṣ] to differ, to be distinguished or eminent Nett 188. -- pp. visiṭṭha. -- Caus. viseseti (q. v.). (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visiṇṇa: {'def': '[pp. of viseyyati] broken, crushed, fallen to pieces J.I,174. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visiṭṭha: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of visissati] distinguished, prominent, superior, eminent D.III,159; Vv 32⁴; J.I,441; Miln.203, 239; DhA.II,15; VvA.1 (°māna=vimāna), 85, 261; Sdhp.260, 269, 332, 489. -- compar. °tara Vism.207 (=anuttara). -- As visiṭṭhaka at Sdhp.334. -- See also abhi°, paṭi°, and vissaṭṭha. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】卓著的，显赫的，非常的。 ~tara, 【形】更显着的。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pp. of visissati),【形】卓著的，显赫的，非常的(distinguished, prominent, superior, eminent)。visiṭṭhatara,【形】更显著的(=anuttara)。visiṭṭhamāna(=vimāna), 天宫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Visodha: {'def': '[fr. vi+śudh] cleaning, cleansing, in cpd. dubbisodha hard to clean Sn.279. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visodhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. visodheti] cleansing, purifying, emending Ps.II,21, 23; PvA.130. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】清洁，纯净。(p301)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】清洁，纯净。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Visodheti: {'def': '(vi + sudh + e), 打扫，净化。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~dhita。【现分】 ~dhenta。【独】 ~dhetvā, ~dhiya。(p301)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of visujjhati] to clean, cleanse, purify, sanctify Kvu 551; Pv IV.3²⁵; DhA.III,158; Sdhp.321. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+sudh+e), 打扫，净化。【过】visodhesi。【过分】visodhita。【现分】visodhenta。【独】visodhetvā, visodhiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Visoka: {'def': '【形】无忧的。(p301)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [vi+soka] freed from grief Dh.90; DhA.II,166. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】无忧的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Visoseti: {'def': '(vi+sus+e), 使乾涸，使枯萎。【过】visosesi。【过分】visosita。【现分】visosenta。【独】visosetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + sus + e), 使干涸，使枯萎。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~sita。【现分】 ~senta。【独】 ~setvā。(p301)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of vissussati] to cause to dry up, to make wither, to destroy A.I,204; Sn.949=1099; Nd¹ 434 (=sukkhāpeti); Nd² 603 (id.). (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vissa: {'def': '² (nt.) [cp. Sk. visra] a smell like raw flesh, as °gandha at Dhs.625; DhsA.319; SnA 286; DhA.III,393. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) [Vedic viśva, to vi°] all, every, entire; only in Np. Vissakamma. The word is antiquated in Pāli (for it sabba); a few cases in poetry are doubtful. Thus at Dh.266 (dhamma), where DhA.III,393 expl^s as “visama, vissagandha”; and at It.32 (vissantaraṁ “among all beings”? v. l. vessantaraṁ). (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vissagandha: {'def': '【阳】像生肉的味道。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】像生肉的味道。(p301)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vissagga: {'def': '[vi+sagga, vi+sṛj, cp. Sk. visarga] dispensing, serving, donation, giving out, holding (a meal), only in phrases bhatta° the function of a meal Vin.II,153; IV,263; Pv III,2⁹ (so read for vissatta); Miln.9; SnA 19, 140; and dāna° bestowing a gift Pv.II,9²⁷ (=pariccāga-ṭṭhāne dān’agge PvA.124). (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】捐赠物，配给物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】捐赠物，配给物。(p301)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vissajjaka: {'def': '【形】分发的，分布的。【阳】回问者，分配者。(p301)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】分发的，分布的。【阳】回问者，分配者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. vissajjati] 1. giving out, distributing Vin.II,177 -- 2. one who answers (a question) Miln.295. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vissajjana: {'def': '【中】授予，派遣，流出，答案，开支。 ~ka, 【形】答复的，授予的，花费的。(p301)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】授予，派遣，流出，答案，开支。vissajjanaka,【形】答覆的，授予的，花费的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) & °ā (f.) [fr. vissajjeti] 1. giving out, bestowing Nd¹ 262 (dhana°). -- 2. sending off, discharging J.I,239 (nāvā° putting off to sea). -- 3. answer, reply Vism.6, 84; often in combⁿ pucchā° question and answer, e. g. Mhvs 4, 54; PvA.2. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vissajjanaka: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. vissajjana] 1. giving out, bestowing PvA.121. -- 2. answering J.I,166 (pañha°). (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vissajjanīya: {'def': 'vissajjitabba, vissajjiya,【形】要分配的，要回答的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'vissajjitabba, vissajjiya, 【形】要分配的，要回答的。(p301)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vissajjati: {'def': '[vi+sajjati, of sṛj. The ss after analogy of ussajjati & nissajjati, cp. ossajjati for osajjati]. A. The pres. vissajjati is not in use. The only forms of the simple verb system are the foll.: ger. vissajja, usually written visajja, in meaning “setting free,” giving up, leaving behind Sn.522, 794, 912, 1060; Nd¹ 98; Nd² 596. -- grd. vissajjaniya [perhaps better to vissajjeti¹] to be answered, answerable; nt. a reply Nett 161, 175 sq., 191; and vissajjiya to be given away: see under a°. ‹-› pp. vissaṭṭha. -- B. Very frequent is the Caus. vissajjeti (also occasionally as visajj°) in var. meanings, based on the idea of sending forth or away, viz. to emit, discharge J.I,164 (uccāra-passāvaṁ). -- to send Mhvs 8, 3 (lekaṁ visajjayi). -- to dismiss PvA.81 (there). -- to let loose PvA.74 (rathaṁ). -- to spend, give away, bestow, hand over Pug.26 (visajj°); Nd¹ 262 (dhanaṁ); Miln.41 (dhaññaṁ); PvA.111, 119. -- to get rid of J.I,134 (muddikaṁ). -- to answer (questions), to reply, retort Sn.1005 (°essati, fut.); VvA.71; PvA.15, 59, 87. -- pp. vissajjita. -- Caus. II. vissajjāpeti (in meanings of vissajjeti) J.IV,2 (hatthaṁ=to push away); Miln.143; Mhvs 6, 43. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vissajjetar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. vissajjeti] one who answers (a question) A.I,103 (pañhaṁ). Cp. vissajjāpetar. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vissajjeti: {'def': '(vi+sajj+e), 回答，分配，派遣，花费，拿掉，发出，解放。【过】vissajjesi。【过分】vissajjita。【独】vissajjetvā。【现分】vissajjenta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + sajj + e), 回答，分配，派遣，花费，拿掉，发出，解放。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~jita。【独】 ~jetvā。【现分】 ~jenta。(p301)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vissajjita: {'def': '[pp. of vissajjeti] 1. spent, given away Sn.982 -- 2. let loose, sent off, discharged Mhvs 23, 88. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vissajjāpetar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. vissajjāpeti] one who replies or causes to reply DhA.IV,199. Cp. vissajjetar. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vissaka: {'def': '[of viś] dwelling: see paṭi°. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vissakamma: {'def': 'm. [Sk. Viśvakarman 一切造者] 毘舍羯磨, 工芸天 [工神].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Vissamana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vissamati] resting, reposing J.III,435. (Page 642)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vissamati: {'def': '(vi+sam+a), 休息，静卧，(使)精力恢复。【过】vissami。【现分】vissamanta。【独】vissamitvā(=assasitvāna, opp. avissamitvā)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[vi+samati, of śram] to rest, repose; to recover from fatigue J.I,485; II,70; 128, 133; III,208; IV,93, 293; V,73; PvA.43, 151. -- Caus. vissameti to give a rest, to make repose J.III,36. (Page 642)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi + sam + a), 休息，静卧，（使）精力恢复。【过】 ~sami。【现分】 ~samanta。【独】 ~mitvā。(p301)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vissametar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. vissameti] one who provides a rest, giver of repose, remover of fatigue J.VI,526. (Page 642)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vissanda: {'def': '【阳】 Vissandana, 【中】溢出，渗出。(p301)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】vissandana,【中】溢出，渗出。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vissandaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vissandati] overflowing PvA.119. (Page 642)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vissandati: {'def': '[vi+sandati, of syand] to flow out, to stream overflow J.I,51; V,274; PvA.34 (aor. °sandi=pagghari), 51 (ppr. °amāna), 80 (ger. °itvā), 119 (°anto=paggharanto), 123 (for paggharati; T. °eti). (Page 642)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+sand+a), 流出，溢出。【过】vissandi。【过分】vissandita。【现分】vissandamāna。【独】vissanditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + sand + a), 流出，溢出。【过】 ~ndi。【过分】 ~dita。【现分】 ~damāna。【独】 ~ditvā。(p301)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vissanta: {'def': '(Vissamati的【过分】), 已休息，已精神振作。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vissara: {'def': '【形】苦恼的哭声。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】苦恼的哭声。(p301)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. vi+sarati, of svar] 1. outcry, shout, cry of distress, scream Vin.I,87; II,152, 207; IV,316; PvA.22, 245 (s), 279, 284 (°ṁ karoti); Sdhp.188. -- 2. distress Vin.IV,212, 229. (Page 642)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vissarati: {'def': '[vi+sarati, of smṛ] to forget Vin.I,207; IV,261; Mhvs 26, 16. -- pp. vissarita. (Page 642)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi + sar + a), 忘记。【过】 vissari。【过分】 ~sarita。【独】 ~ritvā。(p301)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vi+sar(梵sr)动转+a), 忘记。【过】vissari。【过分】vissarita。【独】vissaritvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vissarita: {'def': '[opp. of vissarati] forgotten PvA.202. (Page 642)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vissasati: {'def': '& vissāseti [vi+sasati, of śvas] to confide in, to put one’s trust in (Loc. or Gen.), to be friendly with S.I,79 (vissase); J.I,461 (vissāsayitvā); III,148=525 (vissāsaye); IV,56; VI,292. -- pp. vissattha. (Page 642)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐Vissāseti (vi+sas(梵wvas)+a), 信任、亲厚想(to confide in, to put one’s trust in)。【过】vissasasi。【过分】vissattha。【现分】vissasanta。【独】vissasitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + sas + a), 信任，友善。【过】 ~sasi。【过分】 vissattha。【现分】 ~santa。【独】 ~sitvā。(p301)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vissattha: {'def': '(vissasati 的【过分】), 已相信，已亲密，已友善。(p301)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vissasati 的【过分】), 已相信，已亲密，已友善。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of vissasati] trusting or trusted; confident; being confided in or demanding confidence, intimate, friendly A.III,114; Vin.I,87 (so read for ṭṭh); IV,21; J.II,305; III,343; Miln.109 (bahu° enjoying great confidence); SnA 188 (°bhāva state of confidence); Sdhp.168, 593. --vissaṭṭhena (Instr.) in confidence Vin.II,99. -- Cp. abhi°. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vissavati: {'def': '(vi+savati, of sru), 流动，渗透(to flow, ooze Th.1, 453= Sn.205 (v. l. SS vissasati)。【现分】vissavanta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[vi+savati, of sru] to flow, ooze Th.1, 453= Sn.205 (v. l. SS vissasati). (Page 642)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vissaṭṭha: {'def': '(Vissajjeti的【过分】), 已派遣，已回答。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of vissajjati] 1. let loose; sent (out); released, dismissed; thrown; given out Mhvs 10, 68; J.I,370; III,373; PvA.46, 64, 123, 174. -- 2. (of the voice.) distinct, well enunciated D.I,114 (=apalibuddha, i. e. unobstructed; sandiddha-vilambit’ādi dosa-rahita DA.I,282); II,211; A.II,51; III,114; S.I,189; J.VI,16 (here as vissattha-vacana). -- 3. vissaṭṭha at J.IV,219 in phrase °indriya means something like “strong,” distinguished. The v. l. visatta° suggests a probable visaṭa°; it may on the other hand be a corruption of visiṭṭha°. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vissaṭṭhi: {'def': 'see visaṭṭhi. (Page 641)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】喷射，流出。(p301)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】喷射，流出。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vissota: {'def': '(adj.) [vi+sota, of sru] flowedaway, wasted Miln.294. (Page 642)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vissussati: {'def': '[vi+śuṣ] to dry up, to wither S.I,126 (in combⁿ ussussati vissussati, with ss from uss°). Spelling here visuss°, but ss at S.III,149. -- Caus. visoseti (q. v.). (Page 642)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vissuta: {'def': '【形】出名的，有名的。(p301)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vi+suta, of wru),【形】出名的，有名的(widely famed, renowned, famous)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [vi+suta, of śru] widely famed, renowned, famous Sn.137, 597, 998, 1009; Pv.II,7⁴; Mhvs 5, 19; PvA.107 (=dūra-ghuṭṭha). (Page 642)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vissāsa: {'def': '【阳】信心，信赖，亲密。 ~ka, ~sika, ~sāsī, 【形】亲密的，机密的，可信赖的。(p301)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vi+sāsa, of wvas),【阳】信心，信赖，亲密，亲厚(trust, confidence, intimacy, mutual agreement )。dubbissāsa, 难以信赖的(difficult to be trusted J.IV,462.)。vissaka, vissasika, vissasāsī,【形】亲密的，机密的，可信赖的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[vi+sāsa, of śvas] trust, confidence, intimacy, mutual agreement Vin.I,296; 308, A.II,78; J.I,189, 487; Miln.126; Vism.190; VvA.66; PvA.13, 265. --dubbissāsa difficult to be trusted J.IV,462. (Page 642)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vissāsaka: {'def': '(& °ika) (adj.) [vissāsa] intimate, confidential; trustworthy A.I,26; Miln.146; DA.I,289. (Page 642)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(&Vissāsika) (vissāsa,【形】可信赖的(intimate, confidential; trustworthy)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vissāsaniya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of vissāseti] to be trusted, trustworthy PvA.9; Sdhp.306, 441; neg. a° J.III,474; cp. dubbissāsaniya hard to trust J.IV,462. (Page 642)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vissāsanīya: {'def': '(grd. of vissāseti),【形】可信赖的，机密的(to be trusted, trustworthy)。dubbissāsaniya, 难以信赖的(hard to trust J.IV,462.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】可信赖的，机密的。(p301)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vissāsin: {'def': '(fr. vissāsa),【形】信赖的，信心的(intimate, confidential).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vissāsa] intimate, confidential A.III,136 (asanthava° intimate, although not acquainted). (Page 642)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visuddha: {'def': '(Visujjhati‘净化’的【过分】), 已乾净，已纯粹，已明亮，已无瑕疵，已使神圣。visuddhatā,【阴】visuddhatta,【中】纯净，清洁。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of visujjhati] clean, pure, bright; in appl^d meaning: purified, stainless, sanctified Vin.I,105; D.III,52 (cakkhu); S.II,122 (id.); IV,47 (sīla); A.IV,304 (su°); Sn.67, 517, 687; Nd² 601; Pug.60; PvA.1 (su°); Sdhp.269, 383. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visuddhajana-vilāsinī: {'def': 'f. 譬喻経の註釈 ApA.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Visuddhatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. visuddha] purity, purification A.II,239. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visuddhi: {'def': '【阴】纯净，神圣，光彩壮丽，优点。 ~deva, 【阳】圣人，净天。~magga, 【阳】圣道，净道。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】清净(有七清净：1.戒清净sīlavisuddhi、2.心清净cittavisuddhi、3.见清净 diṭṭhivisuddhi、4.度疑清净kaṅkhāvitaraṇa-visuddhi、5.道非道智见清净maggāmaggañāṇadassana-visuddhi、6.行道智见清净paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhi、7.智见清净ñāṇadassana-visuddhi)，光彩壮丽，优点。visuddhideva,【阳】圣人，净天。Visuddhimagga,【阳】《清净道论》，净道。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [vi+suddhi] brightness, splendour, excellency; (ethically) purity, holiness, sanctification; virtue, rectitude Vin.I,105 (visuddho paramāya visuddhiyā); D.I,53; III,214 (diṭṭhi°, sīla°), 288; M.I,147; S.III,69; A.I,95 (sīla° & diṭṭhi°); II,80 (catasso dakkhiṇā°), 195; III,315; V,64 (paramattha°); Sn.813, 824, 840, 892; Dh.16 (kamma°); Ps.I,21 (sīla°, citta°, diṭṭhi°); II,85 (id.); Nd¹ 138, 162; Vism.2; SnA 188 (°divasa), PvA.13 (°cittatā); Sdhp.447. A class of divine beings (dogmatically the highest in the stages of development, viz. gods by sanctification) is called visuddhi-devā Nd² 307; J.I,139; VvA.18. See under deva. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visuddhi-magga: {'def': 'm. 清浄道論 [仏音が著わした哲学書].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Visujjhati: {'def': '[vi+sujjhati] to be cleaned, to be cleansed, to be pure Vin.II,137; J.I,75; III,472. -- pp. visuddha. ‹-› Caus. visodheti (q. v.). (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+sudh(梵wudh / wundh)弄乾净+ya), 净化，纯化。【过】visujjhi。【现分】visujjhamāna。【独】visujjhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + sudh + ya), 净化，纯化。【过】 ~jjhi。【现分】 ~jhamāna。【独】 ~jhitvā。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Visukkha: {'def': '(adj.) [vi+sukkha] dried out or up PvA.58. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visukkhita: {'def': '(adj.) [vi+sukkhita] dried up Miln.303. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visuŋ: {'def': '【副】分开地，个别地，分别地。 ~karaṇa, 【中】分离。 ~katvā, 【独】分开了。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Visuṁ: {'def': '【副】分开地，个别地，分别地。visuṁkaraṇa,【中】分离。visuṁkatvā,【独】分开了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [cp. Sk. viṣu, a derivation fr. vi°] separately, individually; separate, apart DhA.II,26 (mātā-pitaro visuṁ honti). Usually repeated (distributively) visuṁ visuṁ each on his own, one by one, separately, e. g. Vism.250; Mhvs 6, 44; SnA 583; VvA.38; PvA.214. --visukaraṇa separation ThA.257. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visāda: {'def': '【阳】灰心，沮丧，失望情绪。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. vi+sad] depression, dejection D.I,248; DA.I,121; Sdhp.117. Cp. visīdati. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】灰心，沮丧，失望情绪。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Visāhaṭa: {'def': '﹐散乱(梵viksepa)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [visa+āhaṭa] only neg. a° imperturbed, balanced Dhs.11, 15, 24 etc. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visāhāra: {'def': '(visa+āhāra, or vi+saṁ+āhāra),心烦意乱的(distractedness)，扰乱(perturbation)。【反】avisāhāra,平静(balance)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[visa+āhāra, or vi+saṁ+āhāra] distractedness, perturbation; neg. a° balance Dhs.11, 15. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visākha: {'def': '(adj.) [visākhā as adj.] having branches, forked; in ti° three-branched S.I,118=M.I,109. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visākhā: {'def': '（居士名）维沙卡，（古音译：）毘舍佉', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '毗舍佉月', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '(f.) [vi+sākhā, Sk. viśākhā] N. of a lunar mansion (nakkhatta) or month (see vesākha), usually as visākha° (--puṇṇamā), e. g. SnA 391; VvA.165. (Page 639)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】氐宿（二十七星宿之一），毗舍佉（佛陀的在家女信徒）。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】氐宿(二十七星宿之一)，毘舍佉(佛陀的在家女信徒，布施第一)。《法句经注》(Dh.A.v.53.；CS:p.1.254~5)毘舍佉结婚前，父亲给的建言：(1)“anto-aggi bahi na nīharitabbo”ti āha, “Sakkā nu kho amhehi ubhato paṭivissakagehānaṁ aggiṁ adatvā vasitun”ti? “Evaṁ kira, ammā”ti. “Tātā, mayhaṁ pitā na etaṁ sandhāya kathesi. Idaṁ pana sandhāya kathesi–‘amma, tava sassusasurasāmikānaṁ aguṇaṁ disvā bahi tasmiṁ tasmiṁ gehe ṭhatvā mā kathesi. Evarūpo hi aggisadiso aggi nāma natthī’”ti. Ayyā, etaṁ tāva evaṁ hotu, imissā pana pitā.(不要将家里的火拿到外面(邻居)：说：‘释迦女!为什么跟我们两人的邻居，不给家里的火？’‘如是，确实，母亲。’‘亲爱的!不要评论我的父亲。’‘女儿!乃至於见到公婆和丈夫的坏事，保持在家里，不要处处外传。像这样类似火，不是(真的)火。’母亲! 这样知道了。这个是父亲的(建言)。) (2)“bāhirato aggi na anto pavesetabbo”ti āha, “kiṁ Sakkā amhehi anto aggimhi nibbute bāhirato aggiṁ anāharitun”ti? “Evaṁ kira, ammā”ti. Tātā, mayhaṁ pitā na etaṁ sandhāya kathesi, idaṁ pana sandhāya kathesi–sace paṭivissakagehesu itthiyo vā purisā vā sassusasurasāmikānaṁ aguṇaṁ kathenti, tehi kathitaṁ āharitvā “asuko nāma tumhākaṁ evañca evañca aguṇaṁ kathetī”ti puna mā katheyyāsi. “Etena hi agginā sadiso aggi nāma natthī”ti. Evaṁ imasmimpi kāraṇe sā niddosāva ahosi.(不要将外面(邻居)的火拿到家里：‘释迦女!为什么不要将外面的火拿到家里?’‘如是，确实，母亲。’‘亲爱的!不要评论我的父亲，这是关於评论。’如果评论邻居--若女、若男、若公婆和丈夫的坏事，带来他们的评论，‘某某，不评论你们的这个那个坏事。’‘像这样类似火，不是(真的)火。如此，在这事情不要趟混水的。)(3)“Ye dadanti, tesaṁyeva dātabban”ti vuttaṁ. Taṁ “yācitakaṁ upakaraṇaṁ gahetvā ye paṭidenti, tesaññeva dātabban”ti sandhāya vuttaṁ.(只给那些会给者：帮忙那些有借有还的人，应该给他们。)(4)“Ye na denti, tesaṁ na dātabban”ti idampi ye yācitakaṁ gahetvā na paṭidenti, tesaṁ na dātabbanti sandhāya vuttaṁ.(不给那些会不给者：不借给那些有借无还的人，不应该给他们。)(5)“Dadantassāpi adadantassāpi dātabban”ti idaṁ pana daliddesu ñātimittesu sampattesu te paṭidātuṁ sakkontu vā mā vā, tesaṁ dātumeva vaṭṭatīti sandhāya vuttaṁ. (给那些既给又不给者：已来到的贫困者、亲戚和朋友，即使有借无还，也应该施与他们。)(6)“Sukhaṁ nisīditabban”ti idampi sassusasurasāmike disvā vuṭṭhātabbaṭṭhāne nisīdituṁ na vaṭṭatīti sandhāya vuttaṁ.(快乐地坐：看见公婆和丈夫应起迎，不应坐著。(不起迎则内心傲慢，不会快乐。))(7)“Sukhaṁ bhuñjitabban”ti idaṁ pana sassusasurasāmikehi puretaraṁ abhuñjitvā te parivisitvā sabbehi laddhāladdhaṁ ñatvā pacchā sayaṁ bhuñjituṁ vaṭṭatīti sandhāya vuttaṁ.(快乐地吃：公婆和丈夫未吃饭前，不吃，在他们用餐时侍立一旁，已知道服侍好之后，自己才吃饭。(不侍候则不会快乐。))(8)“Sukhaṁ nipajjitabban”ti idampi sassusasurasāmikehi puretaraṁ sayanaṁ āruyha na nipajjitabbaṁ, tesaṁ kattabbayuttakaṁ vattapaṭivattaṁ katvā pacchā sayaṁ nipajjituṁ yuttanti sandhāya vuttaṁ.(快乐地睡：公婆和丈夫要先上床，否则不睡，妻子应该在睡前做好自己的各种责任，才去睡觉。(不尽责则不会快乐。))(9)“Aggi paricaritabbo”ti idaṁ pana sassumpi sasurampi sāmikampi aggikkhandhaṁ viya uragarājānaṁ viya ca katvā passituṁ vaṭṭatīti sandhāya vuttaṁ.(应照顾好家火：侍候公婆和丈夫应要当作侍候像侍火、蛇王(uragarājānaṁ)一样。)(10)“Antodevatā namassitabbā”ti idampi sassuñca sasurañca sāmikañca devatā viya katvā daṭṭhuṁ vaṭṭatīti sandhāya vuttaṁ.(应礼敬家神：公婆和丈夫理应要当作神明一样。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Visākhā Migāramātar: {'def': 'f. ミガ一ラの母なる毘舎佉, 毘舍佉鹿母 [布施第一の信女, 鹿母講堂を寄進].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Visāla: {'def': '【形】大的，宽广的，广大的，庞大的。visālakkhi,【阴】(女人)有大眼睛。visālatā,【阴】visālatta,【中】巨大，无限。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. viśāla] wide, broad, extensive Sn.38; J.V,49, 215 (°pakhuma); Miln.102, 311.

--akkhī (f.) having large eyes J.V,40; Vv 37¹ (+vipulalocanā; or a petī). (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】大的，宽广的，广大的，庞大的。 ~kkhi, 【阴】（女人）有大眼睛。 ~tā, 【阴】 ~tta, 【中】巨大，无限。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Visālakkhi-vimāna: {'def': 'n. 広目天宮', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Visālatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. visāla] breadth, extensiveness VvA.104. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visāra: {'def': '[fr. vi+sṛ] spreading, diffusion, scattering DhsA.118. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visārada: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. BSk. viśārada, e. g. AvS.I,180. On etym. see sārada] self-possessed, confident; knowing how to conduct oneself, skilled, wise D.I,175; II,86; S.I,181; IV,246; V,261; A.II,8 (vyatta+); III,183, 203; IV,310, 314 sq.; V,10 sq.; M.I,386; Ap 23; J.III,342; V,41; Miln.21; Sdhp.277. --avisārada diffident Miln.20, 105. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】镇静的，自信的，熟练的。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】镇静的，自信的，熟练的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Visāraka: {'def': '(adj.) [vi+sāraka, of sṛ] spreading, extending, expanding Vin.III,97 (vattu° T.; vatthu° MSS.). (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visāta: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vi+śat, cp. sāṭeti] crushed to pieces, destroyed M 11 102 (°gabbha, with mūḷha-gabbha; v. l. vighāta). (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visāṇa: {'def': '【中】（牛、羊等的）角。 ~maya, 【形】兽角制的。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】(牛、羊等的)角。visāṇamaya,【形】兽角制的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. viṣāṇa] 1. the horn of an animal (as cow, ox, deer, rhinoceros) Vin.I,191; A.II,207; IV,376; Sn.35 (khagga°, q. v.), 309; Pug.56 (miga°); Ap 50 (usabha°); J.I,505; Miln.103. -- 2. (also as m.) the tusks of an elephant J.III,184; V,41, 48.

--maya made of horn Vin.II,115. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visāṭita: {'def': '[pp. of vi+sāṭeti] cut in pieces, smashed, broken J.II,163 (=bhinna C.). (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visīdana: {'def': '【中】沉没，灰心。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】沉没，灰心。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Visīdati: {'def': '(vi+sad坐+a), 下沉，沮丧。【过】visīdi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + sad + a), 下沉，沮丧。【过】 visīdi。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[vi+sad; cp. visāda & pp. BSk. viṣaṇṇa Divy 44] 1. to sink down J.IV,223. -- 2. to falter, to be dejected or displeased S.I,7; A.III,158; Pug.65. -- pp. visanna. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visīvana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. visīveti] warming oneself J.I,326; V,202. As visibbana at Vin.IV,115. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】取暖。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】取暖。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Visīveti: {'def': '(vi + siv + e), 取暖。【过】 ~esi。【现分】 ~venta。【独】 ~vetvā。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[vi+sīveti, which corresponds to Sk. vi-śyāpayati (lexicogr.!), Caus. of śyā, śyāyati to coagulate; lit. to dissolve, thaw. The v stands for p; śyā is contracted to sī] to warm oneself Miln.47; J.II,68; DhA.I,225, 261; II,89. As visibbeti (in analogy to visibbeti to sew) at Vin.IV,115. -- Caus. II. visīvāpeti J.II,69. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+siv+e), 取暖。【过】visīvesi。【现分】visīventa。【独】visīvetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Visīyati: {'def': '[vi+sīyati; cp. Sk. śīyate, Pass. of śyā to coagulate] to be dissolved; 3^rd pl. imper. med. visīyaruṁ Th.1, 312 (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 126). (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visūcikā: {'def': '【阴】霍乱。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. *Sk. visūcikā] cholera Miln.153, 167. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】霍乱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Visūka: {'def': '【中】蠕动，表演。 ~dassana, 【中】参观表演。(p300)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】蠕动，表演。visūkadassana,【中】观看表演。indriyesu guttadvārassa visūkadassanaj kaṇṭako.(护诸根门者，以看戏为障碍)。D.1./I,6.﹑D.2./I,65.︰“Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ visūkadassanamanuyuttā viharanti, seyyathidaṁ, (1)naccaṁ (2)gītaṁ (3)vāditaṁ (4)pekkhaṁ (5)akkhānaṁ (6)pāṇissaraṁ (7)vetālaṁ (8)kumbhathūṇaṁ (9)sobhanakaṁ (10)caṇḍālaṁ (11)vaṁsaṁ (12)dhovanaṁ (13)hatthiyuddhaṁ (14)assayuddhaṁ (15)mahiṁsayuddhaṁ (16)usabhayuddhaṁ (17)ajayuddhaṁ (18)meṇḍayuddhaṁ (19)kukkuṭayuddhaṁ (20)vaṭṭakayuddhaṁ (21)daṇḍayuddhaṁ (22)muṭṭhiyuddhaṁ (23)nibbuddhaṁ (24)uyyodhikaṁ (25)balaggaṁ (26)senābyūhaṁ (27)anīkadassanaṁ iti vā, iti evarūpā visūkadassanā paṭivirato samaṇo Gotamo”ti.(或如有些尊敬的沙门、婆罗门食用信施的食物，他们住於不适宜的观看表演，这即是：『(1)舞蹈、(2)歌唱、(3)演奏、(4)舞台戏、(5)民谣、(6)鼓掌乐、(7)铙钹乐、(8)鼓乐、(9)小丑戏、(10)铁丸戏、(11)竹戏、(12)洗(骨)祭礼(=aṭṭhidhovanaṁ土葬多年后，捡骨之日的祭礼，cf. A.10.107.)、(13)斗象、(14)斗马、(15)斗水牛、(16)斗牡牛、(17)斗山羊、(18)斗牡羊、(19)斗鸡、(20)斗鹌鹑、(21)棍斗、(22)拳击、(23)摔角、(24)演习(演练攻击的地方)、(25)点兵(象军有多少﹑马军有多少﹑骑兵有多少﹑步兵有多少)、(26)布阵(象军站在此﹑马军站在此﹑骑兵站在此﹑步兵站在此)、(27)阅兵(校阅象军﹑马军﹑骑兵﹑步兵)』沙门乔达摩离如此观看表演。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [perhaps to sūc, sūcayati] restless motion, wriggling, twisting, twitching (better than “show,” although connection with sūc would give meaning “indication, show”), almost synonymous with vipphandita. Usually in cpd. diṭṭhi° scuffling or wriggling of opinion, wrong views, heresy M.I,8, 486; Sn.55 (cp. Nd² 301); Pv IV.1³⁷.

--dassana visiting shows (as fairs) D.I,5 (cp. DA.I,77: “visūkaṁ paṭani-bhūtaṁ dassanaṁ,” reading not clear); A.I,212; II,209; Pug.58. (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Visūkāyita: {'def': '(nt.) [pp. of visūkāyeti, denom. fr. visūka] 1. restlessness, impatience M.I,446. -- 2. disorder, twisting, distortion (of views); usually in phrase diṭṭhi° with °visevita & °vipphandita e. g. M.I,234; S.I,123 (Bdhgh’s explⁿ at K.S. I.321 is “vinivijjhan’aṭṭhena viloman’aṭṭhena”); II,62 (in same combⁿ; Bdhgh at K.S. II.203: “sabbaṁ micchādiṭṭhi-vevacanaṁ”); Dhs.381 (“disorder of opinion” trslⁿ); Nd² 271^III; Vbh.145; DhsA.253. Cp. v. l. S.I,123¹⁷ (K.S. I.155 “disorders”; n. p. 321). (Page 640)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vitaccheti: {'def': '[vi+taccheti] 1. tear, pluck, pick to pieces; in simile M.I,364 (+virājeti)=S.II,255 (reads vibhajeti for virājeti)=Vin.III,105 (id.). -- 2. to smoothe: see pp. vitacchita. (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+tacch+e), 1.削…的皮(tear, pluck, pick to pieces)。2.使平坦(to smoothe)。【过】vitacchesi。【过分】vitacchita。suvitacchita, 好好地使平坦。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + tacch + e), 削…的皮，使平坦。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~chita。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vitacchika: {'def': 'at S.II,99=IV.188 read vītaccika (q. v.). (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vitacchikā: {'def': '【阴】疥疮。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. *Sk. (medical) vicarcikā] scabies Nd² 304¹ (as roga). (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. *Sk. vicarcikā),【阴】疥疮(scabies Nd2 3041 )。疥疮由疥虫引起的，它的只有0.4mm，针头大小，肉眼可以见到的极限。身体发痒的初期不易诊断出来。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vitacchita: {'def': '[pp. of vitaccheti] planed, smoothed; su° well carded (of a cīvara) Vin.III,259. (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vitakka: {'def': '寻', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '【阳】沉思，思考。 ~na, 【中】沉思。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹vi+takk想),【阳】沉思，思考(reflection, thought, thinking; “initial application”)。vitakkana,【中】沉思。《分别论》〈禅那分别品〉(Vbh.565.)︰Tattha katamo vitakko? Yo 1takko 2vitakko 3saṅkappo 4appanā 5byappanā 6cetaso abhiniropanā 7sammāsaṅkappo-- ayaṁ vuccati “vitakko”.什么叫做‘寻(思)’(vitakko﹐vi(含强化之义)+takka＜takk思索﹐寻、思索)？凡是1寻(takka)、2寻思 (vitakka﹐寻思﹑思维﹑思量)、3思惟(saṅkappa)、4安止(appanā﹐把心固定在一个对象)、5极安止(byappanā=vyappanā＜vi+appanā)、6心的安置(cetaso abhiniropanā)、7正思惟(sammāsaṅkappo)，这称为寻。七个同义词中，最能表达「寻」的性质及作用的是「心的安置」(cetaso abhiniropanā)，即把心安置在所缘上。A.I,171.：api ca kho avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhiṁ samāpannassa cetasā ceto paricca pajānāti–‘yathā imassa bhoto manosaṅkhārā paṇihitā imassa cittassa anantarā amuṁ nāma vitakkaṁ vitakkessatī’ti.(但入无伺无寻之定，而以心觉察(他人之)心而知：此尊者如此志向，此心无间断地如此伺察。) “Tayo akusalavitakkā--kāmavitakko, byāpādavitakko, vihiṁsāvitakko.(三不善寻：欲寻、恚寻、害寻)“Tayo kusalavitakkā--nekkhammavitakko, abyāpādavitakko, avihiṁsāvitakko.(三善寻：出离寻、无恚寻、无害寻) (D.33./III,215.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[vi+takka] reflection, thought, thinking; “initial application” (Cpd. 282). -- Def^d as “vitakkanaṁ vitakko, ūhanan ti vuttaṁ hoti” at Vism.142 (with simile on p. 143, comparing vitakka with vicāra: kumbhakārassa daṇḍa-ppahārena cakkaṁ bhamayitvā, bhājanaṁ karontassa uppīḷana-hattho viya vitakko (like the hand holding the wheel tight), ito c’ito sañcaraṇahattho viya vicāro: giving vitakka the characteristic of fixity & steadiness, vicāra that of movement & display). -- D.II,277 (“pre-occupation” trslⁿ: see note Dial. II.311); III,104, 222, 287 (eight Mahāpurisa°); M.I,114 (dvidhā-kato v.), 377; S.I,39, 126, 186, 203; II,153; IV,69, 216; A.II,36; III,87 (dhamma°); IV,229 (Mahāpurisa°), 353 (°upaccheda); Sn.7, 270 sq., 970, 1109; J.I,407 (Buddha°, Saṅgha°, Nibbāna°); Nd¹ 386, 493, 501 (nine); Nd² s. v. takka; Ps.I,36, 136, 178; Pv III,5⁸; Pug.59, 68; Vbh.86, 104 (rūpa°, sadda° etc.), 228 (sa°), 362 (akusala°); Dhs.7, 160, 1268; Tikp 61, 333, 353; Vism.291 (°upaccheda); Miln.82, 309; DhsA.142; DhA.IV,68; VbhA.490; PvA.226, 230. -- kāma°, vihiṁsā°, vyāpāda° (sensual, malign, cruel thought): D.III,226; S.II,151 sq.; III,93; A.I,148, 274 sq.; II,16, 117, 252; III,390, 428. Opp. nekkhamma°, avyāpāda°, avihiṁsā° A.I,275; II,76; III,429. -- vitakka is often comb^d with vicāra or “initial & sustained application” Mrs. Rh. D.; Cpd. 282; “reflection & investigation” Rh. D.; to denote the whole of the mental process of thinking (viz. fixing one’s attention and reasoning out, or as Cpd. 17 expl^s it “vitakka is the directing of concomitant properties towards the object; vicāra is the continued exercise of the mind on that object.” See also above defⁿ at Vism.142). Both are properties of the first jhāna (called sa-vitakka sa-vicāra) but are discarded in the second jhāna (called a°). See e. g. D. I.37; S.IV,360 sq.; A.IV,300; Vin.III,4; Vism.85; and formula of jhāna. The same of pīti & samādhi at Vbh.228, of paññā at Vbh.323. The same combⁿ (vitakka+vicāra) at foll. passages: D.III,219 (of samādhi which is either sa°, or a°, or avitakka vicāra-matta); S.IV,193; V,111; A.IV,409 sq., 450; Nett 16; Miln.60, 62; Vism.453. Cp. rūpa- (sadda- etc.) vitakka+rūpa‹-› (sadda- etc.) vicāra A.IV,147; V,360; Vbh.103. -- On term (also with vicāra) see further: Cpd. 40, 56, 98, 238 sq., 282 (on difference between v. & manasikāra); Expos. I.188ⁿ; Kvu trslⁿ 238¹. -- Cp. pa°, pari°.

Note. Looking at the combⁿ vitakka+vicāra in earlier and later works one comes to the conclusion that they were once used to denote one & the same thing: just thought, thinking, only in an emphatic way (as they are also semantically synonymous), and that one has to take them as one expression, like jānāti passati, without being able to state their difference. With the advance in the Saṅgha of intensive study of terminology they became distinguished mutually. Vitakka became the inception of mind, or attending, and was no longer applied, as in the Suttas, to thinking in general. The expl^ns of Commentators are mostly of an edifying nature and based more on popular etymology than on natural psychological grounds. (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vitakkana: {'def': '(nt.)=vitakka Vism.142. (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vitakketi: {'def': '[denom. fr. vitakka] to reflect, reason, consider S.I,197, 202; IV,169; V,156; A.II,36; Miln.311. -- pp. vitakkita. (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi + tak + e), 细想，考虑。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~kita。【现分】~kenta。【独】 ~ketvā。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vi+takk+e), 细想，考虑(to reflect, reason, consider)。【过】vitakkesi。【过分】vitakkita。【现分】vitakkenta。【独】vitakketvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vitakkita: {'def': '[pp. of vitakketi] reflected, reasoned, argued DA.I,121. Cp. pari°. (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vitanoti: {'def': '(vi+tan+o), 伸展，展开(stretch out, spread out)。【过】vitani。poet. ger. vitanitvāna. -- Pass. vitaniyyati ibid. -- pp. vitata. Cp. vitāna.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(*vitanati) [vi+tanoti] to stretch out, spread out; poet. ger. vitanitvāna J.VI,453. -- Pass. vitaniyyati ibid. -- pp. vitata. Cp. vitāna. (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi + tan + o), 伸展，展开。【过】 vitani。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vitarati: {'def': '[vi+tarati] 1. to go through, come through, overcome Sn.495, 779 (ger. °eyya, taken as Pot. at Nd¹ 57: oghaṁ samatikkameyya), 941, 1052; Pv III,2⁴ (vitaritvā =vitiṇṇo hutvā PvA.181, q. v. for detail). -- 2. to perform J.II,14 (bubhukkhito no vitarāsi bhottuṁ; v. l. visahāmi). -- pp. vitiṇṇa. (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+tar+a), 1.被通过，克服(to go through, come through, overcome)。2.实践(to perform)。【过】vitari。【过分】vitarita, vitiṇṇa。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + tar + a), 被通过，分配，除掉。【过】 vitari。【过分】 vitarita,vitiṇṇa。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vitaraṇa: {'def': '【中】分配，克服，通过(overcoming, getting through)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】分配，克服，通过。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vitarati] overcoming, getting through M.I,147 (kaṅkhā°); Miln.233 (id.), 351; Sdhp.569. (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vitata: {'def': '[pp. of vitanoti] stretched, extended, diffused S.I,207; Sn.272, 669 (v. l. vitthata); J.I,356 (tanta° where the strings were stretched); Miln.102, 307; Mhvs 17, 31 (vallīhi v.) -- nt. vitata a drum (with leather on both sides) VvA.37. (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vitanoti 的【过分】) 已伸展，已扩充，已散播。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vitanoti 的【过分】) 已伸展，已扩充，已散播(stretched, extended, diffused)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vitatha: {'def': '(adj.) [vi+tatha; cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vitatha] untrue; nt. untruth D.II,73 (na hi Tathāgatā vitathaṁ bhaṇanti); Sn.9 sq.; Vv 53¹⁵ (=atatha, musā ti attho VvA.240); J.V,112; VI,207; Ps.104; DA.I,62. -- avitatha true S.II,26; V,430; Miln.184; Sdhp.530; DA.I,65. (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】错误的，不正确的(untrue)。【中】不真实(untruth)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】错误的，不正确的。【中】不真实。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vitaṇḍavāda: {'def': '【阳】诡辩(sophistry)。vitaṇḍavādī(vitaṇḍavādin),【阳】诡辩学者(sophist, arguer DhsA 3 (so read for vidaḍḍha))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】诡辩。 ~vādī, 【阳】诡辩学者。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vitaṇḍā: {'def': '(cp. Epic Sk. vitaṇḍā),【阴】诡辩(tricky disputation, frivolous or captious discussion)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. vitaṇḍā, e. g. Mbh 2, 1310; 7, 3022] tricky disputation, frivolous or captious discussion; in cpds. vitaṇḍa°: °vāda sophistry SnA 447; DA.I,247; °vādin a sophist, arguer DhsA.3 (so read for vidaḍḍha); VbhA.9, 51, 319, 459. See lokāyata. (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vitiṇṇa: {'def': '见 Vitarati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of vitarati] 1. overcome or having overcome, gone through, conquered Dh.141 (°kaṅkha); Sn.514 (id.), 746; PvA.181. -- 2. given up, rejected, abandoned Dh.176 (°paraloka); J.IV,447 (=pariccatta C.). (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '见 Vitarati。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vitta: {'def': '¹ [orig. pp. of vindati=Av. vista, Gr. a]/istos, Lat. vīsus; lit. one who has found, acquired or recognized; but already in Vedic meaning (as nt.) “acquired possessions”] property, wealth, possessions, luxuries S.I,42; Sn.181 sq., 302; J.V,350, 445; VI,308; Pv.II,8¹ (=vittiyā upakaraṇa-bhūtaṁ vittaṁ PvA.106). -- Often in phrase °ûpakaraṇa possessions & means, i. e. wealth, e. g. D.I,134; S.I,71; IV,324; Pug.52; Dh.I,295; PvA.3, 71. Vittaṁ is probably the right reading S.I,126 (15) for cittaṁ. Cf. p. 123 (3); K.S. I.153, n. 3. (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (adj.) [identical with vitta¹] gladdened, joyful, happy J.III,413 (=tuṭṭha); IV,103; Vv 41⁴ (=tuṭṭha C.); 44¹⁴ (id.), 49⁵ (id.). (Page 621)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '³ [pp. of vic to sift, cp. Sk. vikta] see vi°. (Page 621)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '3,【中】钵(音译：钵陀)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2(identical with vitta1),【中】喜悦，快乐(gladdened, joyful, happy)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '3(pp. of vic to sift, cp. Sk. vikta),分离的，疏离的(separated, secluded, aloof, solitary, separate, alone)。cf. Vivitta(vi+vitta3)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1(orig. pp. of vindati),【中】财富，财产(property, wealth, possessions, luxuries)。pahūtavittūpakaraṇo,【阳】荣华富贵，具备丰富的财富。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】财富，财产。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vittaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vitta¹] possessing riches, becoming rich by (-°) J.I,339 (lañca°); IV,267 (miga°), VI,256 (jūta°). (Page 621)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vittakatā: {'def': '(f.) [vittaka+tā] in suta° “the fact of getting rich through learning” as an explⁿ of the name Sutasoma J.V,457 (for auspiciousness). Dutoit trsl^s quite differently: “weil er am Keltern des Somatrankes seine Freude hatte,” hardly correct. (Page 621)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vittha: {'def': '【中】酒碗。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】酒碗(a bowl)。surāvittha, 酒碗(for drinking spirits)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [vi+sthā?] a bowl, in surā° for drinking spirits J.V,427; DhA.III,66. (Page 621)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vitthaka: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vittha] a small bowl, as receptacle (āvesana°) for needles, scissors & thimbles Vin.II,117. (Page 621)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vitthambhana: {'def': '(fr. vi+thambhati),【中】强化，牢固，支援，撑持，刚(making firm, strengthening, supporting)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】强化，牢固，支持。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vi+thambhati] making firm, strengthening, supporting Vism.351 (cp. DhsA.335). (Page 621)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vitthambheti: {'def': '[vi+thambheti] to make firm, strengthen DhsA.335. (Page 621)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi + thambh + e), 扩张，张开，使膨胀。【过】 ~esi。【过分】~bhita。【独】 ~bhetvā。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vi+thambh+e), 扩张，张开，使膨胀(to make firm, strengthen)。【过】vitthamesi。【过分】vitthambhita。【独】vitthambhetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vitthata: {'def': '(vittharati 的【过分】), 已延长，已张大，已展开。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of vi+stṛ] 1. extended, spread out, wide M. I.178; Vin.I,297; J.V,319; Miln.311; SnA 214; PvA.68 (doubtful!). -- 2. wide, spacious (of a robe) Vin.III,259. -- 3. flat SnA 301. (Page 621)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2, 矛盾，犹豫(perplexed, confused, hesitating)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1(vittharati (‹vi+str)的【过分】), 1.已延长，已张大，已展开(extended, spread out)。2.宽(wide)。vipulavitthatapaññā﹐【阴】广大慧。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [pp. of vitthāyati (?). A difficult form!] perplexed, confused, hesitating Miln.36 (bhīta+). Ed. Müller, P.Gr. 102 considers it as pp. of vi+tras to tremble, together with vitthāyati & vitthāyi. (Page 621)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vitthinna: {'def': '已延长，已张大，已展开(“spread out,” wide, large, extensive, roomy)。参考 Vitthata。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '参考 Vitthata。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vitthiṇṇa: {'def': '[vi+thiṇṇa] “spread out,” wide, large, extensive, roomy J.II,159 (so read for vittiṇṇa); Miln.102, 283, 311, 382; DhsA.307; SnA 76; VvA.88; Sdhp.391, 617. Cp. pari°. (Page 621)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vitthāra: {'def': '【阳】解释，详情，宽度。 ~kathā, 【阴】注释。 ~to, 【副】详细地。 ~rika, 【形】普遍的。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr, vi+stṛ] 1. expansion, breadth; Instr. vitthārena in breadth Miln.17; same Abl. vitthārato J.I,49. -- 2. extension, detail; often in C. style, introducing & detailed explanation of the subject in question, either with simple statement “vitthāro” (i. e. here the foll. detail; opp. saṅkhepa), e. g. DA.I,65, 229; SnA 325 [cp. same in BSk. “vistaraḥ,” e. g. Divy 428], or with cpds. °kathā SnA 464; PvA.19; °desanā SnA 163; °vacana SnA 416. Thus in general often in Instr. or Abl. as adv. “in detail,” in extenso (opp. saṅkhittena in short): vitthārena D.III,241; S.IV,93; A.II,77, 177, 189; III,177; Pug.41; PvA.53, 113; vitthārato Vism.351, 479; PvA.71, 77, 81. Cp. similarly BSk. vistarena kāryaṁ Divy 377. (Page 621)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. vi+str),【阳】1.扩张，宽度(expansion, breadth. Instr. vitthārena; Abl. vitthārato)。2.延长，详情，广说(extension, detail. opp. saṅkhepa略说)。vitthārakathā,【阴】注释(SnA 163; SnA 464; PvA.19)。vitthārato,【副】详细地。vitthārika,【形】普遍的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vitthāratā: {'def': '(fr. vitthāra),【阴】explicitness, detail Nett 2. As vitthāraṇā at Nett 9.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. vitthāra] explicitness, detail Nett 2. As vitthāraṇā at Nett 9. (Page 621)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vitthāreti: {'def': '(vi+thar+e), 1.展开(to spread out)。2.扩张(to expand, detail give in full)。【过】vitthāresi。【过分】vitthārita。【现分】vitthārenta。【独】vitthāretvā。【被】vitthārīyati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. vitthāra] 1. to spread out A.III,187. -- 2. to expand, detail give in full Vism.351; SnA 94, 117, 127, 274 and passim. -- pp. vitthārita; f.pp. vithāretabba. (Page 621)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi + thar + e), 展开，解释，扩张。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~rita。【现分】 ~renta。【独】 ~retvā。【被】 vitthārīyati。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vitthārika: {'def': '(adj.) [vitthāra+ika] 1. wide-spread Miln.272. -- 2. widely famed, renowned Sn.693; J.IV,262. See also bahujañña. (Page 621)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vitthārita: {'def': '[pp. of vitthāreti] detailed, told in full Vism.351; Mhvs 1, 2 (ati° with too much detail; opp. saṅkhitta). (Page 621)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vitthāriyati: {'def': '[denom. fr. vitthāra] to expand, to go into detail Nett 9. (Page 621)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vitthāyati: {'def': '[vi+styā: see under thīna] to be embarrassed or confused (lit. to become quite stiff), to be at a loss, to hesitate Vin.I,94=II.272; aor. vitthāsi (vitthāyi?) ibid. [the latter taken as aor. of tras by Geiger, P.Gr. § 166]. -- pp. vitthata² & vitthāyita. (Page 621)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+styā: see under thīna) 被尴尬或被混乱(to be embarrassed or confused (lit. to become quite stiff))。pp. vitthata2 & vitthāyita.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vitthāyitatta: {'def': '(abstr. fr. vitthāyita, pp. of vitthāyati) ,【中】困惑，犹豫(perplexity, hesitation)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. vitthāyita, pp. of vitthāyati] perplexity, hesitation D.I,249. (Page 621)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vitti: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. vitti, fr. vid] prosperity, happiness, joy, felicity A.III,78; J.IV,103; VI,117; Kvu 484; Th.1, 609; Dhs.9 (cp. DhsA.143); PvA.106. (Page 621)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Sk. vitti, fr. vid),【阴】喜悦，快乐，享受，幸福(prosperity, happiness, joy, felicity)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】喜悦，快乐。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vitudana: {'def': '【中】刺。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】刺。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vitudati: {'def': '(vi + tud + a), 用肘轻推，刺。【过】 vitudi。【独】 ~ditvā。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[vi+tudati] to strike, prick, nudge, knock, push, attack D.I,105; S.IV,225; A.III,366; Sn.675; Ud.67; J.II,163, 185. -- Pass. vitujjati Vism.505; VbhA.104, 108. -- pp. vitunna. (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+tud+a), 用肘轻推，刺。【过】vitudi。【独】vituditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vitunna: {'def': '(vitudati 的【过分】)。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vitudati 的【过分】) 已用肘轻推，已刺。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of vitudati] struck, pricked, pushed J.III,380. (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vitureyyati: {'def': 'at J.V,47 is not clear. The v. l. is vitariyati; the C. expl^s by tuleti tīreti, i. e. contemplates, examines. Kern, Toev. s. v. discusses it in detail & proposes writing vituriyata (3^rd sg. praet. med.), & expl^s at “get over” [cp. Vedic tūryati overcome, fr. tur or tvar=P. tarati²]. Dutoit trsl^s “überstieg.” (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vitāna: {'def': '(m. & nt.) [fr. vi+tan] spread-out, canopy, awning Vin.IV,279; J.I,40, 62, 83; DhA.II,42; SnA 447; VvA.32, 173; PvA.154. See also cela°. (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】天篷。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】天篷。(p289)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vivadana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vivadati] causing separation, making discord D.I,11; DA.I,96. (Page 637)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】争论。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】争论。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vivadati: {'def': '[vi+vadati] 1. to dispute, quarrel Sn.842, 884; J.I,209; Miln.47. -- 2. (intrs.) to be quarrelled with S.III,138. (Page 637)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi + vad + a), 争论，吵架。【过】 vivadi。【现分】 ~danta,~damāna。【独】 ~ditvā。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vi+vad说+a), 争论，吵架。【过】vivadi。【现分】vivadanta, vivadamāna。【独】vivaditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vivadha: {'def': '(carrying yoke) see khārī-vidha and vividha². (Page 637)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivajjana: {'def': '【中】放弃，戒除，避免。pot. vivajjayi。Sn.(PTS:v.407.；CS:v.409.)︰Pabbajitvāna kāyena, pāpakammaṁ vivajjayi(出家后，他避免身恶业。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】放弃，戒除。(p298)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vivajjeti: {'def': '[vi+vajjeti] to avoid, abandon, forsake S.I,43; A.V,17; Sn.53 (=parivajj° abhivajj° Nd² 592), 399 (°jjaya), 407 (praet. °jjayi); Vv 84³⁸ (°jjayātha=parivajjetha VvA.346); J.I,473; III,263, 481 (°jjayi); V,233 (Pot. °jjaye); Miln.129; Sdhp.210, 353, 395. -- pp. vivajjita. -- Pass. vivajjati J.I,27. (Page 636)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+vajj+e), 避免，放弃，抛弃。【过】vivajjesi。【过分】vivajjita。【现分】vivajjenta。【独】vivajjetvā, vivajjiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + vajj + e), 避免，放弃，抛弃。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~jita。【现分】 ~jenta。【独】 ~jetvā, vivajjiya。(p298)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vivajjita: {'def': '[pp. of vivajjeti] 1. abandoning, abstaining from VvA.75 (°kiliṭṭha-kamma). -- 2. avoided Th.2, 459. ‹-› 3. distant from (Abl.) Miln.131. (Page 636)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivana: {'def': '(nt.) [vi+vana] wilderness, barren land S.I,100; Vv 77⁶ (=arañña VvA.302); J.II,191, 317. (Page 637)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivara: {'def': '【中】口子，裂缝，裂纹。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】口子，裂缝，裂纹。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vi+vṛ] 1. opening (lit. dis-covering), pore, cleft, leak, fissure Dh.127 (pabbatānaṁ; cp Divy 532; Miln.150; PvA.104); Vism.192, 262; J.IV,16; V,87; DhA.IV,46 (mukha°); SnA 355; PvA.152, 283. ‹-› 2. interval, interstice D.I,56 (quoted at Pv IV.3²⁷); Vism.185. -- 3. fault, flaw, defect A.III,186 sq.; J.V,376. (Page 637)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivarati: {'def': '(vi + var + a), 打开，揭开，解释，分析。【过】 vivari。【过分】vivaṭa。【现分】 ~ranta, ~ramāna。【独】 ~ritvā。【不】 ~rituŋ。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vi+var+a), 打开，揭开，解释，分析。【过】vivari。【过分】vivaṭa。【现分】vivaranta, vivaramāna。【独】vivaritvā。【不】vivarituṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[vi+varati vṛ; see vuṇāti] 1. to uncover, to open Vin.II,219 (windows, opp. thaketi); D.I,85 (paṭicchannaṁ v.); J.I,63 (dvāraṁ), 69; IV,133 (nagaraṁ); DhA.I,328 (vātapānaṁ); DA.I,228; PvA.74 (mukhaṁ); VvA.157, 284. -- 2. (fig.) to open, make clear, reveal S.IV,166; V,261; KhA 12 (+vibhajati etc.). -- pp. vivaṭa. (Page 637)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivaraṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vivarati] 1. uncovering, unveiling, making open, revelation, in loka° laying open the worlds, unveiling of the Universe; referred to as a great miracle at Vism.392; Miln.350; Dāvs II.120; J.IV,266. -- 2. opening, unfolding, making accessible, purifying (fig.), in ceto° A.III,117, 121; IV,352; V,67. -- 3. explanation, making clear (cp. vibhajana) Nett 8 (as f.); SnA 445. (Page 637)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】开，揭开…的幕，揭露。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】开，揭开…的幕，揭露。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vivasana: {'def': '(nt.) [vi+vas (uṣ) to shine, cp. vibhāti] (gradually) getting light; turning into dawn (said of the night), only in phrase ratyā vivasane at the end of night, comb^d in stock phrase with suriy’uggamanaṁ pati “towards sunrise” (evidently an old phrase) at Th.1, 517; J.IV,241; V,381, 461; VI,491; Pv III,8². Also at Sn.710. (Page 637)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivasati: {'def': '[vi+vasati²] to live away from home, to be separated, to be distant J.IV,217. -- Cp. vippavasati. (Page 637)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivaseti: {'def': '[Caus. of vi+vas to shine] lit. to make [it] get light; rattiṁ v. to spend the night (till it gets light) Sn.1142; Nd² 594 (=atināmeti) -- vivasati is Kern’s proposed reading for vijahati (rattiṁ) at Th.1, 451. He founds his conjecture on a v. l. vivasate & the C. explⁿ “atināmeti khepeti.” Mrs. Rh. D. trsl^Q “waste” (i. e. vijahati). (Page 637)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivatta-cchada: {'def': '(adj.) having the cover removed, with the veil lifted; one who draws away the veil (cp. vivaraṇa) or reveals (the Universe etc.); or one who is freed of all (mental & spiritual) coverings (thus Bdhgh), Ep. of the Buddha. -- Spelling sometimes chadda° (see chada). -- D.I,89; II,16; III,142 (dd; sammā-sambuddha loko vivatta-chadda; trslⁿ “rolling back the veil from the world”), 177 (dd); A.II,44 (v. l. dd); Sn.372 (expl^d as “vivaṭa-rāga-dosa-moha-chadana SnA 365), 378, 1003 (ed. Sn.prefers dd as T. reading); Nd² 593 (with allegorical interpretation); J.I,51; III,349; IV,271 (dd); DhA.I,201 (v. l. dd); III,195; DA.I,250. -- It occurs either as vivatta° or vivaṭa°. In the first case (vivatta°) the explⁿ presents difficulties, as it is neither the opp. of vatta (“duty”), nor the same as vivaṭṭa (“moving back” intrs.), nor a direct pp. of vivattati (like Sk. vivṛtta) in which meaning it would come nearer to “stopped, reverted, ceased.” vivattati has not been found in Pāli. The only plausible explⁿ would be taking it as an abs. pp. formation fr. vṛt in Caus. sense (vatteti), thus “moved back, stopped, discarded” [cp. BSk. vivartayati to cast off a garment, Divy 39). In the second case (vivaṭa°) it is pp. of vivarati [vi+vṛ: see vuṇāti], in meaning “uncovered, lifted, off,” referring to the covering (chada) as uncovered instead of the uncovered object. See vivaṭa. It is difficult to decide between the two meanings. On the principle of the “lectio difficilior” vivatta would have the preference, whereas from a natural & simple point of view vivaṭa seems more intelligible & more fitting. It is evidently an old phrase. Note. --vivatta-kkhandha at S.I,121 is a curious expression (“with his shoulders twisted round”?). Is it an old misreading for pattakkhandha? Cp. however, S.A. quoted K.S. I.151, n. 5, explaining it as a dying monk’s effort to gain an orthodox posture. (Page 637)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivatta-chadda: {'def': '【阳】离覆障。锡兰一般作vivatta-，古代缅甸作vivaṭa-，而近代缅甸(1956年的第六结集)则改作vivaṭṭa-。至於高棉一系的传承，有作-ṭṭh-的。关於 -chadda部份，在尼柯耶(Nikāya)中，它的主格单数形非常一致的读作-chaddo，可是「长部注释」《吉祥悦意》(Sv 445,11)，明白证实主格单数应读作 -chaddā ，为「长部解疏」《吉祥悦意古疏》(Sv-pṭ II 46,11)所追认。这个 -ā 的主格单数形也出现在《本生经》：vivatta-cchaddā nu si sabbadassī (Ja III 349,4*)，这个句子同时又在「增支部注释」《满足希求》中被引用到 (Mp I 132,7*)。-chaddā 一读最重要的证据是，Aggavaṁsa (胜种，十二世纪缅甸文法家)在他的语法巨著Saddanīti (《语法论》) 中特别教导说 vivaṭacchaddā 是个「an-语基」的词 (Sadd 164,19-33)，书中还讨论到这个词后来变成「a-语基」的可能成因(Sadd 636,8-12)。an-语基变成a-语基是相当寻常的现象。这个词正确的语形(主格单数)应作vivaṭacchaddā (而非-ddo)，它源自梵语 *vivrta-chadman (‹ vr覆；chad覆)，是个 -an结尾的词(而非-a结尾)，词义是 “he who has removed the veil (of ignorance)” (除去(无明)覆障者)。Vivatta-chadda对应的梵语是vighusṭa-wabda(of great renown声名远播、名称普闻；loudly proclaimed广为传扬) (摘录自：蔡奇林：「大名声」(vighusṭa-wabda)与「离覆障」(vivatta-chadda))', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vivattati: {'def': 'at Pug.32 is to be read as vivaṭṭati. (Page 637)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivaṇṇa: {'def': '(adj.) [vi+vaṇṇa] discoloured, pale, wan Sn.585; Th.2, 79; J.II,418. (Page 637)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】有已褪色的，微弱的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】有已褪色的，微弱的。(p298)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vivaṇṇaka: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vivaṇṇeti] dispraise, reviling Vin.IV,143. (Page 637)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivaṇṇeti: {'def': '(vi + vaṇṇ + e), 毁谤，诽谤。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~ṇita。【独】~ṇetvā。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vi+vaṇṇ称赞+e), 譭谤，诽谤。【过】vivaṇṇesi。【过分】vivaṇṇita。【独】vivaṇṇetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[vi+vaṇṇeti] to dispraise, defame Pv III,10^Q (thūpa-pūjaṁ); PvA.212. (Page 637)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivaṭa: {'def': '[vi+vaṭa, pp. of vṛ: see vuṇāti] uncovered, open (lit. & fig.), laid bare, unveiled Sn.19 (lit.), 374 (fig.= anāvaṭa SnA 366), 763, 793 (=open-minded); Nd¹ 96; Pug.45, 46 (read vivaṭa for pi vaṭa; opp. pihita); Vism.185 (opp. pihita); J.V,434; DhA.III,79; VvA.27; PvA.283 (mukha unveiled). --vivaṭena cetasā “with mind awake & clear” D.III,223; A.IV,86; S.V,263; cp. cetovivaraṇa. --vivaṭa is freq. v. l. for vivatta (-cchada), e. g. at A.II,44; Sn.372; DhA.III,195; SnA 265 (in explⁿ of term); sometimes the only reading in this phrase (q. v.), e. g. at Nd² 593. -- Instr. vivaṭena as adv. “openly” Vin.II,99; IV,21.

--cakkhu open-minded, clear-sighted Sn.921; Nd¹ 354. --dvāra (having) an open door, an open house J.V,293 (aḍḍha° half open); DhA.II,74 --nakkhatta a yearly festival, “Public Day,” called after the fashion of the people going uncovered (appaṭicchannena sarīrena) & bare-footed to the river DhA.I,388. (Page 636)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vivarati 的【过分】), 已打开，已暴露，已揭开。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vivarati 的【过分】), 已打开，已暴露，已揭开。(p298)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vivaṭaka: {'def': '(adj.) [vivaṭa+ka] open (i. e. not secret) Vin.II,99. (Page 637)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivaṭṭa: {'def': '(m. & nt.) [vi+vaṭṭa¹] 1. “rolling back,” with ref. to the development of the world (or the aeons, kappa) used to denote a devolving cycle (“devolution”), whereas vaṭṭa alone or saṁvaṭṭa denote the involving cycle (both either with or without kappa). Thus as “periods” of the world they practically mean the same thing & may both be interpreted in the sense of a new beginning. As redupl.-inter. cpds. they express only the idea of constant change. We sometimes find vivaṭṭa in the sense of “renewal” & saṁvaṭṭa in the sense of “destruction,” where we should expect the opposite meaning for each. See also vaṭṭa & saṁvaṭta. Dogmatically vivaṭṭa is used as “absence of vaṭṭa,” i. e. nibbāna or salvation from saṁsāra (see vaṭṭa & cp. citta-vivaṭṭa, ceto°, ñāṇa°, vimokkha° at Ps.I,108 & II.70). -- Fig. in kamma° “the rolling back of k.,” i. e. devolution or course of kamma at S.I,85. -- Abs. & comb^d with saṁvaṭṭa (i. e. devolution comb^d with evolution) e. g. at D.I,14, 16 sq.; III,109; A.II,142 (where read vivaṭṭe for vivaṭṭo); Pug.60; Vism.419 (here as m. vivaṭṭo, compared with saṁvaṭṭo), 420 (°ṭṭhāyin). In cpd. °kappa (i. e. descending aeon) at D.III,51; Pug.60; It.15. -- 2. (nt.) part of a bhikkhu’s dress (rolling up of the binding?), comb^d with anu-vivaṭṭa at Vin.I,287. (Page 637)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】轮回。vivaṭṭakappa,【阳】成劫。DhA.v.135./CS:pg.2.38.︰“Visākhe imesaṁ sattānaṁ jāti-ādayo nāma daṇḍahatthakagopālakasadisā, jāti jarāya santikaṁ, jarā byādhino santikaṁ, byādhi maraṇassa santikaṁ pesetvā maraṇaṁ kuṭhāriyā chindantā viya jīvitaṁ chindati, evaṁ santepi vivaṭṭaṁ patthentā nāma natthi, vaṭṭameva pana patthentī”ti.(毘舍佉！有情一旦出生，等於手中有杖者、牧牛者(等，身份)，接近生、老，接近老、病，接近病、死，(最后)死亡的召唤，如斧斩，斩命，虽然这样人们仍然留恋轮回，渴望轮回。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】轮回。 ~kappa, 【阳】成劫。(p298)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vivaṭṭana: {'def': '【中】往后退，转变方向。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】往后退，转变方向。(p298)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) & °ā (f) [fr. vivaṭṭati] turning away, moving on, moving back Ps.I,66; II,98; Vism.278 (f.; expl^d as “magga”). (Page 637)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivaṭṭati: {'def': '(vi+vaṭṭ+a), 往后退，(使)旋转，重做。【过】vivaṭṭi。【过分】vivaṭṭita。【独】vivaṭṭitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + vaṭṭ + a), 往后退，（使）旋转，重做。【过】 vivaṭṭi。【过分】~ṭita。【独】 ~ṭṭitvā。(p298)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[vi+vaṭṭati] 1. to move back, to go back, to revolve, to begin again (of a new world-cycle), contrasted with saṁvaṭṭati to move in an ascending line (cp. vivaṭṭa) D.I,17; III,84, 109; Vism.327. -- 2. to be distracted or diverted from (Abl.), to turn away; to turn over, to be upset Nett 131; Pug.32 (so read for vivattati); Ps.II,98 (ppr.). -- pp. vivaṭṭa. (Page 637)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivaṭṭeti: {'def': '(vi + vaṭṭ + e), 折回，转移，破坏。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~ṭita。【独】~ṭetvā。(p298)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vi+vaṭṭ+e), 折回，转移，破坏，转起。【过】vivaṭṭesi。【过分】vivaṭṭita。【独】vivaṭṭetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[vi+vaṭṭeti] to turn down or away (perhaps in dogmatic sense to turn away from saṁsāra), to divert, destroy: only in phrase vivaṭṭayi saṁyojanaṁ (in standard setting with acchecchi taṇhaṁ), where the usual v. l. is vāvattayi (see vāvatteti). Thus at M.I,12, 122; S.I,127; IV,105, 205, 207, 399; A.I,134; III,246, 444 sq.; IV,8 sq.; It.47 (T. vivattayi). (Page 637)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivecana: {'def': '【中】区别，批评。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】区别，批评。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Viveceti: {'def': '[Caus. of viviccati] to cause separation, to separate, to keep back, dissuade Vin.I,64; D.I,226; S.III,110; M. I.256; Pv III,10⁷ (=paribāheti PvA.214); Miln.339; DhsA.311; Nett 113, 164 (°iyamāna). (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+vic分开+e), 分开，区别，批评。【过】vivecesi。【过分】vivecita。【独】vivecetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + vic + e), 分开，区别，批评。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~cita。【独】~cetvā。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vivecitatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. vivecita, pp. of viveceti] discrimination, specification DhsA.388. (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viveka: {'def': '【阳】分离，隔离。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】分离，隔离，远离。SA.3.18./I,158.︰Vivekoti vivittatā. Vivittatā cāyaṁ tadaṅgaviveko, vikkhambhana-samuccheda-paṭippassaddhi-nissaraṇavivekoti pañcavidho. Evametasmiṁ pañcavidhe viveke. Vivekanissitanti tadaṅgavivekanissitaṁ samucchedavivekanissitaṁ nissaraṇavivekanissitañca sammādiṭṭhiṁ bhāvetīti ayamattho veditabbo. Tathā hi ayaṁ ariyamaggabhāvanānuyutto yogī vipassanākkhaṇe kiccato tadaṅgavivekanissitaṁ, ajjhāsayato nissaraṇavivekanissitaṁ, maggakāle pana kiccato samucchedavivekanissitaṁ, ārammaṇato nissaraṇavivekanissitaṁ sammādiṭṭhiṁ bhāveti. (‘远离’即隔离。这隔离有五种︰1.暂时远离(tadaṅgaviveko)，2.镇伏远离(vikkhambhanaviveko)，3.正断远离(永远舍断烦恼) (samucchedaviveko)，4.回到轻安远离(paṭippassaddhiviveko)，5.脱离远离(nissaraṇaviveko)。如此於五种远离。依远离：1.暂时依远离。2.正断依远离。3.脱离依远离。这是修习正见(所产生)应被知。如此，瑜伽行者修习圣道得到毘钵舍那的刹那(vipassanākkhaṇe)，为‘暂时依远离’。道智生起之际(maggakāle)，为‘正断依远离’。从所缘产生正见，为‘脱离依远离’。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. vi+vic] detachment, loneliness, separation, seclusion; “singleness” (of heart), discrimination (of thought) D.I,37, 182; III,222, 226, 283=S.IV,191 (°ninna citta); S.I,2, 194; IV,365 sq.; V,6, 240 sq.; A.I,53; III,329; IV,224; Vin.IV,241; Sn.474, 772, 822, 851, 915, 1065; Nd¹ 158, 222; J.I,79; III,31; Dhs.160; Pug.59, 68; Nett 16, 50; DhsA.164, 166; ThA.64; PvA.43; Sdhp.471. --viveka is given as fivefold at Ps.II,220 sq. and VbhA.316, cp. K.S. I.321 (Bdhgh on S.III,2, 8), viz. tadaṅga°, vikkhambhana°, samuccheda° paṭippassaddhi°, nissaraṇa°; as threefold at Vism.140, viz. kāya°, citta°, vikkhambhana°, i. e. physically, mentally, ethically; which division amounts to the same as that given at Nd¹ 26 with kāya°, citta°, upadhi°, the latter equivalent to “nibbāna.” Cp. on term Dial. I.84. See also jhāna. Cp. pa°. (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivekattā: {'def': '=vivittatā VbhA.316. (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivesa: {'def': 'Visesa, 差别(distinction)，殊胜的。avisesa,【反】非殊胜的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[?] distinction D.I,229, 233. We should read visesa, as printed on p. 233. (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viveṭhiyati: {'def': '[vi+veṭhïyati] to get entangled Vin.II,117. (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivicca: {'def': '【无】和…疏远，把自己和…隔离。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [ger. of viviccati] separating oneself from (Instr.), aloof from D.I,37; A.III,25; J.VI,388; Dhs.160; Pug.68; Vism.139, 140 (expl^d in detail). -- Doubtful reading at Pv.I,11⁹ (for viricca?). -- As viviccaṁ (& a°) at J.V,434 in meaning “secretly” (=raho paṭicchannaṁ C.). (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ger. of viviccati),【独】和…隔离(separating oneself from (Instr.))，和…疏远(aloof from)。viviccaṁ (& avivicca) at J.V.434 in meaning “secretly” (=raho paṭicchannaṁ C.).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Viviccati: {'def': '[vi+vic] to separate oneself, to depart from, to be alone, to separate (intrs.) Vin.IV,241; ger. viviccitvā DhsA.165, & vivicca (see sep.). -- pp. vivitta. -- Cp. viveceti. (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+vic分开), 分离(to separate oneself, to depart from, to be alone, to separate (intrs.))。ger. viviccitvā & vivicca。pp. vivitta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vivicchati: {'def': '[Desid. of vindati] to desire, long for, want Nett 11. (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Vevicchā, (desid. of vindati), 欲望(to desire, long for, want)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vivicchā: {'def': '(f.) [Desid. of vid, cp. Sk. vivitsā] manifold desire, greediness, avarice DhsA.375; Nett 11 (where explⁿ “vivicchā nāma vuccati vicikicchā”). See also veviccha. (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vividha: {'def': '¹ (adj.) [vi+vidha¹] divers, manifold, mixed; full of, gay with (-°) D.II,354; Pv.II,4⁹; Vv 35⁹; Miln.319; Mhvs 25, 30; SnA 136 (in explⁿ of vi°: “viharati= vividhaṁ hitaṁ harati”). (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】种种的，多方面的。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [for Sk. vivadha; vi+vah] carrying-yoke D.I,101; S.I,78 (as v. l. khāri-vividhaṁ, see khāri); J.III,116 (parikkhāraṁ vividhaṁ ādāya, where v. l. reads khāriṁ vividhaṁ). (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】种种的，多方面的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vivitta: {'def': '(pp. of viviccati; vi+vitta3),【形】分离的，孤单的，独居者(separated, secluded, aloof, solitary, separate, alone)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】分离的，孤单的，独居者。 ~tā, 【阴】隔离。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of viviccati; vi+vitta³] separated, secluded, aloof, solitary, separate, alone D.I,71; S.I,110; A.II,210; III,92; IV,436; V,207, 270; Sn.221, 338, 810, 845; Nd¹ 201; Kvu 605; Miln.205; DA.I,208; DhsA.166; DhA.III,238; IV,157 (so read for vivivitta!); VbhA.365; PvA.28, 141, 283. Cp. pa°. (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivittaka: {'def': '(adj.) [vivitta+ka] solitary J.IV,242 (°āvāsa). (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivittatā: {'def': '【阴】隔离。vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajati, 独住远离(亲近独居处)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. vivitta] seclusion (=viveka) VbhA.316, cp. K.S. I.321. (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivitti: {'def': '(f.) [fr. viviccati] separation DhsA.166. -- Cp. viveka. (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivāda: {'def': '【阳】争论，争辩，吵架，辩论。 ~dī, ~ka, 【阳】争论者。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】争论，争辩，吵架，辩论。vivādī, vivādaka,【阳】争论者。vivādāpanna = vivāda-āpanna(āpanna‹ āpajjati ‹ā+pad), 陷入争吵(诤袂煞cenn3 be7 suah)，争论不休。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. vi+vad] dispute, quarrel, contention D.I,236; III,246; A.IV,401; Sn.596, 863, 877, 912; Nd¹ 103, 167, 173, 260, 307; Pug.19, 22; Ud.67; J.I,165; Miln.413; VvA.131. There are 6 vivāda-mūlāni (roots of contention), viz. kodha, makkha, issā, sāṭheyya, pāpicchatā, sandiṭṭhi-parāmāsa or anger, selfishness, envy, fraudulence, evil intention, worldliness: D.III,246; A.III,334 sq.; Vbh.380; referred to at Ps.I,130. There is another list of 10 at A.V,78 consisting in wrong representations regarding dhamma & vinaya. (Page 637)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivādaka: {'def': '[fr. vivāda] a quarreller J.I,209. (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivādiyati: {'def': '(vivādeti) [denom. fr. vivāda] to quarrel Sn.832 (=kalahaṁ karoti Nd¹ 173), 879, 895. Pot. 3^rd sg. vivādiyetha (=kolahaṁ kareyya Nd¹ 307), & vivādayetha Sn.830 (id. explⁿ Nd¹ 170). (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivāha: {'def': '(fr. vi+vah),【阳】婚姻(“carrying or sending away,” i. e. marriage, wedding)。vivāhamaṅgala,【中】婚姻典礼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】婚姻。 ~maṅgala, 【中】婚姻典礼。(p299)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. vi+vah] “carrying or sending away,” i. e. marriage, wedding D.I,99; Sn.p. 105; PvA.144; SnA 448 (where distinction āvāha=kaññā-gahaṇaṁ, vivāha= kaññā-dānaṁ). -- As nt. at Vin.III,135. Cp. āvāha & vevāhika. (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vivāhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vi+vah] giving in marriage or getting a husband for a girl (cp. āvāhana) D.I,11; DA.I,96. Cp. Vin.III,135. (Page 638)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viya: {'def': '(比较虚词), 象，如同，当做。(p296)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [another form of iva, viâ *via (so some Prākrits: Pischel Prk. Gr., § 143, 336)›viya. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 336, 337 derives it fr. viva=v’iva] 1. part of comparison: like, as; stands for iva (usually in verse after ā: Sn.420 (jātimā v.); Pv.I,8⁵ (vārinā v.); or o Sn.580 (vajjho v.), 818 (kapaṇo v.); or ṁ: Sn.381 (vajantaṁ v.), 689 (nekkhaṁ v.). -- 2. dubitative particle: na viya maññe I suppose not M.II,121. ‹-› Cp. byā. (Page 632)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(比较虚词), 像，如同，当做。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Viyatta: {'def': '(cp. Sk. vyakta, vi+pp. of añj),【形】已决定的、已学的、完成的(determined, of settled opinion, learned, accomplished)。2. separated, split, dissenting).‘viyutta’或许可理解作‘viyatta’。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. vyakta, vi+pp. of añj] determined, of settled opinion, learned, accomplished; only in stock phrase sāvakā viyattā vinītā visāradā (which Rh. D. trsl^s “true hearers, wise and well-trained, ready etc.” Dial. II. 114) at D.II,104=A.IV,310=S.V,260=Ud.63. The BSk. (at Divy 202) has śrāvakāh (for bhikkhū!) paṇḍitā bhaviṣyanti vyaktā vinītā viśāradāh. ‹-› 2. separated, split, dissenting, heretic Sn.800 (=vavatthita bhinna dvejjhāpanna etc. Nd² 108; =bhinna SnA 530). Cp. the two meanings of vavatthita (=*vyakta), which quasi-correspond to viyatta 1 & 2 At this passage the v. l. (all SS of the Commentary) viyutta is perhaps to be perferred to viyatta.

Note. It is to be noted that viyatta in § 1 does not occur in poetry, but seems to have spelling viy° because of the foll. vinīta and visārada. Cp. vyatta & veyyatta. (Page 632)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】已学的，完成的。(p296)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Viyatti: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. vyakti] distinctness Dhtp 366 & Dhtm 593 (in defⁿ of brū). Cp. veyyatti. (Page 633)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viya°: {'def': 'the diaeretic form (for sake of metre) of vya° [=vi+ a°], which see generally. Cp. the identical veyya°. (Page 632)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viyoga: {'def': '【阳】分离。(p296)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】分离。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[vi+yoga 2] separation J.VI,482; Mhvs 19, 16 (Mahābodhi°); PvA.160, 161 (pati° from her husband); Sdhp.77, 164. (Page 633)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viyyati: {'def': '[Pass. of vāyati¹ or vināti. The Vedic is ūyate] to be woven Vin.III,259. -- pp. vīta². (Page 633)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viyācikkhati: {'def': 'in verse at Sn.1090 for vyācikkhati, i. e. vi+ācikkhati, to tell, relate, explain; pp. vyākhyāta. (Page 633)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viyākāra: {'def': '[vi+ākāra] preparation, display, distinction, splendour, majesty Sn.299 (=sampatti SnA 319). (Page 633)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viyāpanna: {'def': '[vi+āpanna, pp. of vi+āpajjati cp. vyāpajjati] gone down, lost, destroyed Sn.314 (in verse; gloss viyāvatta. The former expl^d as “naṭṭha,” the latter as “viparivattitvā aññathā-bhūta” at SnA 324). (Page 633)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viyārambha: {'def': '[vi+ārambha] striving, endeavour, undertaking Sn.953 (expl^d as the 3 abhisaṅkhāras, viz. puñña°, apuñña° & āneñja° at Nd¹ 442). (Page 633)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viyāyata: {'def': '[vi+āyata] stretched out or across J.III,373 (in verse). (Page 633)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viyūhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. viyūhati] removing, removal Vism.302 (paṁsu°). (Page 633)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】散布，除掉。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】散布，除掉。(p296)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Viyūhati: {'def': '[vi+ūh, a differentiated form of vah] to take away, carry off, remove Vin.III,48 (paṁsuṁ vyūhati); J.I,177, 199 (paṁsuṁ), 238, 331 (kaddamaṁ dvidhā viyūhitvā); III,52 (vālikaṁ); IV,265 (paṁsuṁ); VI,448 (vālukaṁ); DhsA.315; DhA.II,38; III,207 (paṁsuṁ). ‹-› pp. viyūḷha. Cp. saṁyūhati. (Page 633)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi + ūh + a), 除去，散布。【过】 viyūhi。【过分】 viyūḷha, viyūhita。【独】 ~hitvā。(p296)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vi+ūh+a), 除去，散布。【过】viyūhi。【过分】viyūḷha, viyūhita。【独】viyūhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Viyūḷha: {'def': '[apparently vi+ūḷha, pp. of viyūhati, but mixed in meaning with vi+ūha (of vah)=vyūha] massed, heaped; thick, dense (of fighting) M.I,86=Nd² 199⁵ (ubhato viyūlḥaṁ saṅgāmaṁ massed battle on both sides); A.III,94, 99 (saṅgāma, cp. S.IV,308); J.VI,275 (balaggāni viyūḷhāni; C.=pabbūḷha-vasena ṭhitāni where pabbūḷha evidently in meaning “sambādha.” ‹-› 2. put in array, prepared, imminent J.II,336 (maraṇe viyūḷhe=paccupaṭṭhite C.). Cp. saṁyūḷha. (Page 633)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'vyūḷha, (viyūhati 的【过分】) 已集合。(p296)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'vyūḷha, (viyūhati 的【过分】) 已集合。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Viññatta: {'def': '= viññāpita, 告知，教，乞讨。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '= viññāpita, 告知，教。(p288)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Viññatti: {'def': '【阴】暗示，通知。(p288)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(fr. viññāpeti),【阴】暗示，通知，乞讨(intimation, giving to understand, information; begging or asking by intimation or hinting)。viññattirūpa﹐表色。viññatti﹐(表)是指表明思想、感受、态度等。有身表(kāyaviññatti)及语表(vacīviññatti)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. viññāpeti] intimation, giving to understand, information; begging or asking by intimation or hinting (a practice forbidden to the bhikkhu) Vin.I,72 (°bahula, intent on . . .); III,144 sq. (id.); IV,290; J.III,72 (v. nāma na vaṭṭati, is improper); Vbh.13; Vism.41 (threefold: nimitta°, obhāsa°, parikathā; as t. t., cp. Cpd. 120¹: medium of communication); Miln.343, 370; DhA.II,21 (viññattiṁ katvā bhuñjituṁ na vaṭṭati); PvA.146. -- Two kinds of viññatti are generally distinguished, viz. kāya° and vacī°, or intimation by body (gesture) and by voice: Dhs.665, 718; Miln.229 sq.; Vism.448, 530, 531. Cp. Cpd. 22, 264. (Page 618)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viññeyya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of vijānāti] to be recognized or apperceived (of the sense objects: cakkhu-viññeyya rūpa, etc.) D.I,245; M.III,291; A.III,377; IV,404 sq., 415, 430; Nd¹ 24. -- su° easily understood VvA.258. (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(grd. of vijānāti),【形】被识知的(to be recognized or apperceived)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】被感觉的。(p288)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Viññupasaṭṭha: {'def': '[vi+ni+upassaṭṭha, pp. of sṛj (?)] unattacked, not deficient, unmolested, undisturbed: is Kern’s (Toev. s. v.) proposed reading for viññū-pasattha (“extolled by the wise”) at S.II,70 (reads ṭṭh); V,343; D.II,80; III,245: all identical passages. We consider Kern’s change unnecessary: anupasaṭṭha would have been the most natural expression if it had been meant in the sense suggested by Kern. (Page 619)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viññutā: {'def': '& viññūtā (f.) [fr. viññu] discretion; in phrase viññutaṁ pāpuṇāti to reach the years of discretion or puberty Vin.I,269; II,278; J.I,231; III,437: PvA.3. (Page 619)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viññāpaka: {'def': '(fr. viññāpeti),【形】【阳】很会指导(clever in instruction, able to instruct)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. viññāpeti] clever in instruction, able to instruct S.V,162=Miln.373; It.107. (Page 619)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】很会指导。(p288)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Viññāpana: {'def': '【中】通知，介绍。(p288)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. viññāpeti] instructing, informing A.II,51, 97. -- f. viññāpanī instructive, making clear (of speech) D.I,114 (atthassa viññāpaniyā=viññāpanasamatthāya DA.I,282); A.III,114; Dh.408 (=attha° DhA.IV,182); Sn.632. (Page 619)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹viññāpeti),【中】通知，介绍( instructing, informing )。viññāpanī,【阴】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Viññāpaya: {'def': '【形】易受指令影响的。(p288)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of viññāpeti, =*viññāpya] accessible to instruction; only in cpds du° & su° indocile & docile S.I,138; D.II,38; Nd² 235³; Ps.I,121; II,195; Vbh.341. (Page 619)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(grd. of viññāpeti),【形】易受指令影响的(accessible to instruction)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Viññāpetar: {'def': '[n. ag. of viññāpita] an instructor, teacher D.I,56; A.IV,196. (Page 619)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viññāpeti: {'def': '(vi + ñā + āpe), 告知，教，暗示。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita。【独】 ~petvā。【现分】 ~penta。(p288)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. II. of vijānāti] to address, inform, teach, instruct; to give to understand; to appeal to, to beg Vin.I,54; IV,264; D.I,251; J.III,72 (to intimate); Miln.229; VvA.72, 181. -- pp. viññāpita. (Page 619)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+ñā+āpe), 告知，教，暗示，乞讨(to address, inform, instruct; to appeal to, to beg)。【过】viññāpesi。【过分】viññāpita。【独】viññāpetvā。【现分】viññāpenta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Viññāpetu: {'def': '【阳】教师，暗示的人。(p288)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Viññāpetar),【阳】教师，暗示的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Viññāpita: {'def': '= viññatta, 告知，教。(p288)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of viññāpeti] instructed, informed; su° well taught Miln.101. (Page 619)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viññāta: {'def': '(vijānāti 的【过分】), 已了解，已感觉，已知道(apperceived, (re)cognized, understood, cogitated)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of vijānāti] apperceived, (re)cognized, understood, cogitated (Cpd. 37), learned Sn.323 (°dhamma, one who has recognized or understood the Dhamma); Vv 44¹⁸ (=viññāta-sāsana-dhamma VvA.192); J.I,2; Sdhp.429. -- Often in sequence diṭṭha suta muta viññāta to denote the whole range of the cognitional & apperceptional faculties (see muta), e. g. D.III,232; Sn.1086, 1122. (Page 619)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vijānāti 的【过分】), 已了解，已感觉，已知道。(p288)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Viññātabba: {'def': '(vijānāti 的【潜】), 应该被了解。(p288)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vijānāti 的【义】), 应该被了解。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Viññātar: {'def': '[n. ag. of viññāta] a perceiver, one who apperceives or takes to heart, a learner D.I,56; A.III,169; IV,196 (sotar, uggahetar, v.). (Page 619)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viññāti: {'def': '乞讨，告知。【独】viññatvā。【使】viññāpeti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Viññātu: {'def': '【阳】察觉者，知道的人。(p288)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Viññātar),【阳】察觉者，知道的人(a perceiver)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Viññāya: {'def': '& viññāyati see vijānāti. (Page 619)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vijānāti 的【独】), 知道了，学习了。(p288)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vijānāti 的【独】), 知道了，学习了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Viññāyati: {'def': '(vijānāti 的【被】), 被知道。【过】viññāyi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vijānāti 的【被】), 被知道。【过】 ~ñāyi。(p288)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Viññāṇa: {'def': '识(PS:viññāṇa-kkhandha 识蕴)', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '(‹vi+ ñā(梵jñā)知, cp. Vedic vijñāna cognition),【中】【阳】精神，识(意识)。viññāṇaka,【形】有意识的生命。viññāṇakkhandha,【阳】识蕴(精神的组合)。viññāṇaṭṭhiti,【阴】有意识的生物的阶段或时期。viññāṇadhātu,【阴】识界(识元素)。apeta-viññāṇo,【阳】已离开意识识。 MA.9./I,209.︰Viññāṇanti yaṁkiñci cittaṁ.(识(意识)︰任何的‘心’。) SA.12.11./II,24.︰Viññāṇanti cittaṁ. (识(意识)︰‘心’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】精神，识（意识）。 ~ka, 【形】有精神的。 ~kkhandha, 【阳】识蕴（精神的组合）。 ~ṭṭhiti, 【阴】有意识的生物的阶段或时期。 ~dhātu,【阴】识界（识元素）。(p288)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vi+jñā; cp. Vedic vijñāna cognition] (as special term in Buddhist metaphysics) a mental quality as a constituent of individuality, the bearer of (individual) life, life-force (as extending also over rebirths), principle of conscious life, general consciousness (as function of mind and matter), regenerative force, animation, mind as transmigrant, as transforming (according to individual kamma) one individual life (after death) into the next. (See also below, c & d). In this (fundamental) application it may be characterized as the sensory and perceptive activity commonly expressed by “mind.” It is difficult to give any one word for v., because there is much difference between the old Buddhist and our modern points of view, and there is a varying use of the term in the Canon itself. In what may be a very old Sutta S.II,95 v. is given as a synonym of citta (q. v.) and mano (q. v.), in opposition to kāya used to mean body. This simpler unecclesiastical, unscholastic popular meaning is met with in other suttas. E. g. the body (kāya) is when animated called sa-viññāṇaka (q. v. and cp. viññāṇatta). Again, v. was supposed, at the body’s death, to pass over into another body (S.I,122; III,124) and so find a support or platform (patiṭṭhā). It was also held to be an immutable, persistent substance, a view strongly condemned (M.I,258). Since, however, the persistence of v. from life to life is declared (D.II,68; S.III,54), we must judge that it is only the immutable persistence that is condemned. V, was justly conceived more as “minding” than as “mind.” Its form is participial. For later variants of the foregoing cp. Miln.86; PvA.63, 219.

Ecclesiastical scholastic dogmatic considers v. under the categories of (a) khandha; (b) dhātu; (c) paṭiccasamuppāda; (d) āhāra; (e) kāya. (a) V. as fifth of the five khandhas (q. v.) is never properly described or defined. It is an ultimate. But as a factor of animate existence it is said to be the discriminating (vijānāti) of e. g. tastes or sapid things (S.III,87), or, again, of pleasant or painful feeling (M.I,292). It is in no wise considered as a condition, or a climax of the other incorporeal khandhās. It is just one phase among others of mental life. In mediæval dogmatic it appears rather as the bare phenomenon of aroused attention, the other khandhās having been reduced to adjuncts or concomitants brought to pass by the arousing of v. (Cpd. 13), and as such classed under cetasikā, the older saṅkhārakkhandha. --(b) as dhātu, v. occurs only in the category of the four elements with space as a sixth element, and also where dhātu is substituted for khandha (S.III,10).-(c) In the chain of causation (Paṭicca-samuppāda) v. is conditioned by the saṅkhāras and is itself a necessary condition of nāma-rūpa (individuality). See e. g. S.II,4, 6, 8, 12 etc.; Vin.I,1; Vism.545 sq.=VbhA.150; Vism.558 sq.; VbhA.169 sq.; 192. -- At S.II,4=III,61 viññāṇa (in the Paṭicca-samuppāda) is defined in a similar way to the defⁿ under v.-ṭṭhiti (see c), viz. as a quality peculiar to (& underlying) each of the 6 senses: “katamaṁ viññāṇaṁ? cha-y-ime viññāṇa-kāyā (groups of v.), viz. cakkhu° sota° etc.,” which means that viññāṇa is the apperceptional or energizing principle, so to speak the soul or life (substratum, animator, lifepotency) of the sensory side of individuality. It arises through the mutual relation of sense and sense-object (M.III,281, where also the 6 v.-kāyā). As such it forms a factor of rebirth, as it is grouped under upadhi (q. v.). Translations of S.II,4: Mrs. Rh. D. (K.S. II.4) “consciousness”; Geiger (in Z. f. B. IV.62) “Erkennen.”‹-› (d) As one of the four āhāras (q. v.) v. is considered as the material, food or cause, through which comes rebirth (S.II,13; cp. B.Psy. p. 62). As such it is likened to seed in the field of action (kamma) A.I,223, and as entering (a body) at rebirth the phrase viññāṇassa avakkanti is used (D.II,63; S.II,91). In this connection the expression paṭisandhi-viññāṇa first appears in Ps.I,52, and then in the Commentaries (VbhA.192; cf. Vism.548, 659 paṭisandhicitta); in Vism.554=VbhA.163, the v., here said to be located in the heart, is made out, at bodily death, “to quit its former “support” and proceed (pavattati) to another by way of its mental object and other conditions.” Another scholastic expression, both early and late, is abhisaṅkhāra-v., or “endowment consciousness,” viz. the individual transmigrant or transmitted function (viññāṇa) which supplies the next life with the accumulation of individual merit or demerit or indifference, as it is expressed at Nd² 569^a in defⁿ of v. (on Sn.1055: yaṁ kiñci sampajānāsi . . . panujja viññāṇaṁ bhave na tiṭṭhe): puññ’âbhisaṅkhāra-sahagata-viññāṇaṁ, apuññ’. . ., ānejj’. . . -- Under the same heading at Nd² 569^b we find abhisaṅkhāra v. with ref. to the sotāpatti-stage, i. e. the beginning of salvation, where it is said that by the gradual disappearance of abhis.-v. there are still 7 existences left before nāma-rūpa (individuality) entirely disappears. The climax of this development is “anupādi-sesa nibbāna-dhatu,” or the nibbāna stage without a remainder (parinibbāna), which is characterized not by an abhisaṅkhāra-v., but by the carimaka-v., or the final vital spark, which is now going to be extinct. This passage is referred to at DhsA.357, where the first half is quoted literally.-(e) As kāya i. e. group, v. is considered psycho-physically, as a factor in senseperception (D.III,243, M.III,281, etc.), namely, the contact between sense-organ and object (medium, metazu/ was not taken into account) produces v. of sight, hearing etc. The three factors constitute the v.-kāya of the given sense. And the v. is thus bound to bodily process as a catseye is threaded on a string (D.II,76). Cp. above c.

Other applications of the term v., both Canonical and mediæval: on details as to attributes and functions, see Vin.I,13 (as one of the khandhas in its quality of anattā, cp. S.IV,166 sq.); D.III,223 (as khandha); S.II,101 sq. (°assa avakkanti); III,53 sq. (°assa gati, āgati, cuti etc.); A.I,223 sq.; III,40; Sn.734 (yaṁ kiñci dukkhaṁ sambhoti, sabbaṁ viññāṇa-paccayā), 1037 (nāma-rūpa destroyed in consequence of v. destruction), 1073 (cavetha v. [so read for bhavetha]; v. at this passage expl^d as “punappaṭisandhi-v.” at Nd² 569^c); 1110 (uparujjhati); Ps.I,53 sq., 153 sq.; II,102; Vbh.9 sq., 53 sq., 86; Nett 15 (nāma-rūpa v.-sampayutta), 16 (v.-hetuka n.-r.), 17 (nirodha), 28, 79, 116 (as khandha); Vism.529 (as simple, twofold, fourfold etc.), 545=VbhA.150 sq. (in detail as product of saṅkhāras & in 32 groups); VbhA.172 (twofold: vipāka & avipāka); DhA.IV,100.

--ânañc’āyatana infinitude (-sphere) of life-force or mind-matter D.I,35, 184, 223; III,224, 262, 265; Nett 26, 39. It is the second of the Āruppa-jhānas; see jhāna. --āhāra consciousness (i. e. vital principle) sustenance: see above d and cp. Dhs.70, 126; Nett 114 sq.; Vism.341. --kāya: see above e. --khandha life-force as one of the aggregates of physical life D.III,233; Tikp 61; DhsA.141; VbhA.21, 42. --ṭṭhiti viññāṇa-duration, phase of mental life. The emphasis is on duration or continuation rather than place, which would be ṭṭhāna. There are (a) 4 v.-durations with regard to their “storing” (abhisaṅkhāra) quality, viz. combinations of v. (as the governing, mind-principle) with each of the 4 other khandhas or aggregates of material life (rūpa, vedanā, saññā, saṅkhārā), v. animating or bringing them to consciousness in any kind of life-appearance; and (b) 7 v.-durations with regard to their “regenerating” (new-life combⁿ or rebirth=paṭisandhi) quality, viz. the 4 planes of var. beings (from men to devas), followed by the 3 super-dimensional stages (the ānañc’āyatanas) of ākāsa-infinitude, viññāṇa-infin. & ākiñ-cañña-infin. -- Passages in the Canon: (a) as 4: D 1 I.262 sq.; S.III,53 sq. (“standing for consciousness” & “platform,” °patiṭṭhā S.III,54; K.S.III,45) ‹-› (b) the 7: D.II,68 sq.; III,253 (trslⁿ “station of consciousness”), 282; =A.IV,39. Both the 4 and the 7 at Nd² 570. Cp. under a slightly diff. view S.II,65 (yaṁ ceteti . . . ārammaṇaṁ . . . hoti viññāṇassa ṭhitiyā). -- See also Ps.I,22, 122; Sn.1114; Nett 31, 83 sq.; Vism.552; VbhA.169. --dhātu mind-element, which is the 6th dhātu after the 4 great elements (the mahābhūtāni) and ākāsa-dhātu as fifth (this expl^d as “asamphuṭṭha-dhātu” at VbhA.55, whereas v.-dhātu as “vijānana-dhātu”) D.III,247; Vbh.85, 87; VbhA.55; cp. A.I,176; M.III,31, 62, 240; S.II,248. --vīthi the road of mind (fig.), a mediæval t. t. for process in senseperception KhA 102. (Page 618)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viññāṇaka: {'def': '(adj.) [viññāṇa+ka] having life or consciousness or sense, endowed with vitality. Found in the four Nikāyas only in one standard passage in the same connection, viz. sa-viññāṇaka kāya “the body with its viññāṇa” (i. e. life-force or mind): S.II,253; III,80, 169; V,311; A.I,132; IV,53. Thus (sa°) should be read at all passages. -- Later in contrast pair sa° and a°, i. e. with life & without, alive & lifeless, animate & inanimate, e. g. J.I,466, 468; DhA.I,6; PvA.130. (Page 619)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viññāṇatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. formation fr. viññāṇa] the fact of being endowed with viññāṇa S.III,87; PvA.63. (Page 619)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viññū: {'def': '【形】明智的，【阳】智者。 ~ñutā,【阴】判断力，青春期。 ~uppasattha,【形】智者所赞美的。(p288)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cp. Sk. vijña),【形】明智的(intelligent, learned, wise)，【阳】智者。viññutā,【阴】判断力，青春期。viññuppasattha,【形】智者所赞美的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. vijña] intelligent, learned, wise D.I,163; S.I,9; III,134; IV,41 sq., 93, 339; A.II,228; V,15; It.98; Sn.39, 294, 313, 396, 403; Ps.II,19, 21; Miln.21; DA.I,18; VvA.87; PvA.130, 226; Sdhp.45. ‹-› a° DhA.III,395. (Page 619)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viḍūḍabha: {'def': 'm. 毘琉璃, 瑠璃王 [コーサラ国王, 波斯匿(パセーナディ)の子].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '（国王名）维毒哒跋，（古音译：）毗琉璃，毗流勒，维楼黎', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Viḷayhati: {'def': '[vi+dayhati] to burn (intrs.) J.II,220. (Page 636)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viḷāra: {'def': 'at A.III,122 read as biḷāra (sasa-biḷārā rabbits & cats). (Page 636)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viṭabhī: {'def': '(f.) [=Sk. viṭapin] the fork of a tree M.I,306; J.II,107; III,203. (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viṭapa: {'def': '【阳】树枝，树杈，从树枝垂下的根。(p288)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. viṭapa] the fork of a tree, a branch J.I,169, 215, 222; III,28; VI,177 (nigrodha°). (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】树枝，树杈，从树枝垂下的根(the fork of a tree, a branch)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Viṭapin: {'def': '[viṭapa+in] a tree, lit. “having branches” J.VI,178. (Page 620)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Viṭapī: {'def': '(Viṭapin),【阳】树，有树枝。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】树。(p288)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Viṭaṅka: {'def': '【阳、中】鸽房，鸽舍，鸟类饲养场。(p288)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】【中】鸽房，鸽舍，鸟类饲养场。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vo: {'def': '2 (cp. Vedic vah; tumha 的附属字(enclitic)), 对你们(to you)，你们的(of you)，由你们(by you)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [cp. Vedic vaḥ, Av. vō, Lat. vos, Gr. u)/mme] is enclitic form of tumhe (see under tuvaṁ), i. e. to you, of you; but it is generally interpreted by the C. as “nipāta,” i. e. particle (of emphasis or exclamation; i. e. vo¹). Thus e. g. at Pv.I,5³ (cp. PvA.26). (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(tumha 的附属字), 对你们，你们的，由你们。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (indecl.) a particle of emphasis, perhaps=eva, or =vo² (as dative of interest). The Commentaries explain it as “nipāta,” i. e. particle. Thus at Sn.560, 760. (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vobhindati: {'def': '[vi+ava+bhindati] to split; ppr. °anto (fig.) hair-splitting D.I,162; M.I,176; aor. vobhindi (lit.) to break, split (one’s head, sīsaṁ) M.I,336. (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vocarita: {'def': '[pp. of vi+ocarati] penetrated (into consciousness), investigated, apperceived M.I,478; A.IV,363 (=manodvāre samudācāra-ppatta). (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vocchijjati: {'def': '[vi+ud+chijjati, Pass. of chid] to be cut off S.III,53 (so read). -- pp. neg. abbocchinna: see abbhocchinna. (=*avyucch°). (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi + u + chid + ya), 被切断，停止。【过】 ~jji。【过分】 ~chinna。【独】 ~jjitvā。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vi+u 出+chid切断+ya), 被切断，停止(to be cut off)。【过】vocchijji。【过分】vocchinna。【独】vocchijjitvā。pp. neg. abbocchinna: see abbhocchinna. (=*avyucchinna).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vocchādanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. vi+ava+chad] covering up (entirely) VbhA.493. (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vodaka: {'def': '【形】无水的。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [vi+odaka=udaka] free from water Vin.II,113. (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】无水的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vodapana: {'def': '【中】 ~nā, 【阴】清洁，洗净。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】vodapanā,【阴】清洁，洗净。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vodapeti: {'def': '(vi + u + dā + āpe), 使清洁，使纯净。【过】 ~esi。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(or °dāpeti) [Caus. of vodāyati] to cleanse, purify DhA.II,162. (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐vodāyati (vi+u出+dā+āpe), 使清洁，使纯净。【过】vodapesi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vodiṭṭha: {'def': '[pp. of vi+ava+diś, cp. odissa & the BSk. vyapadeśa pretext Divy 435] defined, fully understood, recognized M.I,478; A.IV,363 (=suṭṭhu diṭṭha C.). (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vodāna: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vi+ava+dā⁴ to clean, cp. BSk. vyavadāna Divy 616; AvŚ II.188] 1. cleansing, getting bright (of sun & moon) D.I,10 (=visuddhatā DA.I,95). -- 2. purity (from the kilesas, or stains of sin), purification, sanctification M.I,115 (opp. saṁkilesa); S.III,151 (citta°, adj.; opp. citta-saṅkilesa); A.III,418 sq.; V,34; Ps.I,166; Vbh.343; Nett 96, 100, 125 sq.; Vism.51 sq., 89; VbhA.401; DhA.III,405. (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】纯净，神圣化。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】纯净、明净，神圣化。【反】saṁkilesa﹐【阳】烦恼，污染。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vodāniya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. formⁿ from vodāna] apt to purify, purifying D.I,195; III,57. Opp. saṁkilesika. (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vodāpana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vodapeti] cleansing, purification DhA.III,237 (=pariyodapana). (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vodāsa: {'def': '[?] only at D.III,43 in phrase °ṁ āpajjati in meaning of “making a distinction,” being particular (about food: bhojanesu), having a dainty appetite; expl^d by “dve bhāge karoti” Bdhgh. It seems to stand for vokāra, unless we take it to be a misspelling for vodāya “cutting off,” fr. vi+ava+dā, thus “separating the food” (?): Suggestive also is the likeness with vosānaṁ āpajjati. (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vodāta: {'def': '(adj.) [vi+odāta, cp. vīvadāta] clean, pure M.I,319. (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vodāya: {'def': 'at J.IV,184 appears to be a misreading for codāya (ger. from codeti) in meaning iṇaṁ codeti to undertake a loan, to lend money at interest (=vaḍḍhiyā inaṁ payojetvā C.), to demand payment for a loan. The v. l. at all places is codāya (=codetvā). See codeti. (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vodāyati: {'def': '[vi+ava+dā⁴ to clean] to become clean or clear, to be purified or cleansed A.V,169 (fig. saddhammassa), 317 (id.; expl^d by C. as “vodānaṁ gacchati”); J.II,418 (of a precious stone). (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Voharati: {'def': '﹐Vohāroti (vi+ava下+har拿+a), 使用，表达，呼叫，交易，管理。【过】vohari。【过分】voharita。【现分】voharanta。【独】voharitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + ava + har + a), 使用，表达，呼叫，交易，管理。【过】vohari。【过分】 voharita。【现分】 ~ranta。【独】 ~haritvā。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[vi+oharati] 1. to express, define, decide M.I,499; D.I,202; Miln.218. -- 2. to decide, govern over (a kingdom), give justice, administrate J.IV,134 (Bārāṇasiṁ maṁsa-sur-odakaṁ, i. e. provide with; double Acc.), 192 (inf. vohātuṁ=voharituṁ C.). -- Pass. vohariyati to be called SnA 26; PvA.94; ThA.24. (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vohariyamāna: {'def': '【现分】正在叫做。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【现分】正在叫做。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vohāra: {'def': '【阳】呼叫，世俗的表达，使用，贸易，法律学，现在的名称。vohāravacana, 惯用语。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[vi+avahāra] 1. trade, business M.II,360; Sn.614 (°ṁ upajīvati); J.I,495; II,133, 202; V,471; PvA.111, 278. -- 2. current appellation, common use (of language), popular logic, common way of defining, usage, designation, term, cognomen; (adj.) (-°) so called SnA 383, 466, 483 (laddha° so-called); DA.I,70; PvA.56, 231 (laddha° padesa, with the name) VvA.8, 72 (pāṇo ti vohārato satto), 108 (loka nirūḷhāya samaññāya v.). --ariya-vohāra proper (i. e. Buddhist) mode of speech (opp. anariya° unbuddhist or vulgar, common speech) D.III,232; A.II,246; IV,307; Vin.IV,2; Vbh.376, 387. lokiya-vohāra common definition, general way of speech SnA 382. On term see also Dhs. trslⁿ § 1306. -- 3. lawsuit, law, lawful obligation; juridical practice, jurisprudence (cp. vohārika) Sn.246 (°kūṭa fraudulent lawyer); J.II,423 (°ṁ sādheti to claim a debt by way of law, or a lawful debt); VI,229; DhA.III,12 (°ûpajīvin a lawyer); SnA 289. -- 4. name of a sea-monster, which gets hold of ships J.V,259. (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】呼叫，表达，使用，贸易，法律学，现在的名称。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vohārika: {'def': '[fr. vohāra] “decider,” one connected with a law-suit or with the law, magistrate, a higher official (mahāmatta) in the law-courts, a judge or justice. At Vin.I,74 two classes of mahāmattā (ministers) are given: senānāyakā those of defence, and vohārikā of justice; cp. Vin.II,158; III,45 (purāṇa-vohāriko mahāmatto); IV,223. (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】商人，法官。vohārikāmacca,【阳】首席法官。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】商人，法官。 ~kāmacca, 【阳】首席法官。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vokiṇṇa: {'def': '【过分】已覆盖，已充满，已混淆。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【过分】已覆盖，已充满，已混淆。vokiṇṇasukhadukkho﹐苦乐参半。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [v(i)+okiṇṇa] covered with, drenched (with); mixed up, full of (Instr.) M.I,390; S.II,29; A.I,123, 148; II,232; J.I,110; DhsA.69. -- Cp. abbokiṇṇa. (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vokiṇṇaka: {'def': '(adj.) [vokiṇṇa+ka] mixed up Miln.300 (kapiniddā-pareto vokiṇṇakaṁ jaggati a person with light sleep, so-called “monkey-doze,” lies confusedly awake, i. e. is half asleep, half awake). Rh. D. not quite to the point: “a man still guards his scattered thoughts.” (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vokkamana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vokkamati] turning aside, deviation fr. (Abl.) M.I,14; A.I,243. (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vokkamati: {'def': '[vi+ukkamati] to turn aside, deviate from (Abl.); mostly in ger. vokkamma Vin.II,213; D.I,230; M.III,117; S.IV,117; Sn.946; J.I,23; Vism.18. -- pp. vokkanta. (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+u 出+kam(梵kram)超越+a), 避开，偏离。【过】vokkami。【过分】vokkanta。【独】vokkamma, vokkamitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + u + kam + a), 避开，偏离。【过】 vokkami。【过分】vokkanta。【独】 vokkamma, ~mitvā。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vokkanta: {'def': '[pp. of vokkamati] deviated from (Abl.) It.36. (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐【过分】进入，掉入，发生。参考 Okkanta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '参考 Ukkanta。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vokkanti: {'def': '(f.) [v(i)+akkanti] descent (into the womb), conception Th.1, 790. (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】进入，形成，出现。参考 Okkanti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '参考 Okkanti。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vokkha: {'def': '(adj) [? doubtful reading] is at J.III,21 given as syn. of vaggu (q. v.). (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vokāra: {'def': '[v(i)+okāra; cp. vikāra] 1. difference Sn.611. ‹-› 2. constituent of being (i. e. the khandhas), usually as eka°, catu° & pañca°-bhava, e. g. Kvu 261; Vbh.137; Tikp 32, 36 sq.; Vism.572; KhA 245; SnA 19, 158. In this meaning vokāra is peculiar to the Abhidhamma and is almost synonymous with vikāra 4, and in the Yamaka with khandha, e. g. pañca v., catu v. etc. ‹-› 3. worthless thing, trifle S.II,29. -- 4. inconvenience, disadvantage (cp. vikāra 3) PvA.12 (line 1 read: anek’ākāra-vokāraṁ). (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】1.存在的成份(= vokārabhava)。2.困扰。pañcavokārabhavā﹐五蕴有。catuvokārabhava﹐四蕴有(即无色界天的众生)。ekavokārabhava﹐一蕴有(无想天，只有色蕴)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 存在的成份（即：五蕴）。 2. 困扰。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Volokana: {'def': '(nt.) [v(i)+olokana, but cp. BSk. vyavalokana “inspection” Divy 435] looking at, examination J.IV,237 (v. l. vi°). (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Voloketi: {'def': '(vi + ava + lok + e), 调查，仔细检查。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vi+ava下+lok见+e), 调查，仔细检查。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[v(i)+oloketi; in meaning equal to viloketi & oloketi] to examine, study, scrutinize M.I,213 (with Gen.); Vin.I,6 (lokaṁ); Kvu 591; DhA.I,319 (lokaṁ); II,96 (v. l. oloketi). (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vomissa: {'def': '(ka) (adj.) [v(i)+omissa(ka)] miscellaneous, various Vism.87 (°katā), 88 (°ka), 104 (°carita). (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vomissaka: {'def': '【形】各种的，混合的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】各种的，混合的。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vomādapeti: {'def': 'at DA.I,300 is to be read as vodāpeti (cleanse, purify); v. l. BB vodāpeti; SS cāmā[dā]peti, i. e. to cause to be rinsed, cleanse. (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vonata: {'def': '(adj.) [v(i)+onata] bent down Th.1, 662. (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vopeti: {'def': 'at DA.I,277 (avopetvā) is to be read with v. l. as copeti, i. e. shake, move, disturb, violate (a rule). (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Voropana: {'def': '【中】剥夺。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】剥夺。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. voropeti] depriving (jīvita° of life) J.I,99. (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Voropeti: {'def': '(vi + ava + rup + e), 剥夺，取走。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 voropita。【现分】 ~penta。【独】 ~petvā。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[=oropeti] to deprive of (Abl.), to take away; only in phrase jīvitā voropeti [which shows that --v- is purely euphonic] to deprive of life, to kill D.I,85; J.IV,454; DA.I,236; DhA.IV,68; PvA.67, 105, 274. (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+ava下+rup+e), 剥夺，取走。【过】voropesi。【过分】voropita。【现分】voropenta。【独】voropetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vosita: {'def': '【形】完成的，完美的。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[vi+osita, pp. of ava+sā. See also vusita & vyosita] one who has attained (relative) achievement, perfected, accomplished, mastering, in phrase abhiññā° one who masters special knowledge S.I,167; Dh.423; It.47=61=81; A.I,165; cp. DhA.IV,233: “niṭṭhānaṁ patto vusita-vosānaṁ vā patto etc.” (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】完成的，完美的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vossa: {'def': '(-kamma) (nt.) making impotent (see under vassakamma) D.I,12; DA.I,97. (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vossagga: {'def': '【阳】 vossajana, 【中】捐赠物，作罢，放弃。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[=ossagga; ava+sṛj] relinquishing, relaxation; handing over, donation, gift (see on term as ethical Bdhgh at K.S. I.321) D.III,190 (issariya° handing over of authority), 226; S.IV,365 sq.; V,63 sq., 351 (°rata fond of giving); A.II,66 (id.); III,53 (id.); Ps.I,109; II,24, 117; J.VI,213 (kamma°); Nett 16; Vbh.229, 350; Vism.224; VbhA.317. --sati-vossagga relaxation of attention, inattention, indifference DhA.I,228; III,163, 482; IV,43. --pariṇāmi, maturity of surrender S.I,88. (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'vosagga(=ossagga; ava+srj),【阳】vossajana,【中】作罢，放弃，移送，捐赠物(relinquishing, relaxation; handing over, donation, gift)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vossajati: {'def': '(vi + ava + saj + a), 放弃，移交，撤回。【过】 ~saji。【过分】vossaṭṭha。【独】 ~jitvā, vossajja。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vi+ava+saj+a), 放弃，移交，撤回。【过】vossaji。【过分】vossaṭṭha。【独】vossajitvā, vossajja。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vossajjati: {'def': '[=ossaj(j)ati] to give up, relinquish; to hand over, resign Sn.751 (ger. vossajja; SnA 508 reads oss°); J.V,124 (issariyaṁ vossajjanto; cp. D.III,190). (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vosāna: {'def': '(nt.) [v(i)+osāna] 1. (relative) achievement, perfection (in this world), accomplishment M.II,211 (diṭṭhadhamm’âbhiññāvosāna-pārami-ppatta); Dh.423 (cp. DhA.IV,233); Th.1, 784 (°ṁ adhigacchati to reach perfection). -- 2. stopping, ceasing; in phrase °ṁ āpajjati (almost equal to pamāda) to come to an end (with), to stop, to become careless, to flag M.I,193; J.III,5; PvA.29; antarā °ṁ āpajjati to produce half-way achievement, to stop half-way A.V,157, 164; It.85. Kern, Toev. s. v. quite wrong “to arrive at a conclusion, to be convinced.” (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vosāpeti: {'def': '[v(i)+osāpeti] to make end, to bring to an end or a finish SnA 46 (desanaṁ). (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vosāraṇiya: {'def': '(adj. nt.) [fr. v(i)+osāraṇā] belonging to reinstatement A.I,99. (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vosāṭitaka: {'def': '(nt.) [wrong spelling for *vossaṭṭhika=v(i)+ ossaṭṭha+ika] (food) put down (on cemeteries etc.) for (the spirits of) the departed Vin.IV,89. (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Votthapana: {'def': '【中】定义。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】定义。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(& °ṭṭhapana) (nt.) [=vavatth°] establishing, synthesis, determination, a momentary stage in the unit called percept (cp. Cpd. 29), always with °kicca (or °kiriyā) “accomplishing the function of determination” Vism.21; DhsA.401; DA.I,194 (v. l. voṭṭhabb°); Tikp 276 (°kiriyā). (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Votthāpeti: {'def': '[=vavatthāpeti] to establish, put up, arrange J.VI,583. (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Voyoga: {'def': '[vi+uyyoga in sense of uyyutta?] effort (?), application KhA 243. Reading doubtful. (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vo°: {'def': 'is commonly regarded as the prefix combⁿ vi+ava° (i. e. vi+o°), but in many cases it simply represents ava° (=o°) with v as euphonic (“vorschlag”), as in vonata (=onata), voloketi, vokkanti, vokiṇṇa, voropeti, vosāpeti, vosāna, vossagga. In a few cases it corresponds to vi+ud°, as in vokkamati, vocchijjati, voyoga. (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Voṭṭhabbana: {'def': '确定。voṭṭhabbanacitta, 确定心，确定或鉴别五识之一刚识知的目标。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vuccati: {'def': '(vac +ya), 【被】被称为，被叫做。【现分】vuccamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Pass. of vac] to be called D.I,168, 245; Sn.436, 759, 848, 861, 946; Nd¹ 431; Nd² s. v. katheti; SnA 204; DhA.II,35. See also vatti. -- pp. vutta. (Page 644)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vac + ya), 被称为，被叫做。【现分】 vuccamāna。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vuddha: {'def': '【形】年长的，年老的，庄严的。参考 Vuḍḍha。jiṇṇo vuddho mahallako addhagato vayo anuppatto.(已老朽、年长、高龄、年岁已达晚年。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '参考 Vuḍḍha。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Vuddhi: see vuḍḍha & vuḍḍhi. (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vuddhi: {'def': '【阴】增加，生长，繁荣。参考 Vuḍḍhi。vuddhippatta,【形】成年的，适合成婚的，成年人的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '参考 Vuḍḍhi。 ~ppatta, 【形】成年的，适合成婚的，成年人的。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vupakaṭṭha: {'def': '【形】隐蔽的。(p304)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vuppati: {'def': 'is Pass. of vapati. (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vusita: {'def': '(vasati‘居住’ 的【过分】), 已居住，已实现，已达到完美。vusitatta,【中】vusitabhāva,【阳】被居住的事实。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Kern, Toev. s. v. vasati takes it as vi+uṣita (of vas²), against which speaks meaning of vivasati “to live from home.” Geiger, P.Gr. § 66¹ & 195 expl^d it as uṣita with prothetic v, as by-form of vuttha. Best fitting in meaning is assumption of vusita being a variant of vosita, with change of o to u in analogy to vuttha; thus=vi+osita “fulfilled, come to an end or to perfection”; cp. pariyosita. Geiger’s explⁿ is supported by phrase brahmaQariyaṁ vasati] fulfilled, accomplished; (or:) lived, spent (=vuttha); only in phrase vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ (trslⁿ Dial. I.93; “the higher life has been fulfilled”) D.I,84 (cp. Dh.I,225= vutthaṁ parivutthaṁ); It.115 (ed. vūsita°); Sn.463, 493; Pug.61. -- Also at D.I,90 neg. a°, with ref. to avusitavā, where Rh. D. (Dial. I.112) trsl^s “ill-bred” and “rude,” hardly just. See also arahant II.A. (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vasati 的【过分】), 已居住，已实现，已达到完美。 ~tta,【中】 ~bhāva,【阳】被居住的事实。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vusitatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. vusita] state of perfection D.I,90 (vusitavā-mānin kiṁ aññatra avusitattā=he is proud of his perfection rather from imperfection). (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vusitavant: {'def': '(adj.) [vusita+vant] one who has reached perfection (in chaste living), Ep. of the arahant D.II,223 (trslⁿ “who has lived “the life” “): M.I,4; S.III,611; A.V,16; Sn.514; Nd¹ 611; Miln.104. On D.I,90 see vusita (end). See also arahant II C. (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vussati: {'def': '(vasati 的【被】)。(p304)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'is Pass. of vasati² (q. v.). (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vasati 的【被】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vusīmant: {'def': '(adj.) [difficult to explain; perhaps for vasīmant (see vasīvasa) in sense of vasavattin]=vusitavant A.IV,340; Sn.1115 (cp. Nd² 611=vuṭṭhavā ciṇṇa-caraṇo etc., thus “perfected,” cp. ciṇṇavasin in same meaning). (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vutta: {'def': '(vadati‘说’的【过分】), 已说，(vapati 的【过分】) 已播种，已剃头。【中】被播种的事物，被说的事物。vuttappakāra,【形】有以上所说的品质。vuttappakārena,【副】在以上述所说的方法。vuttavasa﹐所说。vuttavādī,【阳】人云亦云者。vuttasira,【形】剃光头的。“imāya nāmā”ti vutte, 已说如此这般。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of vatti, vac; cp. utta] said DA.I,17 (°ṁ hoti that is to say); DhA.II,21, 75, 80; SnA 174.

--vādin one who speaks what is said (correctly), telling the truth M.I,369; S.II,33; III,6. (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [pp. of vapati¹] sown S.I,134 (khetta); J.I,340; III,12; VI,14; Miln.375 (khetta); PvA.7, 137, 139. (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '³ [pp. of vapati²] shaven M.II,168 (°siro). Cp. nivutta². (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vadati 的【过分】), 已说，(vapati 的【过分】) 已播种，已剃头。【中】被播种的事物，被说的事物。 ~ppakāra, 【形】有以上所提到的品质。~ppakārena, 【副】在以上所解释的方法。 ~vādī, 【阳】人云亦云者。~sira, 【形】剃光头的。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vutta-velā: {'def': 'at J.IV,45 (tena vutta-velāyaṁ & ittarāya vutta-velāya) is by Kern, Toev. s. v. vutta² fancifully & wrongly taken as *vyuṣṭa (=vi+uṣṭa, pp. of vas to shine), i. e. dawned; it is however simply vutta¹=at the time said by him (or her). (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vuttaka: {'def': '(nt.) [vutta¹+ka. The P. conneetion seems to be vac, although formally it may be derived fr. vṛt “to happen” etc. (cp. vuttin & vattin, both fr. vṛt, & vutti). The BSk. equivalent is vṛttaka “tale” (lit. happening), e. g. Divy 439] what has been said, saying; only in title of a canonical book “iti-vuttakaṁ” (“logia”): see under iti. (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vuttamāna: {'def': 'at S.I,129 read as vattamāna. (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vuttari: {'def': 'of Dh.370 is pañca-v-uttari(ṁ), cp. DhA.IV,109. (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vuttha: {'def': '² [pp. of vasati²] having dwelt, lived or spent (time), only in connection with vassa (rainy season) or vāsa (id.: see vāsa²). See e. g. DhA.I,7; PvA.32, 43; J.I,183 (°vāsa). With ref. to vassa “year” at J.IV,317. -- At DhA.I,327 vuttha stands most likely for vuddha (arisen, grown), as also in abstr. vutthattaṁ at DhA.I,330. -- See also parivuttha, pavuttha & vusita. (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vasati 的【过分】), 已居住，已度时。 ~vassa, 【形】度过雨季安居的。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of vasati¹] clothed: not found. More usual nivattha. (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vasati‘居住’ 的【过分】), 已居住，已度时。vutthavassa,【形】度过雨季安居的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vutthaka: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [vuttha²+ka] dwelt, lived, only in pubba° where he had lived before Mhvs 1, 53 (so for °vuttaka). (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vutti: {'def': '【阴】行为，习惯，练习，用法，生计。 ~ka, vuttī, 【形】有…习惯的，有…练习的。 ~tā, 【阴】条件。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. vṛt, cp. vattati; Sk. vṛtti] mode of being or acting, conduct, practice, usage, livelihood, habit S.I,100 (ariya°; cp. ariya-vāsa); Sn.81=Miln.228 (=jīvitavutti SnA 152); Sn.68, 220, 326, 676; J.VI,224 (=jīvita-vutti C.); Pv.II,9¹⁴ (=jīvita PvA.120); IV,1²¹ (=jīvikā PvA.229); Miln.224, 253; VvA.23. (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】行为，习惯，练习，用法，生计。vuttika, vuttī,【形】有…习惯的，有…练习的。vuttitā,【阴】条件。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vuttika: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [vutti+ka] living, behaving, acting A.III,383 (kaṇḍaka°); PvA.120 (dukkha°); sabhāga° living in mutual courtesy or properly, always comb^d with sappatissa, e. g. Vin.I,187; II,162; A.III,14 sq. (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vuttin: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. vṛttin]=vuttika; in sabhāga° Vin.I,45; J.I,219. Cp. vattin. (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vuttitā: {'def': '(f.) (-°) [abstr. formation fr. vutti] condition Vism.310 (āyatta°). (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vuvahyamāna: {'def': 'at A.IV,170 read with C. at opuniyamāna “sifting” (fr. opunāti): see remark at A.IV,476. (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vuyhamānaka: {'def': '(adj.) [vuyhemāna with disparaging suffix °ka] one who is getting drowned, “drownedling” J.III,507. (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vuyhana: {'def': '【中】漂浮。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】漂浮。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vuyhati: {'def': 'to be carried away: Pass. of vahati, q. v. and add refs.: Miln.69; Vism.603 (vuyhare). -- ppr. vuyhamāna: -- 1. being drawn M.I,225 (of a calf following its mother’s voice). -- 2. being carried away (by the current of a river), in danger of drowning Sn.319. ‹-› pp. vuḷha & vūḷha. (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐Vuhīyati (vah+ya)(vahati‘负担’﹑‘携带’的【被】), 被运走，被漂浮。【过】vuyhi。【过分】vūḷha。【现分】vuyhamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vah + ya), 被运走，被飘浮。【过】 vuyhi。【过分】 vūḷha。【现分】 ~hamāna。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vuḍḍha: {'def': '【形】老的，庄严的。vuḍḍhatara,【形】年长者，资深者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】老的，庄严的。 ~tara, 【形】年长者，资深者。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& vuddha [pp. of vaḍḍhati] old (fig. venerable) ‹-› 1. vuḍḍha Pv.II,11⁴; Mhvs 13, 2. -- 2. vuddha M.II,168; J.V,140; Sn.p. 108 (+mahallaka); DA.I,283. (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vuḍḍhaka: {'def': '(adj.) [vuḍḍha+ka] old; f. °ikā old woman Th.2, 16. (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vuḍḍhi: {'def': '【阴】增加，生长，繁荣。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& vuddhi (f.) [a by-form of vaḍḍhi] increase, growth, furtherance, prosperity. -- 1. vuḍḍhi PvA.22. Often in phrase vuḍḍhi virūḷhi vepulla (all three almost tautological) Miln.51; Vism.129. -- 2. vuddhi M.I,117 (+virūḷhi etc.); S.II,205 sq.; III,53; V,94, 97; A.III,76 (opp. parihāni), 404 (+virūḷhi), 434 (kusalesu dhammesu); V,123 sq.; It.108; J.V,37 (°ppatta grown up); Vism.271, 439 (so read for buddhi); DhA.II,82, 87; Sdhp.537. (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】增加，生长，繁荣，昌隆。mahāsālāpi pañcahi vuddhīhi vaḍḍhanti, 五种种植(五种生种子：根种、茎种、节种、枝种、种籽)皆盛产。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vuḷha: {'def': '& Vūḷha [pp. of vahati, Pass. vuyhati; but may be vi+ūḷha] carried away. -- 1. vuḷha: Vin.I,32, 109. ‹-› 2. vūḷha: A.III,69; J.I,193; DhA.II,265 (udakena). See also būḷha. (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vuṇhi°: {'def': '(& Instr. vuṇhinā) at Pgdp 13, 15, 19, 35 must be meant for v-uṇha° (& v’uṇhena), i. e. heat (see uṇha). (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vuṭṭha: {'def': '[pp. of vassati¹] (water) shed, rained Pv.I,5⁶; PvA.29. See also vaṭṭa & vaṭṭha. (Page 644)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vassati 的【过分】), 已淋湿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vassati 的【过分】), 已淋湿。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vuṭṭhahati: {'def': '& vuṭṭhāti [the sandhi form of uṭṭhahati (q. v.), with euphonic v, which however appears in BSk. as vyut° (i. e. vi+ud°); vyuttisṭhate “to come back from sea” Divy 35, and freq. in AvŚ, e. g. I.242] 1. to rise, arise; to be produced Vin.II,278 (gabbha). -- 2. to rise out of (Abl.), to emerge from, to come back S.IV,294; Vism.661 (vuṭṭhāti). -- pp. vuṭṭhita. -- Caus. vuṭṭhāpeti (1) to ordain, rehabilitate Vin.IV,226, 317 sq. (=upasampādeti). (2) to rouse out of (Abl.), to turn away from A.III,115. (Page 644)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'vuṭṭhāti (u + ṭhā + a), 升，出现，显露，被生产。【过】 vuṭṭhahi,vuṭṭhāsi。【过分】 vuṭṭhita。【现分】 ~hanta。【独】 vuṭṭhahitvā, vuṭṭhāya。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'vuṭṭhāti (u+ṭhā +a), 升，出现，显露，被生产。【过】vuṭṭhahi, vuṭṭhāsi。【过分】vuṭṭhita。【现分】vuṭṭhanta。【独】vuṭṭhahitvā, vuṭṭhāya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vuṭṭhavant: {'def': '=vusitavant, Nd² 179, 284, 611. (Page 644)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vuṭṭhi: {'def': '【阴】雨。 ~ka, 【形】有雨的。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】雨。vuṭṭhika,【形】有雨的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. vṛṣ, see vassati¹ & cp. Vedic vṛṣṭi] rain S.I,172=Sn.77 (fig.=saddhā bījaṁ tapo vuṭṭhi); A.III,370, 378 (vāta°); It.83; Dh.14; J.VI,587 (°dhārā); Ap 38 (fig.), 52 (amata°); Miln.416; Vism.37, 234 (salila°); Mhvs 1, 24; SnA 34, 224; PvA.139 (°dhārā shower of rain). --dubbuṭṭhi lack of rain, drought (opp. suvuṭṭhi) J.II,367=VI,487; Vism.512. (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vuṭṭhikā: {'def': '(f.)=vuṭṭhi; only in cpd. dubbuṭṭhikā time of drought, lack of rain D.I,11; DA.I,95; It.64 sq. (as avuṭṭhika-sama resembling a drought); DhA.I,52. (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vuṭṭhimant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vuṭṭhi, cp. Vedic vṛṣṭimant in same meaning] containing rain, full of rain; the rainy sky Th.2, 487 (=deva, i. e. rain-god or sky ThA.287). Kern, Toev. s. v. wrongly=*vyuṣṭi°, i. e. fr. vi+uṣ (vas) to shine, “luisterrijk,” i. e. lustrous, resplendent. (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vuṭṭhita: {'def': '[pp. of vuṭṭhahati; cp. uṭṭhita] risen (out of), aroused, having come back from (Abl.) D.II,9 (paṭisallāṇā); Sn.p. 59; S.IV,294. (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vuṭṭhāna: {'def': '【中】升起。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】升起。vuṭṭhānavasitā﹐出定自在，能够轻易及迅速地从禅定中出来的能力。vuṭṭhānagāmi, 出起(因为「道」乃从所执著的事物--即外在的相--出起，也从内在的烦恼出起，所以「道」被称为「出起」。)。Vism.671.︰gotrabhuñāṇaṁ vuṭṭhānagāminiyā vipassanāya pariyosānaṁ.(种姓智为至出起观的最终)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [the sandhi form of uṭṭhāna] 1. rise, origin J.I,114 (gabbha°). -- 2. ordination, rehabilitation (in the Order) Vin.IV,320; Miln.344. -- 3. (cp. uṭṭhāna 3) rousing, rising out, emerging, emergence; appl^d as a religious term to revival from jhāna-abstraction (cp. Cpd. 67, 215 n. 4; Dhs. trlⁿ, § 1332) M.I,302; S.III,270; IV,294; A.III,311, 418, 427 sq.; Vism.661 (in detail), 681 sq. (id.); Dhs.1332; Nett 100; Tikp 272, 346. --°gāminī (--vipassanā-ñāṇa) “insight of discernment leading to uprising” (Cpd. 67) Vism.661, 681 sq. (Page 644)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vuṭṭhānatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. vuṭṭhāna] rehabilitation; in āpatti° forgiveness of an offence Vin.II,250. (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vuṭṭhānima: {'def': '[?] is an expression for a certain punishment (pain) in purgatory M.I,337 (vuṭṭhānimaṁ nāma vedanaṁ vediyamāna). (Page 645)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vuṭṭhāpeti: {'def': '(Vuṭṭhāna的【使】), 唤醒，厌恶，受戒(为出家人)。【过】vuṭṭhāpesi。【过分】vuṭṭhāpita 【独】vuṭṭhāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vya-: {'def': '﹐= bya-(母音之前的vi-→vy﹐by﹐viy﹐veyy)=vi-﹐bya-﹐viya﹐veyya-。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vyadhati: {'def': '[in poetry for the usual vedhati of vyath, cp. Goth. wipōn] to tremble, shake, waver; to be frightened Vin.II,202 (so for vyādhati); J.III,398 (vyadhase; C. vyadhasi=kampasi). -- Caus. vyadheti (& vyādheti) to frighten, confuse J.IV,166 (=vyādheti bādheti C.). -- Fut. vyādhayissati S.I,120=Th.1, 46 (by°). Under byādheti we had given a different derivation (viz. Caus. fr. vyādhi). (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyagga: {'def': '(adj.) [vi+agga, of which the contracted form is vagga²] distracted, confused, bewildered; neg. a° S.I,96 (°mānasa); V,66, 107. (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyaggha: {'def': '(=byaggha),【阳】老虎。vyagghacamma【中】，老虎皮。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】老虎。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic vyāghra] a tiger D.III,25; A.III,101; Sn.416 (°usabha); Ap 68 (°rājā); J.I,357; III,192 (Subāhu); V,14 (giri-sānuja). -- f. viyagghinī (biy°) Miln.67. See also byaggha. (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyagghīnasa: {'def': '[?] a hawk S.I,148 (as °nisa); J.VI,538. Another word for “hawk” is sakuṇagghi. (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyakkhissaṁ: {'def': 'at Sn.600 is fut. of vyācikkhati (see viyā°). (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyamha: {'def': '(nt.) [etym.?] palace; a celestial mansion, a vimāna, abode for fairies etc. J.V, 454; VI,119, 251 (=pura & rāja-nivesa C.); Vv 35¹ (=bhavana VvA.160). Cp. byamha. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】天宫。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】天宫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vyamhita: {'def': '(adj.) [metric for vimhita] astounded, shocked, awed; dismayed, frightened J.V,69 (=bhīta C.); VI,243, 314. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyanta: {'def': '(adj. nt.) [vi+anta] removed, remote; nt. end, finish; only as vyanti° in combⁿ with kṛ and bhū. The spelling is often byanti°. -- (1) vyantikaroti to abolish, remove, get rid of, destroy M.I,115 (byant’eva ekāsiṁ), 453 (by°); D.I,71 (°kareyya); S.IV,76, 190; A.IV,195; DA.I,125, 212. -- Fut. vyantikāhiti Miln.391 (by°); DhA.IV,69. -- pp. vyantikata Th.1, 526. -- (2) vyantibhavati to cease, stop; to come to an end, to be destroyed Kvu 597 (by°); or °hoti A.I,141; III,74; Ps.I,171 (by°); Miln.67 (by°), vyantibhāva destruction, annihilation M.I,93; A.V,292, 297 sq.; Pv IV.1⁷³; Kvu 544 (by°). vyantibhuta come to an end J.V,4. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyantībhavati: {'def': '(vi+anta+ī+bhū+a), 停止，终了，结束。【过】vyantībhavi。【过分】vyantībhūta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + anta + ī + bhū + a), 停止，终了，结束。【过】 ~bhavi。【过分】 ~bhūta。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vyantībhāva: {'def': '【阳】歼灭，破坏。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】歼灭，破坏。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vyantīkaroti: {'def': 'byantīkaroti (vi+anta+ī+kar行+o), 废止，除去，免除。【过】vyantīkari。【过分】vyantīkata。【独】vyantīkaritvā, vyantīkatvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + anta + ī + kar + o), 废止，除去，免除。【过】 ~kari。【过分】 ~kata。【独】 ~karitvā, ~katvā。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vyapagacchati: {'def': '[vi+apagacchati] to depart, to be dispelled J.II,407 (ger. °gamma). -- pp. °gata. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+apa+gam去+a), 离开。【过】vyapagami。【过分】vyapagata。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + apa + gam + a), 离开。【过】 ~gami。【过分】 vyapagata。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vyapagata: {'def': '[pp. of vyapagacchati] departed J.I,17; Miln.133, 225. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyapahaññati: {'def': '[vi+apa+haññati] to be removed or destroyed J.VI,565. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyapanudati: {'def': '[vi+apanudati] to drive away, expel; ger °nujja Sn.66. aor. vyapānudi Th.2, 318. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyappanā: {'def': '(f.) [vi+appanā] application (of mind), focussing (of attention) Dhs.7. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+appanā),【阴】极安止(的心)(注意的)焦点(application (of mind), focussing (of attention)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vyappatha: {'def': '(nt.) [perhaps a distortion of *vyāpṛta, for which the usual P. (der.) veyyāvacca (q. v.) in meaning “duty”] 1. duty, occupation, activity Sn.158 (khīṇa° of the Arahant: having no more duties, cp. vyappathi). -- 2. way of speaking, speech, utterance Sn.163, 164 (contrasted to citta & kamma; cp. kāya, vācā, mano in same use), expl^d at SnA 206 by vacīkamma; & in defⁿ of “speech” at Vin.IV,2 (see under byappatha); DhsA.324 (expl^d as vākya-bheda). (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】1.duty, occupation, activity (khīṇavyappatha of the Arahant: having no more duties, cp. vyappathi). -- 2. way of speaking, speech, utterance Sn 163, 164 (contrasted to citta & kamma; cp. kāya, vācā, mano in same use), by vacīkamma; & in defn of “speech” (see under byappatha); DhsA 324 (expld as vākya-bheda).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vyappathi: {'def': '(cp. Sk. vyāprti) ,【阴】活动、占有、责任(activity, occupation, duty)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. vyāpṛti] activity, occupation, duty (?) Sn.961. See remarks on byappatha. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyasana: {'def': '(‹vy+as)﹐(=Byasana)﹐【中】不幸，毁灭，破坏(misfortune, misery, ruin, destruction, loss)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vy+as] misfortune, misery, ruin, destruction, loss D.I,248; S.III,137 (anaya°); IV,159; A.I,33; V,156 sq., 317 (several); Sn.694 (°gata ruined); Pv.I,6⁴ (=dukkha PvA.33); III,5⁶ (=anattha PvA.199); Vbh.99 sq., 137; VbhA.102 (several); PvA.4, 103, 112; Sdhp.499. -- The 5 vyasanas are: ñāti°, bhoga°, roga°, sīla°, diṭṭhi° or misfortune concerning one’s relations, wealth, health, character, views. Thus at D.III,235; A.III,147; Vin.IV,277. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】不幸，毁灭，破坏。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vyasanin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vyasana] having misfortune, unlucky, faring ill J.V,259. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyasanna: {'def': '[metric (diaeretic) for visanna] sunk into (Loc.), immersed J.IV,399; V,16 (here doubtful; not, as C., vyasanāpanna; gloss visanna; vv. ll. in C.: vyaccanna, viphanna, visatta). (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyathana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vyath] shaking, wavering Dhtp 465 (as defⁿ of tud). (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyathati: {'def': '(vyath + a), 压迫，使服从。【过】 vyathi。【过分】 ~thita。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vyath+a), 压迫，使服从。【过】vyathi。【过分】vyathita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vyatireka: {'def': '[vi+atireka] what is left over, addition, surplus PvA.18 (of “ca”), 228 (°to). (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyatta: {'def': '【形】学习的，完成的，显然的，明白的。 ~tara, 【形】更有学问的，更有技术的。 ~tā, 【阴】聪明，学问。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Byatta,【形】学习的，完成的，显然的，明白的。vyattara,【形】更有学问的，更有技术的。vyattā,【阴】聪明，学问。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. viyatta, veyyatta & byatta] 1. experienced, accomplished, learned, wise, prudent, clever S.IV,174 (paṇḍita+), 375; A.III,117, 258; J.VI,368; VvA.131 (paṇḍita+); PvA.39 (id.). --a° unskilled, foolish (+bāla) S.IV,380; A.III,258; J.I,98. -- 2. evident, manifest PvA.266 (°pākaṭa-bhāva). (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyattatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. vyatta] experience, learning, cleverness Miln.349 (as by°); DhA.II,38 (avyattatā foolishness: so correct under avyattatā P.D. I.86). (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyattaya: {'def': '[vi+ati+aya] opposition, reversal; in purisa° change of person (gram.) SnA 545; vacana° reversal of number (i. e. sg. & pl.) DA.I,141; SnA 509. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyavasita: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of vi+ava+sā (or śri?), cp. vyavasāna] decided, resolute SnA 200. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyavasāna: {'def': '(nt.) [somewhat doubtful. It has to be compared with vavassagga, although it should be derived fr. sā (cp. pp. vyavasita; or śri?), thus mixture of sṛj & sā. Cp. a similar difficulty of sā under osāpeti] decision, resolution; only used to explain part. handa (exhortation) at SnA 200, 491 (v. l. vyavasāya: cp. vavasāya at DA.I,237), for which otherwise vavassagga. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyavayāti: {'def': '[vi+ava(=apa)+i, cp. apeti & veti] to go away, disappear J.V,82. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyaya: {'def': '参考 Vaya。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】【中】衰老，损失，衰退，开支。参考 Vaya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[vi+aya, of i; the assimilation form is vaya²] expense, loss, decay S.IV,68, 140; Miln.393 (as abbaya). avyayena (Instr.) safely D.I,72. Cp. veyyāyika & vyāyika. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyañjana: {'def': '(fr. vi+añj, cp. añjati2 & abbhañjati),【中】1.特徵，辅音，语词，名称，标记((accompanying) attribute, distinctive mark, sign, characteristic)。2.字母(letter (of a word) as opposed to attha (meaning, sense, spirit), (Cp. savyañjana); or padavyañjana, 文句。purisavyañjana, 男性器官(membrum virile Vin.II,269.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vi+añj, cp. añjati² & abbhañjati] 1. (accompanying) attribute, distinctive mark, sign, characteristic (cp. anu°) Sn.549, 1017; Th.1, 819 (metric: viyañjana); J.V,86 (viyañjanena under the pretext); Dhs.1306. gihi° characteristic of a layman Sn.44 (cp. SnA 91); Miln.11; purisa° membrum virile Vin.II,269. -- 2. letter (of a word) as opposed to attha (meaning, sense, spirit), e, g. D.III,127; S.IV,281, 296; V,430; A.II,139 (Cp. savyañjana); or pada (word), e. g. M.I,213; A.I,59; II,147, 168, 182; III,178 sq.; Vin.II,316; Nett 4; SnA 177. --vyañjanato according to the letter Miln.18 (opp. atthato). -- 3. condiment, curry Vin.II,214; A.III,49 (odano anekasūpo aneka-vyañjano); Pv.II,1¹⁵ (bhatta° rice with curry); PvA.50. -- Cp. byañjana. (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】咖哩饭菜，特征，辅音，字。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vyañjanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vyañjana] see ubhato° & veyyañjanika. (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyañjayati: {'def': '(vi+añj+a), 指出，表现…的特色，指示。【过】vyañjayi。【过分】vyañjita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + añj + a), 指出，表现…的特色，指示。【过】 ~jayi。【过分】~jita。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[vi+añjati, or añjeti] to characterise, denote, express, indicate SnA 91; Nett 209 (Cy.). (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyosita: {'def': '(adj.) [=vosita] perfected; neg. a° not perfected, imperfect Th.1, 784 (aby°). (Page 655)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vy°: {'def': 'is the semi-vowel (i. e. half-consonantic) form of vi° before following a & ā (vya°, vyā), very rarely ū & o. The prefix vi° is very unstable, and a variety of forms are also attached to vy°, which, after the manner of all consonant-comb^ns in Pāḷi, may apart from its regular form vy° appear either as contracted to vv° (written v°), like vagga (for vyagga), vaya (for vyaya), vosita (=vyosita), *vvūha (=vyūha, appearing as °bhūha), or diaeretic as viy° (in poetry) or veyy° (popular), e. g. viyañjana, viyārambha, viyāyata; or veyvañjanika, veyyākaraṇa, veyyāyika. It further appears as by° (like byaggha, byañjana, byappatha, byamha, byāpanna, byābādha etc.). In a few cases vya° represents (a diaeretic) vi°, as in vyamhita & vyasanna; and vyā°=vi° in vyārosa. (Page 652)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyābhaṅgī: {'def': '【阴】扁担(carrying pole)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】扁担。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [see byā°] 1. a carrying pole (or flail?) Th.1, 623; comb^d with asita (see asita⁴ in corr. to pt. 2) “sickle & pole” M.II,180; A.III,5. -- 2. a flail S.IV,201. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyābādha: {'def': '(& byābādha) [fr. vi+ā+bādh, but semantically connected with vi+ā+pad, as in vyāpāda & vyāpajjha] oppression, injury, harm, hurting; usually in phrase atta° & para° (disturbing the peace of others & of oneself) M.I,89; S.IV,339; A.I,114, 157, 216; II,179. -- Also at S.IV,159 (pāṇinaṁ vyābādhāya, with v. l. vadhāya). See also byābādha. The corresponding adjectives are (a)vyāpajjha & veyyābādhika (q. v.). (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyābādheti: {'def': '(vi + + bādh + e), 伤害，阻隔。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~dhita。【独】 ~etvā。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vi++bādh骚扰+e), 伤害，阻隔。【过】vyābādhesi。【过分】vyābādhita。【独】vyābādhetvā。yohaṁ na kiñci vyābādhemi tasaṁ vā thāvaraṁ vā﹐我不害任何弱者或强者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(& bya°) [Caus. of vi+ā+badh or distortion fr. vyāpadeti, with which identical in meaning] to do harm, hurt, injure Vin.II,77/78; S.IV,351 sq.; DA.I,167. The BSk. is vyābādhayate (e. g. Divy 105). (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyābāheti: {'def': '[vi+ā+bah: see bahati³] lit. “to make an outsider,” to keep or to be kept out or away Vin.II,140 (°bāhiṁsu in Pass. sense; so that they may not be kept away). Oldenberg (on p. 320) suggests reading vyābādhiṁsu, which may be better, viz. “may not be offended” (?). The form is difficult to explain. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyādha: {'def': '【阳】猎人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】猎人。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. vyadh: see vedha & vijjhati] a huntsman, deer-hunter Mhvs 10, 89 (read either vyādha-deva god of the h.; or vyādhi° demon of maladies); 10, 95. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyādhati: {'def': 'see vyadhati. -- pp. vyādhita. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyādheti: {'def': '(vyādhati‹vyath的【未】), 病，恼。【未】vyādhayissti。【过分】vyādhita。【被】vyādhyati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vyādhi: {'def': '² (camel) see oṭṭhi°. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [see byādhi] sickness, malady, illness, disease A.I,139 (as devadūta), 146, 155 sq.; III,66; Ps.I,59 sq.; II,147; J.VI,224; Vism.236. Often in sequence jāti jarā vyādhi maraṇa, e. g. A.II,172; III,74 sq.; Vism.232. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】疾病。 ~ta, 【形】受疾病影响的。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(=byādhi),【阳】疾病。vyādhita,【形】受疾病影响的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vyādhita: {'def': '[pp. of vyādheti] 1. affected with an illness, ill J.V,497; Miln.168. See byādhita. -- 2. shaken, f. °ā as abstr, shakiness, trembling VbhA.479. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyādhiyaka: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vyādheti] shaking up Vbh.352; VbhA.479 (uppannavyādhitā; i. e. kāya-pphandana). (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyādinna: {'def': '[for vyādiṇṇa, vi+ādiṇṇa?] at A.III,64 (soto vikkhitto visato+) is doubtful in reading & meaning (“split”?). It must mean something like “interrupted, diverted.” The vv. ll. are vicchinna & jiṇṇa. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyāharati: {'def': '(vi + ā + har + a), 做声，谈话，说话。【过】 ~hari。【过分】vyāhaṭa,【独】 ~ritvā。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vi+ā+har拿+a), 做声，谈话，说话。【过】vyāhari。【过分】vyāhaṭa,【独】vyāharitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[vi+āharati] to utter, talk, speak Vin.II,214; J.II,177; IV,225 (puṭṭho vyāhāsi, perhaps with v. l. as vyākāsi). See also avyāharati. -- Cp. paṭi°. (Page 655)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyākaraṇa: {'def': '【中】文法，解释，答案，宣布。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(byākaraṇa),【中】文法，解释，答案，宣布。ekaṁsabyākaraṇīyaṁ pañhaṁ ekaṁsena byākaroti, vibhajjabyākaraṇīyaṁ pañhaṁ vibhajja byākaroti, paṭipucchābyākaraṇīyaṁ pañhaṁ paṭipucchā byākaroti ṭhapanīyaṁ pañhaṁ ṭhapeti. (该作一向(决定的)解答之问，以一向解答；该分别解答之问，分别解答；该反诘解答之问，反诘解答；该置之问，置之。)(决定的解答：又称为‘一向记’) (AA.5.92.)：aññābyākaraṇānīti arahattabyākaraṇāni.(记说具知︰阿罗汉之记说。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vyākaroti; see also veyyākaraṇa] 1. answer (pañha°), explanation, exposition A.I,197; II,46; III,119; SnA 63, 99; KhA 75, 76. -- 2. grammar (as one of the 6 aṅgas) SnA 447; PvA.97. -- 3. prediction J.I,34, 44; DhA.IV,120. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyākariyamāna: {'def': '【现分】正在解释，正在宣布。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【现分】正在解释，正在宣布。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vyākaroti: {'def': '[vi+ā+kṛ] 1. to explain, answer (in combⁿ with puṭṭha, asked) D.I,25, 58, 175, 200; Sn.510, 513 sq., 1102, 1116; Miln.318 (byākareyya); VvA.71. Fut. °karissati D.I,236; Sn.993; PvA.281. For vyākarissati we have vyakkhissati (of viyācikkhati) at Sn.600. -- aor. sg. vyākāsi Sn.541, 1116, 1127; PvA.212; pl. vyākaṁsu Sn.1084; Pv.II,13⁵. -- grd. vyākātabba D.I,94, 118. ‹-› 2. to prophesy, predict [cp. BSk. vyākaroti in same sense Divy 65, 131] J.I,140; Pv III,5⁵ (aor. °ākari); Mhvs 6, 2 (aor. °ākaruṁ); DhA.IV,120 (°ākāsi); PvA.196, 199 (°ākāsi). -- pp. vyākata. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(=byākaronti)(vi+ā+kar行+o), 解释，宣布，回答。【过】vyākari。【过分】vyākata。【独】vyākaritvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + ā + kar + o), 解释，宣布，回答。【过】 ~kari。【过分】 ~kata。【独】 ~karitvā。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vyākata: {'def': '[pp. of vyākaroti] 1. answered, explained, declared, decided M.I,431 (by°); A.I,119; S.II,51, 223; IV,59, 194; V,177; Sn.1023. -- avyākata unexplained, undecided, not declared, indeterminate M.I,431 (by°); D.I,187, 189; S.II,222; IV,375 sq., 384 sq., 391 sq.; Ps.II,108 sq.; Dhs.431, 576. -- 2. predicted J.I,26. ‹-› 3. settled, determined J.III,529 (asinā v. brought to a decision by the sword). (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vyākaroti‘解释’的【过分】),已解释，已宣布，已回答。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vyākaroti 的【过分】)。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vyākatatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. vyākata] explanation, definiteness PvA.27. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyākattar: {'def': '[n. ag. of vyākaroti; cp. BSk. vyākartṛ Divy 620] expounder A.III,81. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyākhyāta: {'def': '[pp. of v(i)yācikkhati] told, announced, set forth, enumerated Sn.1,000. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyākhyāti: {'def': '(vi+ā+khyā见+a), 宣布，解释。【过】vyākhyāsi。【过分】vyākhyāta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + ā + khyā + a), 宣布，解释。【过】 ~khyāsi。【过分】 ~āta。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vyākula: {'def': '(adj.) [vi+ākula] perplexed J.I,301; PvA.160; VvA.30; Sdhp.403. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】不知所措的，困惑的，混乱的。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】不知所措的，困惑的，混乱的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vyākāra: {'def': 'see viy°. (Page 653)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyālika: {'def': '(nt.) [for vy+alika] fault ThA.266. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyāma: {'def': '(=byāma),【阳】寻(古代长度单位，八尺叫一寻)，从头顶到脚底的长度。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see byāma & add ref. D.II,18≈Vism.136 (catu°pamāṇa). Vyāyata [vi+āyata] stretched; only neg. a° senseless, confused (should it be vyāyatta?) J.I,496 (=avyatta C.). See also viyāyata. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】寻（古代长度单位，八尺叫一寻）。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vyāpajjanā: {'def': '【阴】失败，恶意，激怒。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹vyāpajjati),【阴】激怒，恶意(illwill)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. vyāpajjati] injuring, doing harm, illwill Pug.18; Dhs.418 (“getting upset” trslⁿ). (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyāpajjati: {'def': '(vi+ā+pad去+ya),恼怒，伤害，失败。【过】vyāpajji。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + ā + pad + ya), 失败，感到困扰，恼怒。【过】 ~pajji。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[vi+āpajjati] (Instr.) to go wrong, to fail, disagree; to be troubled; also (trs.) to do harm, to injure S.III,119; IV,184=Nd² 40 (by°); A.III,101 (bhattaṁ me vyāpajjeyya disagrees with me, makes me ill); Sn.1065 (ākāso avyāpajjamāno not troubled, not getting upset); Nd² 74 (by°). -- pp. vyāpanna. -- Caus. vyāpādeti. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyāpajjha: {'def': '(adj.-nt.) [perhaps grd. of vyāpajjati; but see also avyāpajjha] to be troubled or troubling, doing harm, injuring; only neg. avyāpajjha (& abyābajjha) (adj.) not hurting, peaceful, friendly; (nt.) kindness of heart Vin.I,183; M.I,90 (abyābajjhaṁ vedanaṁ vedeti), 526; D.I,167, 247, 251; S.IV,296, 371; A.I,98; II,231 sq.; III,285, 329 sq., 376 sq. Cp. byāpajjha & vyābādha etc. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyāpaka: {'def': '【形】装满，撒布，遍布。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vyāpeti] filling or summing up, combining, completing PvA.71 (in explⁿ of “ye keci”: anavasesa° niddesa). (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】装满，撒布，遍布。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vyāpanna: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of vyāpajjati] spoilt, disagreeing, gone wrong; corrupt; only with citta, i. e. a corrupted heart, or a malevolent intention; adj. malevolent D.I,139; III,82; A.I,262, 299; opp. avyāpanna (q. v.). See also byāpanna & viyāpanna. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vyāpajjati 的【过分】), 已出毛病，已有恶意，已恼怒。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vyāpajjati 的【过分】), 已出毛病，已有恶意，已恼怒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vyāpatti: {'def': '(f.) [fr. vyāpajjati] injury, harm; doing harm, malevolence A.V,292 sq.; Pug.18; J.IV,137; Dhs.418 (“disordered temper” trslⁿ) (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹vyāpajjati),【阴】伤害(injury, harm)，恶意(malevolence)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vyāpeti: {'def': '(vi + ap + e), 遍及，使充满，散播。【过】 ~esi。【现分】 ~penta。【独】 ~petvā。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vi+ap+e), 遍及，使充满，散播。【过】vyāpesi。【现分】vyāpenta。【独】vyāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[vi+Caus. of āp] to make full, pervade, fill, comprise DhsA.307; VvA.17; ThA.287; PvA.52 (=pharati), 71 (in explⁿ of “ye keci”). (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyāpin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vi+āp] pervading, diffused DhsA.311. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyāpita: {'def': '(Vyāpeti‘遍及’的【过分】) 遍及，使充满，散播。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vyāpāda: {'def': '(‹vi+ā向+pad去﹑走=byāpāda),【阳】恶意，恶毒，拂逆，逆向行。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】恶意，恶毒。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. vyāpajjati. See also byāpāda] making bad, doing harm: desire to injure, malevolence, ill-will D.I,71, 246; III,70 sq., 226, 234; S.I,99; II,151; IV,343; A.I,194, 280; II,14, 210; III,92, 231, 245; IV,437; Vbh.86, 363 sq., 391; Pug.17 sq.; Dhs.1137; Vism.7; DA.I,211; VbhA.74, 118, 369. °anusaya M.I,433. °dosa M.III,3. °dhātu M.III,62. °nīvaraṇa M.II,203. See under each affix. -- Cp. avyāpāda. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyāpādeti: {'def': '[Caus. of vyāpajjati] to spoil Miln.92. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi + ā + pad + e), 破坏，恼怒。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vi+ā+pad去+e), 破坏，恼怒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vyāpāra: {'def': '【阳】职业，工作，生意。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】职业，工作，生意。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[vi+ā+pṛ] occupation, business, service, work J.I,341; V,60; Vism.595. Cp. veyyāvacca, vyappatha (by°), vyāvaṭa. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyāpārita: {'def': '(vyāpāreti 的【过分】), 已鼓动，已催促。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vyāpāreti 的【过分】), 已鼓动，已催促。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vyāpāritar: {'def': 'one occupied with M.III,126. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyārambha: {'def': 'see viy°. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyārosa: {'def': '[vi+ā+rosa, cp. virosanā] anger M.III,78; S.III,73. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyāruddha: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of vi+ā+rundh] opposed, hostile Th.2, 344; Sn.936. See byāruddha. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyāsa: {'def': '[fr. vi+ās to sit] separation, division; always contrasted with samāsa, e. g. Vism.82 (vyāsato separately, distributively; opp. samāsato); KhA 187. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyāsatta: {'def': '【形】使依恋的。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see byāsatta. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】使依恋的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vyāsecana: {'def': '【中】洒水。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】洒水。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vyāseka: {'def': '[fr. vi+ā+sic] mixed; only neg. a° unmixed, untarnished, undefiled D.I,70; DA.I,183; Pug.59; Th.1, 926. (Page 655)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyāsiñcati: {'def': '[vi+āsiñcati] to defile, corrupt, tarnish S.IV,78 (cittaṁ). -- pp. vyāsitta ibid. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyāvaṭa: {'def': '【形】忙碌的，活跃的，参加的，抱定决心要实行的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】忙碌的，活跃的，参加的，抱定决心要实行的。(p307)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [=Sk. vyāpṛta, cp. vyāpāra, byappatha. & veyyāvacca] doing service, active, busy; eager, keen, intent on (Loc.), busy with A.IV,195 (mayi=worrying about me); J.III,315 (su°); IV,371 (kiccâkiccesu v.= uyyatta C.); V,395 (=ussukka); VI,229 (=kāya-veyyāvacca-dān’ādi-kamma-karaṇena vyāvaṭa C.). --dassana° keen on a sight, eager to see J.I,89; VvA.213 (preferred to T. reading!). --dāna° serving in connection with a gift, busy with giving, a “commissioner of gifts,” i. e. a superintendent installed by a higher (rich) person (as a king or seṭṭhi) to look after the distribution of all kinds of gifts in connection with a mahādāna. Rh. Davids at Dial. II.372 (following Childers) has quite misunderstood the term in referring it to a vyāvaṭa in meaning of “hindered,” and by translating it as “hindered at the largesse” or “objecting to the largesse.” At none of the passages quoted by him has it that meaning. See e. g. D.II,354; J.III,129; Pv.II,9⁵⁰ (dāne v.=ussukkaṁ āpanna PvA.135); PvA.112 (dāne), 124 (id.); DA.I,296 (? not found). avyāvaṭa not busy, not bothering about (Loc.), unconcerned with, not worrying D.II,141 (Tathāgatassa sarīre; trslⁿ not to the point “hinder not yourselves”); Vin.III,136. See also separately. -- Note. vyāvaṭa (& a°) only occur in the meaning given above, and not in the sense of “covered, obstructed” [wrongly fr. vṛ] as given by Childers. Correct the trslⁿ given under byāvaṭa accordingly! (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyāviddha: {'def': '(adj.) [vi+āviddha] whirling about, flitting (here & there), moving about, pell-mell J.VI,530. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyāyika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vyaya] belonging to decay; only neg. a° not decaying, imperishable A.II,51; J.V,508. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyāyāma: {'def': '=vāyāma DhsA.146. (Page 654)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vyūha: {'def': '[fr. vi+vah; see byūha] 1. heap, mass; massing or array, grouping of troops S.V,369 (sambādha° a dense crowd, or massed with troops (?); in phrase iddha phīta etc., as given under bāhujañña); J.II,406 (battle array: paduma°, cakka°, sakaṭa°). -- 2. a side street (?), in sandhibbūha J.VI,276. See also byūha. (Page 655)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】排列，军队的配列。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】排列，军队的配列。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vyūhati: {'def': 'at VvA.104 is not clear (see byūhati). It looks more like a present tense to viyūḷha in sense “to be bulky,” than a denom. fr. vyūha as “stand in array.” For the regular verb vi+vah see viyūhati. Cp. paṭi° & saṁyūhati. (Page 655)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vā: {'def': '(indecl.) [Ved. vā, Av. vā, Gr. h)/, Lat. --ve] part. of disjunction: “or”; always enclitic Kh VIII, (itthiyā purisassa vā; mātari pitari vā pi). Usually repeated vā -- vā (is it so --) or, either -- or, e. g. Sn.1024 (Brahmā vā Indo vā pi); Dh.1 (bhāsati vā karoti vā); PvA.74 (putto vā dhītā vā natthi?). -- with negation in second place: whether -- or not, or not, e. g. hoti vā no vā is there or is there not D.I,61; taṁ patthehi vā mā vā VvA.226. -- Combined with other emphatic particles: (na) vā pana not even Pv.II,6⁹ (manussena amanussena vā pana); vā pi or even Sn.382 (ye vā pi ca); Pv.II,6¹⁴ (isayo vā pi ye santā etc.); iti vā Nd² 420; atha vā Dh.83 (sukhena atha vā dukhena); uda . . . vā Sn.232 (kāyena vācā uda cetasā vā). -- In verse vā is sometimes shortened to va, e. g. devo va Brahmā vā Sn.1024: see va⁴. (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(选择关系连词), 或，只能二选一的(or, either)。vā…vā﹐或…或。vā属「后置语」，「A或B」要说「A vā B vā」或者「A B vā」，但若A(或B)由多个语词构成时，则vā要放在「首语之后」。例如「A1 vā A2 A3 」。「B1 vā B2」，即B = B1 B2 的情况，如：appiyā vā dāyadā=(不肖的)怨嗣。with negation in second place: whether -- or not, or not, e. g. hoti vā no vā is there or is there not D I.61; taṁ patthehi vā mā vā VvA 226. -- Combined with other emphatic particles: (na) vā pana not even Pv II.69 (manussena amanussena vā pana); vā pi or even Sn 382 (ye vā pi ca); Pv II.614 (isayo vā pi ye santā etc.); iti vā Nd2 420; atha vā Dh 83 (sukhena atha vā dukhena); uda . . . vā Sn. 232 (kāyena vācā uda cetasā vā). -- In verse vā is sometimes shortened to va, e. g. devo va Brahmā vā Sn 1024: see va4.。vā=va, 在偈中(如︰devo va Brahmā vā Sn.1024.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(选择关系连词), 或，只能二选一的。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vācaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vācā] reciting, speaking, expressing SnA 164 (lekha°); sotthi° an utterer of blessings, a herald Miln.359. -- f. °ikā speech Sdhp.55. (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】背诵者，教者(reciting, speaking, expressing)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】教者，背诵者。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vācana: {'def': '【中】朗诵，阅读。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】朗诵，阅读。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vācanaka: {'def': '【中】朗诵的典礼或地方。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vāceti] talk, recitation, disputation; invitation (?), in brāhmaṇa° J.I,318 (karoti); III,171; IV,391 (karoti); regarded as a kind of festival. At J.III,238 vācanaka is used by itself (two brahmins receiving it). It refers to the treating of brāhmaṇas (br. teachers) on special occasions (on behalf of their pupils: a sort of farewell-dinner?). -- It is not quite sure how we have to interpret vācanaka. Under brāhmaṇa (cpds.) we have trsl^d it as “elocution show” (cp. our “speech day”). The E. trslⁿ gives “brahmin feast”; Prof. Dutoit “Brahmanen-backwerk” (i. e. special cakes for br.). vācana may be a distortion of vājana, although the latter is never found as v. l. It is at all events a singular expression. BR give vācanaka as a(/pac legomέnon in meaning of “sweetmeat,” with the only ref. Hārāvalī 152 (Calc. ed.), where it is expl^d as “prahelaka” (see P. paheṇaka). On the subject see also Fick, Soc. Glied. 137, 205. (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】朗诵的典礼或地方。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vācanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. vāceti] recitation, reading; °magga way of recitation, help for reading, division of text (into chapters or paragraphs) Tikp 239; KhA 12, 14, 24. (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vācanāmagga: {'def': '【阳】朗诵或传统的方法。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】朗诵或传统的方法。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vācapeyya: {'def': '(1) amiable speech (vācā+peyya=piya) J.VI,575 (=piyavacana C.). -- (2) spelling for vājapeyya (q. v.). (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vācasika: {'def': '【形】与讲话有关连的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】与讲话有关连的。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vācā] connected with speech, verbal (contrasted with kāyika & cetasika) Vin.IV,2; Pug.21; Miln.91; Vism.18; DhsA.324. -- As nt. noun at Miln.352 in meaning “behaviour in speech.” (Page 607)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vācetar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. vāceti] one who teaches or instructs D.I,123. (Page 607)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāceti: {'def': '(vac+e), 读，教，背诵。【过】vācesi。【过分】vācita。【现分】vācenta。【义】vācetabba。【独】vācetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vac + e), 读，教，背诵。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 vācita。【现分】 ~centa。【潜】 vācetabba。【独】 vācetvā。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of vac] to make speak or recite, to teach: see vatti. -- pp. vācita. (Page 607)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vācetu: {'def': '【阳】读者，教者。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】读者，教者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vācuggata: {'def': '【形】记住的。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】记住的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vācā: {'def': '(f.) [vac, vakti & vivakti; cp. vacaḥ (P. vaco); Vedic vāk (vāc°) voice, word, vākya; Av. vacah & vaxs word; Gr. e)/pos word, o)/y voice, Lat. vox=voice, voco to call; Ohg. gi-wahan to mention etc. The P. form vācā is a remodelling of the Nom. vāc after the oblique cases, thus transforming it from the cons. decl. to a vowel (°ā) decl. Of the old inflexion we only find the Instr. vācā Sn.130, 232. The compⁿ forms are both vācā° and vacī°] word, saying, speech; also as adj. (-°) vaca speaking, of such a speech (e. g. duṭṭha° Pv.I,3², so to be read for dukkha°). -- D.III,69 sq., 96 sq., 171 sq.; S.IV,132 (in triad kāyena vācāya manasā: see kāya III,, and mano II.3); Sn.232 (kāyena vācā uda cetasā vā), 397, 451 sq., 660, 973, 1061 (=vacana Nd² 560); Nd¹ 504; DhsA.324 (vuccatī ti vācā). -- In sequence vācā girā byappatha vacībheda vācasikā viññatti, as a defⁿ of speech Vin.IV,2, expl^d at DhsA.324: see byappatha. -- vācaṁ bhindati: (1) to modify the speech or expression SnA 216 (cp. vākya-bheda DhsA.324). -- (2) to use a word, so say something Vin.I,157; M.I,207 (Neumann, “das Schweigen brechen”); Miln.231 (i. e. to break silence? So Rh. D. trslⁿ). Cp. the English expression “to break the news.” -- vācā is mostly applied with some moral characterization, as the foll., frequently found: atthasaṁhitā A.III,244; kalyāṇa° A.III,195, 261; IV,296; V,155; pisuṇā & pharusā A.I,128, 174, 268 sq.; III,433; IV,247 sq.; DA.I,74, 75; Nd¹ 220, and passim; rakkhita° S.IV,112; vikiṇṇa° S.I,61, 204; A.I,70; III,199, 391 sq.; sacca° A.II,141, 228; saṇhā A.II,141, 228; III,244; IV,172; see also vacī-sucarita; sammā° Vbh.105, 106, 235; VbhA.119; see also magga; hīnā etc. S.II,54.

--ânurakkhin guarding one’s speech Dh.281 (cp. vācāya saṁvara DhA.IV,86). --âbhilāpa “speechjabbering,” forbidden talk Sn.49 (i. e. the 32 tiracchānakathā Nd² 561). --uggata with well intoned speech Miln.10. --yata restrained in speech Sn.850 (=yatta gutta rakkhita Nd¹ 221). --vikkhepa confusion of speech, equivocation D.I,24 sq.; DA.I,115. (Page 607)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】话，演讲，敍述。vācānurakkhī,【形】小心自己的言谈的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】话，演讲，叙述。 ~nurakkhī, 【形】小心自己的言谈的。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vācāla: {'def': '【形】饶舌的，喜欢说话的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】饶舌的，喜欢说话的。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vāda: {'def': '(‹vad: see vadati; Vedic vāda),【阳】理论，敍述，教条论争。vādakāma,【形】渴望争论的。vādakkhitta,【形】推翻争论的。vādapatha,【阳】争论的话题。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】理论，叙述，教条论争。 ~kāma, 【形】渴望争论的。 ~kkhitta,【形】推翻争论的。 ~patha, 【阳】争论的话题。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. vad: see vadati; Vedic vāda (not in RV!), in meaning of “theory, disputation” only in Class. Sk. ‹-› The relation of roots vac: vad is like E. speak: say; but vāda as t. t. has developed quite distinctly the specified meaning of an emphatic or formulated speech= assertion or doctrine] 1.speaking, speech, talk, nearly always --°, e. g. iti° hearsay, general talk M. I.133; S.V,73; A.II,26; kumāraka° child-talk or childish talk, i. e. in the manner of talking to a child S.II,218 sq.; cori° deceitful talk PvA.89 (so read with v. l. for T. bheri°); dhammika° righteous speech A.V,230; musā° telling lies, false speech A.I,129; II,141; IV,401; PvA.15. See under musā. -- adj. (--°) speaking up for, proclaiming, advertising D.I,174 (sīla°, paññā° etc.); Sn.913 (nivissa° dogmatist); A.I,287 (kamma°, kiriya°, viriya°). -- vādaṁ bhindati to refute a speech, to make a view discrepant (cp. bhinna-vāda under 4!) SnA 45 (Māravādaṁ bh.). -- 2. what is said, reputation, attribute, characteristic Sn.859 (but SnA 550=nindā-vacana); J.I,2 (jāti° genealogy, cp. D.I,137). See also cpd. °patha. -- 3. discussion, disputation, argument, controversy, dispute Sn.390, 827 (also as adj. hīna°); DhA.III,390= Vin.IV,1; Mhvs 4, 42 (sutvā ubhinnaṁ vādaṁ). -- 4. doctrine, theory put forth, creed, belief, school, sect SnA 539 sq.; in cpds.: ācariya° traditional teaching Miln.148; also “heterodoxy” Mhbv 96, cp. Dpvs.V,30; uccheda° annihilistic doctrine Nd¹ 282: see under uccheda; thera° the tradition of the Theras, i. e. the orthodox doctrine or word of Gotama Buddha Mhvs 5, 2; 33, 97 sq.; Dpvs.V,10, 14 (theravādo aggavādo ti vuccati), 51 (17 heretical sects, one orthodox, altogether 18 schools); dhuta° (adj.) expounding punctiliousness Vism.81 (=aññe dhutaṅgena ovadati anusāsati). See under dhuta; bhinna° heretical sect (lit. discrepant talk or view) Dpvs.V,39, 51 (opp. abhinnaka vāda); sassata° an eternalist Ps.I,155.

--ânuvāda the trslⁿ of this phrase (used as adj.) at S.III,6 (see K.S.III,7) is “one who is of his way of thinking.” all kinds of sectarian doctrines or doctrinal theses D.I,161; III,115; S.III,6; IV,51, 340, 381; V,7; A.III,4; Nett 52. --kāma desirous of disputation Sn.825. --khitta upset in disputation, thrown out of his belief Vin.IV,1=DhA.III,390. --patha “way of speech,” i. e. signs of recognition, attribute, definition Sn.1076 (expl^d dogmatically at Nd² 563); A.II,9. --sattha the science of disputation, true doctrine SnA 540. --sīla having the habit of, or used, to disputes Sn.381. (Page 608)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vādaka: {'def': '【阳】学说的，宗派主义者，异教的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】学说的，宗派主义者，异教的。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. vāda] doctrinal, sectarian, heretical; vagga° (either vagga¹ or vagga²) professing somebody’s party, sectarian, schismatic Vin.III,175 (anu-vattaka+); vādaka-sammuti doctrinal (sectarian) statement A.IV,347. (Page 608)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vādana: {'def': '【中】演奏乐器。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vādeti] playing on a musical instrument, music VvA.276. (Page 608)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】演奏乐器。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vādeti: {'def': '(vad+e), 演奏(乐器)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vad + e), 演奏（乐器）。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vādika: {'def': '² [?] a species of bird J.VI,538 (v. l. vāj°). (Page 608)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) (--°) [fr. vāda] speaking, talking (of) Mhvs 5, 60 (pāra° speaking of the farther shore, i. e. wishing him across the sea). (Page 608)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vādin: {'def': '(adj.) (--°) [fr. vāda] speaking (of), saying, asserting, talking; professing, holding a view or doctrine; arguing. Abs. only at A.II,138 (cattāro vādī four kinds of disputants); Sn.382 (ye vā pi c’aññe vādino professing their view). Otherwise --°, e. g. in agga° “teacher of things supreme” Th.1, 1142; uccheda° professing the doctrine of annihilation Nett 111 (see uccheda); kāla°, bhūta° attha° etc. speaking in time, the truth & good etc. D.I,4, 165; A.I,202; V, 205, 265, 328; caṇḍāla° uttering the word C. Mhvs 5, 60; tathā° speaking thus, consistent or true speaker D.III,135; Sn.430; dhamma° professing the true doctrine S.III,138; in combⁿ with vinaya-vādin as much as “orthodox” Vin.III,175; mahā° a great doctrinaire or scholar SnA 540; yatha° cp. tathā°-; sacca° speaking the truth A.II,212; the Buddha so-called Th.II,252 f.; vaṇṇa° singing the praises (of) Vin.II,197. (Page 608)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vādita: {'def': '(nt.) [pp. of vādeti] (instrumental) music D.I,6; III,183; A.I,212; II,209; DhA.IV,75; DA.I,77. (Page 608)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】音乐。【过分】已演奏。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】演奏。【过分】已演奏。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāditar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. vādeti] a speaker, one who professes or has a doctrine D.III,232; A.II,246; IV,307. (Page 608)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vādī: {'def': '【阳】争论者，传道某些教义者，谈及。 ~vara, 【阳】持概念中的最高贵者。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】争论者，传道某些教义者，谈及。vādīvara,【阳】持概念中的最高贵者。sakavādī, 自说(在《论事》中指「上座部」(巴Theravāda，梵Sthavīra-vādin)。paravādī, 他说(在《论事》中指其他派系。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāgamā: {'def': 'at Mhvs 19, 28 (tadahe v. rājā) is to be read (tadah’ev) āgamā, i. e. came on the same day. The passage is corrupt: see trslⁿ p. 130. (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāgura: {'def': '& °ā (f.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vāgurā; to Idg. *ǔeg to weave, as in Lat. velum sail, Ags. wecca=E. wick; Ohg. waba=Ger. wabe] a net; as °a J.VI,170; KhA 47 (sūkara°); ThA.78; as °ā J.VI,582. Another P. form is vākarā. (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāgurika: {'def': '【阳】用网捕捉动物的猎人。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】用网捕捉动物的猎人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāha: {'def': '【形】 1. 运送的，领先的。【阳】 2. 领袖，3. 手推车，4. 一满车（的装货量，即： 380 陀那〔见 Doṇa〕）。 5. 负荷的畜牲。 6. 急流。 ~ka, 【阳】负担者，拿走的人，通向，涌流。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】1.运送的，领先的。2.领袖。【阳】，3.手推车，4.一满车(的装货量，即：380 陀那〔见 Doṇa〕)。5.负荷的畜牲。6.急流。satthavāha, 商队领导人(a caravan leader, merchant)。vāhanaka =vāha (VvA.337.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. vah] 1. carrying, leading; a leader, as in sattha° a caravan leader, merchant J.I,271; Vv 84⁷; 84²⁰; VvA.337. -- 2. a cart, vehicle; also cartload Sn.p. 126 (tila°=tila-sakaṭa SnA 476); J.IV,236 (saṭṭhi°sahassāni 60,000 cartloads); Miln.80 (°sataṁ). (Page 611)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāhaka: {'def': '[fr. vāheti] that which carries (or causes to carry) away, i. e. a current, torrent, flow; only in combⁿ with udaka° a flood of water A.I,178; Vin.I,32; Miln.176. (Page 611)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】负担者，拿走的人，通向，涌流。udakavāhaka, 水流(a flood of water)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāhana: {'def': '【中】交通工具。(p284)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(fr. vāheti),【形】1.携带，拖(carrying, pulling, drawing)。【中】2.运送，兽驮(conveyance, beast of burden, monture)。balavāhana, 军队与象(army & elephants)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. vāheti] 1. (adj.) carrying, pulling, drawing Vin.II,122 (udaka°-rajju); J.I,136 (kaṭṭha° gathering fire-wood); PvA.127 (ratha-yuga°). -- 2. (nt.) conveyance, beast of burden, monture Vin.I,277 (°āgāra stable, garage); Sn.442 (Māra sa° with his elephant); Pv.II,9²⁶; DhA.I,192 (hatthi°, elephant-mount; cp. p. 196, where five. vāhanāni, belonging to King Pajjota, are enum^d, viz. kaṇeru, dāsa, dve assā, hatthi). -- bala° army & elephants, i. e. army in general, forces J.I,262. (Page 611)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāhanaka: {'def': '=vāha 1; VvA.337. (Page 611)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāhasā: {'def': '【无】由于，凭藉，因为。(p284)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(an Instr. of vāha),【无】由於，凭藉，因为(owing to, by dint of, on account of, through)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [an Instr. of vāha, formed after the manner of balasā, thāmasā, used adverbially] owing to, by dint of, on account of, through Vin.IV,158; Th.1, 218, 1127; Miln.379; VvA.100. (Page 611)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāheti: {'def': 'is Caus. of vahati (q. v.). (Page 611)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vah + e), 传达，导向。(p284)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vah+e；Caus. of vahati), 传达，导向。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāhin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. vāha] carrying, conveying J.VI,125 (haya° running by means of horses, i. e. drawn by horses); also as poetical expression for “horse” J.VI,252 (=sindhava C.). The reading vāhin at Mhvs 22, 52 is given as v. l. for T. vājin in P.T.S. ed. -- f. vāhinī, an army J.III,77 (miga°; expl^d as “aneka-sahassa-saṅkhā migasenā”); VI,581. (Page 611)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. vāha),【形】运送的，传达的，导向的(carrying, conveying)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāhinī: {'def': '【阴】军队。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】 1. 军队。 2. 河。(p284)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vāhī: {'def': '【形】运送的，传达的，导向的。(p284)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vāja: {'def': '[cp. Vedic vāja strength; Idg. *ǔeĝ, cp. vājeti, vajra (P. vajira); Lat. vegeo to be alert [“vegetation”], vigeo to be strong [“vigour”]; Av. vaƶra; Oicel. wakr=Ags. wacor=Ger. wacker; E. wake, etc.] 1. strength, a strength-giving drink, Soma SnA 322. ‹-› 2. the feather of an arrow J.IV,260; V,130. (Page 607)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】箭羽，一种生力饮料(肉珊瑚的乳液；见 Pāṭalī)。vājapeyya,【中】苏摩祭(祭祀肉珊瑚的乳液生力饮料)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】箭羽，一种生力饮料（肉珊瑚的乳液；见 Pāṭalī）。 ~peyya, 【中】苏摩祭（祭祀肉珊瑚的乳液生力饮料）。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vājapeyya: {'def': '[cp. Vedic vājapeya; see Macdonell, Vedic Mythology pp. 131 sq., 155, quoting Weber, Vājapeya; Banerjea, Public Administration etc. 92] the vājapeya sacrifice, a soma offering. Spelling often vāca° (mostly as v. l.); see S.I,76; A.II,42; IV,151; Sn.303; It.21; Miln.219; J.III,518. Cp. peyya². (Page 607)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vājin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. vāja] possessed of strength or swiftness; a horse, stallion Dāvs.I,31; V,35 (sita°), 53 (sasi-paṇḍara°); VvA.278. (Page 607)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vājita: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of vājeti: see vāja] feathered (of an arrow) M.I,429. (Page 607)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vājī: {'def': '【阳】马。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】马。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vāk: {'def': '(°-) [Vedic vāc, for which the usual P. form is vācā] speech, voice, talk; only in cpd. °karaṇa talk, speaking, conversation, as kālyāṇa-vāk-karaṇa good speech A.II,97; III,195, 261; IV,296 sq.; 328; V,155; abstr. °ta A.I,38. Cp. vākya. (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāka: {'def': '【中】树皮(用来做衣服)(the bark of a tree)。vākacīra,【中】树皮衣。vākamaya,【形】树皮条制的。vākavāka, 没有树皮。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】树皮条（用来做衣服）。 ~cīra, 【中】树皮衣。 ~maya, 【形】树皮条制的。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [late Sk. valka, cp. P. vakka] the bark of a tree D.I,167; Vin.III,34; J.I,304; II,141; Vism.249=VbhA.232 (akka° & makaci°); Miln.128. -- avāka without bark J.III,522.

--cīra (=cīvara) a bark garment worn by an ascetic Vin.III,34; A.I,240, 295; J.I,8, 304; V,132; Pug.55. --maya made of bark Vin.II,130. (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vākarā: {'def': '=vāgulā; net, snare M.I,153 (daṇḍa°, Dvandva); II,65. -- As vākara at J.III,541; as vākura at Th.1, 774. (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Vāgurā,【阴】捕捉鹿的网(net, snare)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'vāgurā, 【阴】捕捉鹿的网。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vākkaraṇa: {'def': '【中】交谈。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】交谈。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vākya: {'def': '【中】句子，敍述。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】句子，叙述。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vac: see vāk & vācā; Vedic vākya] saying, speech, sentence, usually found in poetry only, e. g. D.II,166 (suṇantu bhonto mama eka-vākyaṁ); A.II,34 (sutvā arahato vākyaṁ); III,40 (katvāna vākyaṁ Asitassa tādino); Sn.1102 (=vacana Nd² 559); J.IV,5; V,78; Ap 25; KhA 166 (°opādāna resumption of the sentence); DhsA.324 (°bheda “significant sentence” trslⁿ). (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāla: {'def': '² (adj.) [cp. Sk. vyāla] malicious, troublesome, difficult Vin.II,299 (adhikaraṇa). (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '3(=vāri, cp. late Sk. Vāla),【中】水(only in cpd. vālaja a fish (cp. vārija))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2 (cp. Sk. Vyāla),【形】(malicious, troublesome, difficult )。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】尾毛。【形】凶猛的，怀恶意的。 ~kambala, 【中】以马毛制的被单。 ~gga, 【中】头端。 ~ṇḍupaka, 【阳、中】以马尾制的刷子。~vījanī, 【阴】拂尘（驱除蚊蝇的用具，柄端扎牦牛尾）。 ~miga, 【阳】捕鹿野兽（即：虎、豹等）。 ~vedhī, 【阳】能射中一根头发的弓箭手。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [Vedic vāla; connected with Lat. adūlāre (ad+ ūlāre) to flatter (lit. wag the tail, like a dog), cp. E. adulation; Lith. valaī horse hair] 1. the hair of the tail, horse-hair, tail Vin.II,195=J.V,335 (pahaṭṭha-kaṇṇavāla with bristling ears & tail, of an elephant); J.V,274 (so read for phāla, cp. p. 268, V, 113); PvA.285 (°koṭi, so read for bāla°); Sdhp.139. --pallaṅkassa vāle bhinditvā destroying the hair (-stuffing) of a couch Vin.II,170=DA.I,88; cp. Vin.IV,299: pallaṅko āharimehi vālehi kato. -- On v. in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 136. -- 2. a hair-sieve [also Vedic] M.I,229.

--agga the tip of a hair A.III,403; Miln.250 (°vedha hitting the tip of a hair, of an archer); DA.I,66. --aṇḍupaka a cert. material, head dress (?) A.I,209 (so read for vālanduka); Vism.142; DhsA.115 (reads leḍḍūpaka). --kambala a blanket made of horse-tails D.I,167; A.I,240, 296; Pug.55. --koṭi the tip of the hair PvA.285. --rajju a cord made of hair S.II,238; A.IV,129; J.II,161. --vījanī a fan made of a Yak’s tail, a chowrie D.I,7. --vedhin (an archer) who can hit a hair J.I,58 (akkhaṇa-vedhin+); Vism.150; Mhvs 23, 86 (sadda-vedhin vijju-vedhin+). The abstr. °vedhā hitting a hair, at Vism.150. -- fig. an acute arguer, a hair-splitter; in standing phrase paṇḍitā nipuṇā kata-para-ppavādā vālavedhi-rūpā at D.I,26; M.I,176; II,122; see explⁿ at DA.I,117. (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '³ (nt.) [=vāri, cp. late Sk. vāla] water; only in cpd. °ja a fish (cp. vārija). (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1﹐Vāḷa﹐【阳】1.尾毛。2.毛筛。3.野兽。【形】凶猛的，怀恶意的。vālakambala,【中】以马毛制的被单。vālagga,【中】发端。vālaṇḍupaka,【阳】【中】以马尾制的刷子。vālabījanī, vālavījanī,【阴】拂尘(犁牛尾作的，驱除蚊蝇的用具)。vālamiga,【阳】捕鹿野兽(即：虎、豹等)。vālavedhī,【阳】能射中一根头发的弓箭手(an archer)。vāḷakathā﹐【阴】凶的话。aṇḍupaka a cert. material, head dress (?) A I,209 (so read for vālanduka); Vism.142; DhsA 115 (reads leḍḍūpaka). vālakambala, 马尾做的毛毯(a blanket, made of horse-tails)。vālakoṭi,发端。vālarajju, 一撮头发(a cord made of hair)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāladhi: {'def': '【阳】尾。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】尾。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. vāladhi] a tail (usually of a large animal) Th.1, 695; J.I,63, 149; VI,302; Pv.I,8³; Mhvs 10, 59; VvA.252, Sdhp.621; Vism.36 quoting Ap. (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vālatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. vāla²] trouble, difficulty Vin.II,86 (in same context as vāla²); A.I,54. (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vālikā: {'def': 'vālukā, 【阴】沙。 ~kantāra, 【阳】沙漠。 ~puñja, 【阳】沙堆。~pulina, 【中】沙滩。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'vālukā,【阴】沙。vālikantāra,【阳】沙漠。vālikapuñja,【阳】沙堆。vālikapulina,【中】沙滩。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [a by-form of vālukā] sand (often sprinkled in connection with festivities to make the place look neat) A.I,253; J.I,210; III,52, 407; VI,64; Vism.420; DhA.I,3, 111; VvA.160, 305; PvA.189. -- paritta° sand (on the head) as an amulet J.I,396, 399. -- In cpds. usually vālika°. Cp. vālukā.

--puñja a heap of sand J.VI,560. --pulina sand bed or bank J.II,366; III,389. --vassa a shower of sand SnA 224. (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vālin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vāla¹] having a hairy tail Vv 64⁷, cp. VvA.277. (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vālukantāra: {'def': 'at VvA.332 probably for vāluka-kantāra, i. e. sandy desert. See vaṇṇu. (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vālukā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic & Epic Sk. vālukā] sand. In compⁿ usually vāluka°. -- S.IV,376; Vv 39¹; 44¹; Ap. 23; Nd² p. 72 (Gaṅgāya v.); J.II,258; IV,16; Pv.II,12¹; Mhvs 23, 86; DhA.III,243, 445; VvA.31, 177; Sdhp.244. See also vālika. (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāma: {'def': '【形】左(left, the left side)( 【反】dakkhiṇa,右)，愉快的。vāmapassa,【中】左边。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】左，愉快的。 ~passa, 【中】左边。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic vāma] 1. left, the left side (always opposed to dakkhiṇa) J.IV,407 (°akkhi); Pv IV.7⁸; Miln.295 (°gāhin left-handed); PvA.178 (°passa left side). As “northern” at J.V,416. vāmaṁ karoti to upset J.IV,101. -- Instr. vāmena on the left Sn.p. 80. ‹-› Abl. vāmato from or on the left J.III,340; Pv.II,3²⁰ (as much as “reverse”; PvA.87=vilomato). -- 2. beautiful; only in cpd. vām-ūru having beautiful thighs D.II,266; J.II,443. So read at both places for vāmuru. (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāmana: {'def': 'vāmanaka, 【阳】矮子。【形】像侏儒的。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vāma¹, cp. Ger. linkisch=uncouth] dwarfish; m. dwarf Vin.I,91; DA.I,148. (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'vāmanaka,【阳】矮子(dwarf)。【形】像侏儒的(dwarfish)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāmanaka: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. vāmana] dwarfish, crippled J.II,226; IV,137; V,424, 427. -- f. °ikā N. of certain elephants M.I,178. (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāna: {'def': '¹ (nt.) [fr. vā²: see vāyati¹] sewing, stuffing (of a couch) DA.I,86; DhA.I,234 (mañca°). (Page 608)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】渴望，床的网(印度床)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (nt.) [fr. vana, both in meaning 1 & 2 but lit. meaning overshadowed by fig.] lit. “jungle” (cp. vana¹ etym.), fig. desire, lust (=taṇhā craving) DhsA.409; KhA 151, 152. (Page 608)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】渴望，床的网（印度床）。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vānara: {'def': '【阳】猴子。 ~rī, 【阴】母猴。 ~rinda, 【阳】猴王。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹vā或+nara人；PED说‹vana(forester)),【阳】猴子。vānarī,【阴】母猴。vānarinda,【阳】猴王。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. vana] monkey, lit. “forester” Th.1, 399= Dh.334; Th.1, 454; J.II,78 (Senaka), 199 sq. (Nandiya); III,429; IV,308; V,445; Miln.201; DhA.II,22.

--inda monkey king J.I,279; II,159. (Page 608)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vānaya: {'def': 'in combⁿ suvānaya (S.I,124, 238) is to be separated su-v-ānaya (see ānaya). (Page 608)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāpeti: {'def': '[Caus. fr. vap, representing vapati¹ as well as vapati²] to cause to sow [cp. Divy 213 vāpayituṁ] or to mow. -- pp. vāpita. (Page 608)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(caus. fr. vap)﹐使播种(to cause to sow)。刈草(to mow)。【过分】vāpita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāpi: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Epic & Classic Sk. vāpī] a pond; °jala water from a pond Mhvs 25, 66. (Page 608)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Epic & Classic Sk. vāpī),【阴】池、水库(a pond)。vāpijala,池水。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】水箱，水库。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vāpita: {'def': '【过分】已播种。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of vāpeti] sown J.I,6 (+ropita, of dhañña). (Page 608)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1,【过分】1.已播种(sown)。2.已刈草(mown，DhsA.238)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāra: {'def': '[fr. vṛ, in meaning “turn,” cp. vuṇāti] 1. turn, occasion, time, opportunity J.I,58 (utu-vārena utuvārena according to the turn of the seasons), 150; VI,294; Vism.431 (santati° interval); DA.I,36; DhA.I,47 (dve vāre twice); DhsA.215; VvA.47 (tatiyavāraṁ for the 3^rd & last time); PvA.109, 135. -- 2. In pada° “track-occasion,” i. e. foot-track, walk(ing), step J.I,62, 213 (°vārena) by walking (here spelt pāda°), 506 (pādavāre pādavāre at every step). -- 3. In udaka° v. stands for vāraka (i. e. bucket), the phrase udakavāraṁ gacchati means “to go for water,” to fetch water (in a bucket) J.IV,492; DhA.I,49. Dutoit (J. trslⁿ IV.594) trsl^s “Wunsch nach Wasser.” -- 4. bhāṇa° “turn for recitation,” i. e. a portion for recital, a chapter SnA 194. See bhāṇa. (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹vr, in meaning “turn,” cp. vuṇāti),【阳】(一)回，场合，机会(turn, occasion, time, opportunity)。sassavāre ,在(播种)农作物的时机。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】（一）回，场合，机会。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vāraka: {'def': '【阳】广口瓶。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. vāra & vāraka] a pot, jar Vin.II,122 (three kinds: loha°, dāru° and cammakhaṇḍa°); J.I,349; II,70; III,52 (dadhi°); Miln.260; DhsA.377 (phānita°). (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】广口瓶。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vārattika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. varatta] consisting of leather or a strap J.III,185. (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāraṇa: {'def': '【阳】象，（喙像象鼻的）秃鹫。【中】防止，障碍，抵抗。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '³ [for vāruṇī?] spirituous liquor J.V,505. (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [cp. Vedic vāraṇa strong] 1. elephant J.I,358; IV,137; V,50, 416; DA.I,275; DhA.I,389 (°līḷhā elephant’s grace); VvA.36, 257. -- 2. the Hatthilinga bird Th.1, 1064. (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】象，(喙像象鼻的)秃鹫(eagle)。【中】防止，障碍，抵抗。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [fr. vṛ to obstruct] warding off, obstruction, resistance VbhA.194, 195 (=nivāraṇa). -- ātapa° sunshade Dāvs.I,28; V,35. (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāraṇika: {'def': 'at Th.1, 1129 read cāraṇika (a little play): see Brethren 419 note. (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāreti: {'def': '[Caus. of vuṇāti, representing vṛ¹ (to enclose, obstruct), as well as vṛ¹ (to choose)] 1. to prevent, obstruct, hinder Pv.II,7⁷ (vārayissaṁ I had the habit of obstructing;=nivāresiṁ PvA.102); VvA.68; Sdhp.364. -- 2. to ask in marriage ThA.266; PvA.55. -- Caus. II. vārāpeti to induce somebody to choose a wife J.IV, 289. -- Note. vāriyamāna (kālakaṇṇi-salākā) at J.IV,2 read cār° (cp. PvA.272 vicāresuṁ id.). -- pp. vārita. (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(var + e), 避免，阻隔，阻碍。【过】 vāresi。【现分】 vārenta, vārayamāna。【潜】 vāretabba。【独】 vāretvā。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(var +e), 避免，阻隔，阻碍。【过】vāresi。【现分】vārenta, vā-rayamāna。【义】vāretabba。【独】vāretvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāreyya: {'def': '(nt.) [grd. of vāreti] marriage, wedding Th.2, 464, 472, 479; SnA 19. (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāri: {'def': '【中】水。 ~gocara, 【形】活在水中的。 ~ja, 【形】生在水中的。【阳】鱼。【中】睡莲。 ~da, ~dhara, ~vāha, 【阳】雨云。 ~magga, 【阳】排水沟，水管。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic vāri, cp. Av. vār rain, vairi- sea; Lat. ūrīna=urine; Ags. waer sea; Oicel. ūr spray, etc.] water D.II,266; M.III,300; A.III,26 (in lotus simile); Th.1, 1273; Sn.353, 591, 625, 811; Vv 79¹⁰; J.IV,19; Nd¹ 135, 203 (=udaka); Miln.121; PvA.77.

--gocara living or life (lit. feeding) in water Sn.605. --ja “water-born,” i. e. (1) a lotus Sn.845, cp. Nd¹ 203; -- (2) a fish Dh.34 (=maccha DhA.I,289); J.V,464 (=Ānanda-maccha C.), 507. --da “water-giver,” i. e. cloud Dāvs III,40. --dhara water-holder, water jug J.V,4. --bindu a drop of water Sn.392. --vāha “watercarrier,” i. e. cloud A.II,56; III,53; S.V,400; J.VI,26, 543, 569; Kh VII.8. --vārita, --yuta, --dhuta, --phuṭa (Jain practice) D.I,57; M.I,377. (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】水。vārigocara,【形】活在水中的。vārija,【形】生在水中的。【阳】鱼。【中】睡莲。vārida, vāridhara, vārivāha,【阳】雨云。vārimagga,【阳】排水沟，水管。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vārita: {'def': '(vāreti【过分】)。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vāreti【过分】)避免，阻隔，阻碍。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of vāreti, Caus. of vṛ¹] obstructed, hindered J.IV,264; restrained (sabbavāri) see vāri.

--vata (so read for cārita°) “having the habit of selfdenial” (trslⁿ) S.I,28 (cp. K.S. I.39 & 320 with note & Bdhgh’s explⁿ: “kilesānaṁ pana chinnattā vataṁ phala-samādhinā samāhitaṁ”), cp. bhāvanā-balena vāritattā dhammā etc. at Tikp. 14. (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāritta: {'def': '【中】避免，不应该被做的行为。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】避免，不应该被做的行为。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vṛ, on the analogy of cāritta. The BSk. is vāritra: Mvyut 84] avoidance, abstinence Th.1, 591; Miln.133 (cārittañ ca vārittañ ca); Vism.11. (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāriyamāna: {'def': '【形】被阻碍的，阻隔的，避免的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】被阻碍的，阻隔的，避免的。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vāruṇa: {'def': 'a. m. [＜Varuṇa] グルナの, 水天族.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Vāruṇī: {'def': '【阴】含有酒精成份的酒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. vāruṇī, with only ref. in BR.: Harivaṁśa 8432] 1. spirituous liquor A.III,213; J.I,251 (°vāṇija spirit merchant), 268; VI,502. -- 2. an intoxicated woman; term for a female fortune-teller J.VI,500 (Vāruṇī ‘va pavedhati; C. devatā-bhūta-paviṭṭhā yakkha-dāsī viya gahitā, i. e. possessed), 587 (vāruṇī ‘va pavedhentī; C. yakkh’āviṭṭhā ikkhaṇikā viya). (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】含有酒精成份的酒。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vāsa: {'def': '³ [cp. Class. Sk. vāsa, e. g. Mālatīm. 148, 4; fr. vā: see vāta] perfume J.I,242; VI,42. (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】1.生活，逗留，生活环境。2.衣。3.香水。vāsacuṇṇa,【中】香粉。vāsaṭṭhāna,【中】住宅。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [vas to clothe, see vasati¹] clothing; adj. (-°) clothed in J.VI,47 (hema-kappana-vāsase). (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 生活，逗留，生活环境。 2. 衣。 3. 香水。 ~cuṇṇa, 【中】香粉。 ~ṭṭhāna, 【中】住宅。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [vas to dwell, see vasati²] 1. living, sojourn, life Sn.191; Mhvs 17, 2 (anātha-vāsaṁ vasati to lead a helpless life); PvA.12 (saraagga-vāsaṁ v. live a life of concord); SnA 59 (lokantarika°). Cp. pari°, saṁ°. ‹-› 2. home, house, habitation Sn.40. vāsaṁ kappeti to live (at a place), to make one’s home J.I,242; PvA.47, 100. vāsaṁ upagacchati to enter a habitation (for spending the rainy season) PvA.32. In special sense “bed”: see cpd. °ûpagata. -- 2. state, condition (-°), in ariya° holy state A.V,29 sq.; brahmacariya° chastity PvA.61. -- 4. (adj.) (-°) staying, living, abiding, spending time Sn.19 (ekaratti°), 414 (ettha°). vassa° spending Lent PvA.20; vuttha° having spent Lent J.I,183. Cp. ante-vāsika-vāsa.

--attha home success, luck in the house, prosperity A.II,59, 61 sq. --âgāra bedroom J.III,317. --ûpagata (a) having entered one’s hut or abode (for the rainy season) Sn.415. -- (b) gone to bed Pv.II,12⁸; PvA.280. --ghara living room, bedroom SnA 28 (=kuṭī). --dhura ordinary duty (lit. burden) or responsibility of living, or the elementary stages of saintliness SnA 194, 195 (contrasted to pariyatta-dhura), 306 (: ganthadhura). (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāsaka: {'def': 'vāsika (adj.) (-°) [fr. vāsa²] living, dwelling; vāsaka: see saṁ°. vāsika: gāma° villager Mhvs 28, 15; Bārāṇasi° living in Benares J.III,49. See also ante°. (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāsana: {'def': '【中】洒香水，制造居所。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (adj.-nt.) [=vasana²] dwelling Dpvs.V,18. (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】洒香水，制造居所。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (adj.-nt.) [=vasana¹] clothing, clothed in (-°) PvA.173. (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāsanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. vasati² = vāsa², but by Rh. D., following the P. Com̄. connected with vāseti & vāsa³] that which remains in the mind, tendencies of the past, impression, usually as pubba° former impression (Sn.1009; Miln.10, 263). -- Cp. Nett 4, 21, 48, 128, 133 sq., 153, 158 sq., 189 sq. -- Cp. BSk. vāsanā, e. g. MVastu I.345. (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】印象，回忆。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】印象，回忆。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vāsara: {'def': '[cp. Vedic vāsara matutinal, vasaḥ early] day (opp. night), a day Dāvs.I,55; V,66. (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】（一）天。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】(一)天。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāsati: {'def': '[vāś, see vassati²] to cry (of animals) J.VI,497. (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāsava: {'def': '【阳】天神王。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】天神王。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāseti: {'def': '(vas +e), 建立，使居住，洒香水。【过】vāsesi。【过分】vāsita。【独】vāsetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [denom. fr. vāsa perfume] to perfume, to clean or preserve by means of perfumes, to disinfect (?) Vin.I,211 (here in the sense of “preserve, cure,” probably as vāseti of vasati²); II,120; J.IV,52 (aṭṭhīni, for the sake of preservation); V,33 (saso avāsesi sake sarīre, expl^d as “sake sarīre attano sarīraṁ dātuṁ avāsesi vāsāpesī ti attho, sarīrañ c’assa bhakkh’atthāya adāsi.” In this passage vāseti is by Kern, Toev. s. v. taken as Caus. of vas to eat, thus “he made eat, feasted, entertained by or on his own body”), 321 (kusumehi vāsetvā: perfume). See also vasati² (Caus.). -- pp. vāsita. ‹-› Caus. II. vāsāpeti J.V,33. (Page 611)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ : Caus. of vasati² (q. v.). (Page 611)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vas + e), 建立，使居住，洒香水。【过】 vāsesi。【过分】 vāsita。【独】 vāsetvā。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vāsi: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. vāśī] 1. a sharp knife, axe, hatchet, adze (often comb^d with pharasu) J.I,32, 199; II,274; III,281; IV,344; Miln.383; 413; DhA.I,178 (tikhiṇā vāsiyā khaṇḍâkhaṇḍikaṁ chinditvā: cutting him up piecemeal with a sharp knife); KhA 49. --°jaṭa handle of a mason’s adze Vin.IV,168; S.III,154; A.IV,127. -- 2. a razor J.I,65; II,103; III,186, 377. (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】扁斧，斧头，锋利的小刀。 ~jaṭa, 【中】斧柄。 ~phala, 【中】斧口，刀锋。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】扁斧，斧头，锋利的小刀。vāsijaṭa,【中】斧柄。vāsiphala,【中】斧口，刀锋。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāsika: {'def': 'vāsin,【阳】(在【合】中) 住在…，居在…。【阴】vāsinī。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'vāsī, 【阳】 (在【合】中) 住在…，居在…。【阴】 vāsinī。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vāsin: {'def': '¹ (adj.) (-°) [fr. vas¹] clothed in, clad Sn.456 (saṅghāṭi°), 487 (kāsāya°); Pv III,1⁶ (sāhunda°); J.III,22 (nantaka°); IV,380 (rumma°); f. vāsinī Vin.III,139 (chanda°, paṭa° etc.)= VvA.73. (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (adj.) (-°) [fr. vas²] liking, dwelling (in) Sn.682 (Mern-muddha°), 754 (āruppa°); PvA.1 (Mahāvihāra°), 22 (Aṅga-Magadha°), 47 (Sāvatthi°), 73 (Bārāṇasi°) (Page 611)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāsita: {'def': '[fr. vāseti²] 1. scented J.I,65; II,235 (su°); III,299; V,89; Vism.345. -- 2. [preferably fr. vāseti¹=vasati²] established, made to be or live, preserved Mhvs 8, 2. So also in phrase vāsita-vāsana (adj.) or vāsana-vāsita one who is impressed with (or has retained) a former impression Sn.1009 (pubba°, =vāsanāya vāsita-citta SnA 583); Miln.263 (id.); Vism.185 (+bhāvita-bhāvana). If taken as vāseti², then to be trsl^d as “scented, filled, permeated,” but preferably as vāseti¹. -- Cp. pari°. (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāsitaka: {'def': '【中】香粉。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vāsita] scented, perfumed Vin.IV,341 (vāsitakena piññākena nhāyeyya: should bathe with perfumed soap). -- f. vāsitikā (scil. mattikā) scented clay Vin.II,280 (id.). (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】香粉。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vāsudeva: {'def': '【阳】毗瑟挐（印度教主神之一，守护之神）。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'm. [〃] 世天. -vata 世天務.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '【阳】毘瑟挐(印度教主神之一，守护之神)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāta: {'def': '【阳】风，空气。 ~ghātaka。【阳】鼓捶树（见 Uddālaka）。 ~java,【形】像风一样的迅速。 ~pāna, 【中】窗户。 ~maṇḍalikā, 【阴】旋风。 ~roga, ~ābādha, 【阳】风生病（例：腹部不舒服）。 ~vuṭṭhi,【阴】风和雨。 ~vega, 【阳】风力。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic vāta, of vā; cp. Sk. vāti & vāyati to blow, vāyu wind; Lat. ventus, Goth. winds=wind; Ohg. wājan to blow, Oir. feth air; Gr. a]/hmi to blow, a]ήths wind, Lith. áudra storm etc.] wind. There exists a common distinction of winds into 2 groups: “internal” and “external” winds, or the ajjhattikā vāyo-dhātu (wind category), and the bāhirā. They are discussed at Vbh.84, quoted at MA 30, 31, and expl^d in detail at VbhA.70 sq.; Vism.350. The bāhirā also at Nd² 562, and in poetical form at S.IV,218. -- The internal winds (see below 2) comprise the foll.: uddhaṅgamā vātā, adhogamā, kucchisayā, koṭṭhāsasayā, aṅgam-aṅg’‹-› ânusārino, satthakā, khurakā, uppalakā, assāso, passāso, i. e. all kinds of winds (air) or drawing pains (rheumatic?) in the body, from hiccup, stitch and stomach-ache up to breathing. Their complement are the external winds (see below 1), viz. puratthimā vātā, pacchimā, uttarā, dakkhiṇā (from the 4 quarters of the sky), sarajā arajā, sītā uṇhā, parittā adhimattā, kāḷā, verambha°, pakkha°, supaṇṇa°, tālavanta°, vidhūpana. ° These are characterized according to direction, dust, temperature, force, height & other causes (like fanning etc.). -- 1. wind (of the air) S.IV,218 (vātā ākāse vāyanti); Sn.71, 348, 591 (vāto tūlaṁ va dhaṁsaye), 622, 1074; J.I,72; Pug.32; Vism.31. adhimatta v. S.IV,56; mahā° S.II,88; A.I,136, 205; II,199; IV,312; veramba° (winds blowing in high regions: upari ākāse S.II,231) A.I,137; Th.1, 598; J.VI,326. --2. “winds” of the body, i. e. pains caused by (bad) circulation, sometimes simply (uncontrolled) movements in the body, sometimes rheumatic pains, or sharp & dragging pains in var. parts of the body Nett. 74. Also applied to certain humours, supposed to be caused by derangements of the “winds” of the body (cp. Gr. qumόs; or E. slang “get the wind up”), whereas normal “winds” condition normal health: Pv.II,6¹ (tassa vātā balīyanti: bad winds become strong, i. e. he is losing his senses, cp. PvA.94: ummāda-vātā). -- aṅga° pain in the limbs (or joints), rheumatism Vin.I,205; udara° belly ache J.I,393, 433; DhA.IV,129; kammaja° birth-pains Vism.500; kucchi° pains in the abdomen (stomach) VbhA.5; piṭṭhi° pains in the back ibid. -- 3. (fig.) atmosphere, condition, state; or as pp. (of vāyati) scented (with), full of, pervaded (by), at Vin.I,39 (vijana° pervaded by loneliness, having an atmosphere of loneliness; Kern. Toev. s. v. vāta wrongly “troop, crowd.” The same passage occurs at D.III,38, where Rh. D., Dial. III,35, trsl^s “where the breezes from the pastures blow”; with explⁿ vijana= vṛjana [see vajati], hardly justified. In same connection at A.IV,88); Miln.19 (isi°-parivāta scented with an atmosphere of Sages; Rh. D. differently: “bringing down the breezes from the heights where the Sages dwell”; forced). -- On vāta in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 135.

--ātapa (Dvandva) wind and heat. In this phrase Bdhgh. takes vāta as wind (above 1) at Vism.31 (saraja & araja v.), but as (bodily) pain (above 2) at VbhA.5. See D.III,353; S.II,88; III,54; V,379; A.I,204; II,117, 143, 199; III,394 sq., 404; V,15, 127; Sn.52; J.I,93; Miln.259, 314, 416; DhA.III,112. --ābādha “wind disease,” internal pains (not rheumatism) Vin.I,205; Miln.134; Vism.41. --āyana air hole, window Mhvs 5, 37; Dāva V,57. --āhata struck by the wind Vism.63; DhA.III,328. --erita moved by the wind (of trees) S.V,123; A.III,232; VvA.175. --kkhandha “wind bulk,” mass of wind, region of the wind J.VI,326. --ghāta (“wind-struck”) the tree Cassia (or Cathartocarpus) fistula, a syn. of uddāla(ka) J.IV,298; VvA.197; also as °ka at J.V,199, 407; VvA.43. --java swiftness of the wind J.VI,274. --dhuta shaken by the wind, swaying in the w. Vv 38⁵, cp. VvA.174. --passa the wind side DhA.II,17. --pāna lattice, window Vin.I,209; II,148, 211; A.I,101, 137; IV,231; J.II,325; V,214; VI,349 (read vātapān° for dvārapān°); KhA 54; DhA.I,211, 370; VvA.67; PvA.4, 216, 279. --bhakkha living on air DhA.II,57. --maṇḍala a whirlwind, gust of wind, storm, tornado [cp. BSk. vāyu-maṇḍala at AvŚ I.256 with note] J.I,72; SnA 224. --maṇḍalikā id. Vin.II,113; IV, 345; J.IV,430. --yoga direction of the wind J.II,11. --roga “wind disease,” upset of the body, disturbance of the intestines, colic SnA 69; VvA.185. --vassā (pl.) wind and rain PvA.55. --vuṭṭhi id. SnA 34. --vega force of the wind Sn.1074; PvA.47. --sakuṇa a certain kind of bird (“wind-bird”) Nd¹ 87, where KhA 118 reads bhāsa°. (Page 607)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹vā；Vedic vāta; cp. Sk. vāti & vāyati to blow, vāyu wind),【阳】风，空气。vātaghātaka。【阳】鼓捶树(Cassia Fistula﹐见 Uddālaka)。vātajava,【形】像风一样的迅速。vātapāna,【中】窗户。vātamaṇḍalikā,【阴】旋风。vātaroga, vātābādha(vāta+ābādha),【阳】风生病(例：腹部不舒服。 “wind disease,” internal pains (not rheumatism不是风湿症) )。vātavutthi,【阴】风和雨。vātavega,【阳】风力。身体有六个部分是风界最显著的：1.uddhajgamā vātā, 上行风(打呃、呕吐)。2.adhogamā vātā, 下行风(大小便、放屁)。3.kucchisayā vātā, 肠外风。4.koṭṭhāsayā vātā﹐肠内风。5.aṅgamaṅgānusārino vātā, 支体循环风(身体屈伸、血液循环等)。6.assāsa passāsaso, 入息与出息。assāso, 息入风(吸气)，passāso﹐息出风(呼气)。kaṭivātābādhika(kaṭi腰部+vātābādhika风病) , 胃肠病。udaravātābādha(udara胃+vātābādha), 胃肠病。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vātaka: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. vāta 2] belonging to or connected with the winds (of the body) in ahi-vātaka-roga a cert. (intestinal) disease (lit. “snake-pain”), pestilence, plague; dysentery (caused by a famine and attacking men and beasts alike) DhA.I,169, 187, 231; III,437. (Page 608)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vātehābādhito: {'def': '(vāta风+ehi来+ābādhito已病【过分】)﹐感冒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāterita: {'def': '【形】被风吹动的。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】被风吹动的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāti: {'def': 'see vāyati (in meaning “weave,” as well as “blow”). (Page 608)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vā吹+a), 吹，发出气味。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vā + a), 吹，发出气味。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vātika: {'def': '【形】与体内风有关的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】与体内风有关的。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vāta 2, cp. *Sk. vātakin Halāyudha II.451] connected with the winds (humours) of the body, having bad circulation, suffering from internal trouble, rheumatic (?) Miln.135, 298. (Page 608)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vātiṅgaṇa: {'def': '(cp. *Sk. vātingaṇa),【阳】茄子(the egg plant, brinjal﹐Solanum melongena﹐又名落苏，一种直立、稍带木质、被毛的多年生草本，果可食，紫色、白色、黄色或带条纹，茄子内含维生素 A、B1、B2、C、Ｐ及脂肪、蛋白质；每公斤茄子含维生素Ｐ达7200毫克。维生素Ｐ能增强人体细胞间的粘著力，降低胆固醇，可保持微血管的坚韧性，抑制血管硬化，降低高血压、防止微管破裂、抗癌。美国医学界在「降低胆固醇十二法」中，茄子荣居榜首。)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. *Sk. vātingaṇa] the egg plant, Solanum melongena J.V,131; DhsA.320. (Page 608)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】茄子（一种直立、稍带木质、被毛的多年生草本 (Solanummelongena)，可能原产于东南亚，但已被广泛栽种，通常为一年生，有许多园艺变种，果可食，作蔬菜，紫色、白色、有时黄色或带条纹）。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vātābhihata: {'def': '【形】被风吹动的。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】被风吹动的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vātāhaṭa: {'def': '【形】被风带来的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】被风带来的。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vātātapa: {'def': '【阳】风和热。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】风和热。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vātāyana: {'def': '【中】窗户。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】窗户。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vāvatteti: {'def': '(vi+ā+vṛt] to turn away (trs.), to do away with, remove M.I,12 (aor. vāvattayi saṁyojanaṁ, expl^d at MA 87 as “parivattayi, nimmūlaṁ akāsi”)= 122 (with v. l. vi°, see p. 526); A.II,249 (v. l. vi°). (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāya: {'def': '【阳】【中】(mano-group), 风，空气。参考 Vāyo。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳、中】 (mano-组), 风，空气。参考 Vāyo。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. vā, vāyati¹] weaving PvA.112 (tunna°). See tanta°. (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāyamati: {'def': '(vi + ā + yam + a), 奋斗，努力。【过】 vāyami。【现分】vāyamanta。【独】 ~mitvā。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[vi+ā+yam] to struggle, strive, endeavour; to exert oneself S.IV,308; V,398; A.IV,462 sq. (chandaṁ janeti v. viriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti); Pv IV.5²; Vbh.208 sq.; Pug.51; Vism.2; DhA.III,336; IV,137; PvA.185. (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+ā向+yam检查(cp.梵yam 抵达)+a), 奋斗，努力，付之行动(to struggle, strive, endeavour; to exert oneself)。【过】vāyami。【现分】vāyamanta。【独】vāyamitvā。1chandaṁ janeti 2vāyamati 3vīriyaṁ ārabhati 4cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati(1起欲、2精进、3发奋、4策励心)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāyana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vā, vāyati²] blowing VbhA.71 (upari°vāta). (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】吹风，散布气味。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】吹风，散布气味。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vāyasa: {'def': '【阳】乌鸦。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic vāyasa a large bird, Epic Sk. vāyasa crow] a crow D.I,9 (°vijjā: see DA.I,93); S.I,124; Sn.447, 675; J.I,500; II,440; Miln.373; DhA.III,206; VvA.27. (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】乌鸦(crow)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāyasāri: {'def': '【阳】猫头鹰。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】猫头鹰(owl)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāyati: {'def': '¹ [Vedic vayati, vā, cp. Sk. veman loom, vāṭikā band, Gr. i)/tus willow, Ohg. wīda id.; Lat. vieo to bind or plait] to weave, only in pp. vāyita. -- Pass. viyyati Vin.III,259. pp. also vīta. -- Caus. II. vāyāpeti to cause to be woven Vin.III,259 (=vināpeti); VvA.181. -- See also vināti. (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vā + ya), 1. 吹，发出气味。 2. 编织。【过】 vāyi。【现分】 vāyanta,vāyamāna。【独】 vāyitvā。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [Vedic vāti & vāyati. See etym. under vāta] 1. to blow (only as vāyati) Vin.I,48; D.II,107 (mahāvātā vāyanti); S.IV,218 (vātā ākāse v.); J.I,18; VI,530; Mhvs 12, 12. -- aor. vāyi S.IV,290; J.I,51. Cp. abhi°, upa°, pa°. -- 2. to breathe forth, to emit an odour, to smell Pv.I,6¹; PvA.14; as vāti (2^nd sg. vāsi) at J.II,11 (=vāyasi C.). -- pp. vāta only as noun “wind” (q. v.). (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vā+ya), 1.吹，发出气味。2.编织。【过】vāyi。【现分】vāyanta, vāyamāna。【独】vāyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāyaṁ: {'def': '﹐= vā+ayaṁ(或这)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāyeti: {'def': '(vā+e), 使编织。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vā + e), 使编织。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vāyima: {'def': '【形】编织的。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vā: vāyati¹] weaving, woven; a° not woven Vin.III,224 (of a rug or cover). (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹vā: vāyati1),【形】编织的(weaving, woven)【反】avayima。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāyin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vāyati²] blowing (forth), emitting an odour, smelling PvA.87. (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāyita: {'def': '[pp. of vāyati¹, cp. Divy 276 vāyita] woven M.III,253 (sāma°), where Miln.240 in id. p. reads sayaṁ°; Vin.III,259. Cp. vīta. (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vāyati 的【过分】), 已编织，已打辫，已吹。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vāyati 的【过分】), 已编织，已打辫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāyo: {'def': '(nt.) [for vāyu, in analogy to āpo & tejo, with which frequently enumerated] wind D.III,268 (°kasiṇa); M.I,1, 424=A.IV,375; A.V,7, 318, 353 sq. (°saññā); S.III,207; Vism.172 (°kasiṇa), 350 (def.). On vāyo as t. t. for mobility, mobile principle (one of the 4 elements) see Cpd. 3, 270; Dhs.trslⁿ § 962.

--dhātu the wind element, wind as one of the four great elements, wind as a general principle (consisting of var. kinds: see enum^d under vāta) Vbh.84; Vism.363; Nett 74; VbhA.55; VvA.15; DA.I,194. (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(取自 vāya 词形，在【合】中) vāyokasiṇa,【中】(修禅取相的)风遍。vāyodhātu,【阴】风界(风元素)。Dhs.(PTS:965；CS:970.)︰Katamaṁ taṁ rūpaṁ vāyodhātu? Yaṁ 1vāyo 2vāyogataṁ 3thambhitattaṁ rūpassa ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā upādiṇṇaṁ vā anupādiṇṇaṁ vā-- idaṁ taṁ rūpaṁ vāyodhātu.(什么是「色的风界」(What is the Corporeality which is the Element of motion)？凡是1移动(motion)、2移动性、3刚强(rigidity, 撑)，生起於色的内、外，或已执取、未执取，这是「色的风界」。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(取自 vāya 词形，在【合】中) ~kasiṇa, 【中】（修禅取相的）风器材。~dhātu, 【阴】风界（风元素）。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vāyu: {'def': '【中】风，风元素（移动）。(p283)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】风，风元素(移动)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic vāya, fr. vā: vāyati²] wind Miln.385; PvA.156. See next. (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāyāma: {'def': '[fr. vi+ā+yam] striving, effort, exertion, endeavour S.II,168; IV,197; V,440; A.I,174 (chando+), 219; II,93; III,307; IV,320; V,93 sq.; J.I,72; Vbh.123, 211, 235; VbhA.91; DhA.IV,109; PvA.259. On vāyāma as a constituent of the “Path” (sammā°) see magga 2.a. -- vāyāmaṁ karoti to exert oneself DhA.IV,26; PvA.259. (Page 609)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹vi+ā+yam抵达(cp.梵yam 抵达)),【阳】努力，精进(striving, effort, exertion, endeavour)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】努力，精进。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vāḷa: {'def': '² [misspelt for vāda?] music (?) Pgdp 83. (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [cp. late Sk. vyāḍa, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 54⁶] 1. a snake Vism.312 (so read for vaḷa). -- 2. a beast of prey A.III,102 (amanussa); J.I,295; III,345 (°macchā predaceous fishes); Miln.23 (°vana forest of wild beasts).

--miga a beast of prey, predaceous animal, like tiger, leopard, etc. J.VI,569; DhA.I,171 (°ṭṭhāna); III,348 (°rocanā); Vism.180, 239. (Page 610)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāṇija: {'def': 'vāṇijaka, 【阳】商人，贾人。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. vaṇij (vaṇik): see vaṇijjā; lit. son of a merchant; Vedic vāṇija] a merchant, trader Vin.III,6 (assa°); Sn.614, 651, 1014; J.V,156 (so read for va°); Pv.I,10⁶; Dāvs.I,58; KhA 224; SnA 251; PvA.47, 48, 100, 191, 215, 271. On similes with v. see J.P.T.S. 1907, 134. (Page 607)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'vāṇijaka,【阳】商人，贾人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāṇijaka: {'def': '=vāṇijā S.II,215 (sūci°); J.III,540. (Page 607)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāṇijja: {'def': '【中】交易。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】交易。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vāṇijjā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. vāṇija, cp. vaṇijjā] trade, trading Vin.IV,6 (as one of the exalted professions); PvA.111, 201, 273, 277. (Page 607)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vāṇī: {'def': '【阴】话，演讲。(p282)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】话，演讲。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vāṭa: {'def': 'vāṭaka,【阳】围栏。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Class. Sk. vāṭa; on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. vallus] enclosure, enclosed place Vin.II,154. See also yañña°. (Page 607)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'vāṭaka, 【阳】围栏。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vāṭaka: {'def': '(-°) [fr. vāṭa] enclosure, circle, ring; in gala° the throat circle, i. e. the bottom of the throat Vism.258; DhsA.316; DhA.I,394; caṇḍāla° circle of Caṇḍālas J.VI,156; brāhmaṇa° of Brahmins DhA.IV,177. (Page 607)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vīci: {'def': '(m. & f.) [cp. late Sk. vīci wave; Vedic vīci only in meaning “deceit”; perhaps connected with Lat. vicis, Ags. wīce=E. week, lit. “change,” cp. tide] 1. a wave J.I,509; Miln.117 (jala°), 319 (°puppha wave-flower, fig.); Vism.63 (samudda°); Dāvs.IV,46; DhsA.116= Vism.143. -- 2. interval, period of time (cp. “tide”= time interval) J.V,271 (°antara, in Avīci definition as “uninterrupted state of suffering”). In contrast pair avīci (adj.) uninterrupted, without an interval, & savīci with periods, in defⁿ of jarā at VbhA.99 & DhsA.328, where avīci means “not changing quickly,” and savīci “changing quickly.” Also in defⁿ of sadā (continuously) as “avīci-santati” at Nd² 631. Cp. avīci. (Page 643)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】波，波浪，间隔。(p302)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】1.波，波浪(a wave, (jalavīci), (vīcipuppha wave-flower, fig.); Vism.63 (samuddavīci)。2.间隔(interval, period of time)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vīhi: {'def': '(cp.Vedic vrīhi),【阳】稻谷(rice, paddy)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic vrīhi] rice, paddy Vin.IV,264 (as one of the 7 kinds of āmaka-dhañña); J.I,429; III,356; Miln.102, 267; Vism.383 (°tumba); DhA.I,125; III,374 (°piṭaka). (Page 644)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】稻谷。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vījana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vīj, cp. Class. Sk. vījana] a fan, fanning; in vījana-vāta a fanning wind, a breeze SnA 174. (Page 643)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】通（扇）风。(p302)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹vīj；Sk. vījana),【中】通(扇)风(a fan, fanning)。vījana-vāta, 扇风，凉风(a fanning wind, a breeze)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vījanī: {'def': '【阴】扇子。(p302)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. vījana, of vīj] a fan Vv 47² (T. bījanī, v. l. vīj°); J.I,46; Vism.310; DhA.IV,39; VvA.147; PvA.176; KhA 95. There are 3 kinds of fans mentioned at Vin.II,130, viz. vākamaya°, usīra°, mora-piñcha°, or fans made of bark, of a root (?), and of a peacock’s tail. (Page 643)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Bījanī (fr. vījana, of vīj搧),【阴】扇子(a fan. There are 3 kinds of fans mentioned at Vin.II,130, viz. vākamayavījanī, usīravījanī, mora-piñchavījanī, or fans made of bark, of a root (?), and of a peacock’s tail.)。cittabījaniṁ(SnA.v.405./II,381.),有彩绘的扇子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vījati: {'def': '(vīj + a), 扇。【过】 vīji。【过分】 vījita。【独】 vījetvā。【现分】vījayamāna。(p302)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': ' [vīj] to fan J.I,165; SnA 487; VvA.6 (T. bījati). ‹-› Caus. vījeti DhA.IV,213; Mhvs 5, 161. -- Pass. vījiyati: ppr. vījiyamāna getting fanned J.III,374 (so read for vijīy°); PvA.176 (so for vijjamāna!). -- pp. vījita. (Page 643)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Bījati (vīj搧+a), 搧(扇)(to fan)、挥动。【过】vīji。【过分】vījita。【独】vījetvā。【现分】vījayamāna。Caus. vījeti。Pass. vījiyati, bījīyati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vījeti: {'def': '(vij + e), 扇。【过】 ~esi。【现分】 vījenta。【独】 vījetvā。(p302)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vij +e), 扇。【过】vījesi。【现分】vījenta。【独】vījetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vījita: {'def': '[pp. of vījati] fanned Pv III,1¹⁷ (°anga). (Page 643)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vījiyamāna: {'def': '【现分】正在扇动。(p302)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vīmaŋsaka: {'def': '【形】调查者，测试者。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vīmaŋsana: {'def': '【中】 vīmaŋsā, 【阴】实验，调查。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vīmaŋsati: {'def': '(mān + sa, mā 重叠，而前 mā 改为 vī；次 mā 被短化), 调查，测试，考虑。【过】 vīmaŋsi。【过分】 ~sita。【现分】 ~santa。【独】~sitvā, vīmaŋsiya。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vīmaŋsī: {'def': '【阳】调查员。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vīmaṁsaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vīmaṁsā] testing, investigating, examining S.III,6 sq.; Sn.827; Nd¹ 166; J.I,369. (Page 644)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹vīmaṁsā),【形】调查者，测试者(testing, investigating, examining)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vīmaṁsana: {'def': '(nt.) & °ā (f.) [fr. vīmaṁsati] trying, testing; finding out, experiment Vin.III,79; J.III,55; Mhvs 22, 78; PvA.153. (Page 644)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Vīmaṁsanā,【中】(梵 mīmāṁsā)(‹vīmaṁsati),实验，调查，思量，审察，观察，弭曼差(音译)( trying, testing; finding out, experiment)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vīmaṁsati: {'def': '(mān+sa, mā 重叠，而前 mā 改为 vī；次 mā 被短化), 调查，测试，考虑。【过】vīmaṁsi。【过分】vīmaṁsita。【现分】vīmaṁsanta。【独】vīmaṁsitvā, vīmaṁsiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(&Vīmaṁseti) [Vedic mīmāṁsate, Desid. of man. The P. form arose through dissimilation m›v, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 46, 4] “to try to think,” to consider, examine, find out, investigate, test, trace, think over Sn.215 (°amāna), 405; J.I,128, 147, 200; VI,334; Miln.143; PvA.145, 215, 272; Sdhp.91. -- ger. °itvā J.VI,368; Mhvs 5, 36; PvA.155; inf. °ituṁ Mhvs 37, 234; PvA.30, 155, 283 (sippaṁ). -- Caus. II, vīmaṁsāpeti to cause to investigate J.V,110. -- Cp. pari°. (Page 644)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vīmaṁsin: {'def': '=vīmaṁsaka Sn.877; Nd¹ 283; DA.I,106. (Page 644)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vīmaṁsā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. vīmaṁsati] consideration, examination, test, investigation, the fourth of the Iddhipādas, q. v.; D.III,77 (°samādhi), 222; S.V,280; A.I,39, 297; III,37, 346; V,24, 90, 338; Ps.I,19; II,123; Kvu 508; Dhs.269; Vbh.219 (°samādhi), 222, 227; Tikp 2; Nett 16 (°samādhi), 42; DA.I,106; SnA 349 (vīmaṁsa-kāra=saṅkheyya-kāra). -- Cp. pari°. (Page 644)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹vīmaṁsati),【阴】思量，观察，实验，调查(consideration, examination, test, investigation)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vīmaṁsī: {'def': '(=Vīmaṁsin ),【阳】调查员。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vīra: {'def': '(Vedic vīra),【形】勇敢的，英勇的(manly, mighty, heroic)。【阳】英雄( a hero )。mahāvīra﹐大雄(=阿罗汉)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】勇敢的，英勇的。【阳】英雄。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic vīra; cp. Av. vīra, Lat. vir, virtus “virtue”; Gotu. wair, Ohg, Ags wer; to vayas strength etc.; cp. viriya] manly, mighty, heroic; a hero S.I,137; Sn.44, 165 (not dhīra), 642, 1096, 1102; Th.1, 736 (nara° hero); Nd² 609; DhA.IV,225. --mahā° a hero S.I,110, 193; III,83 (of the Arahant). --vīra is often an Ep. of the Buddha.

--aṅgarūpa built like a hero, heroic, divine D.I,89; II,16; III,59, 142, 145; S.I,89; Sn.p. 106; expl^d as “devaputta-sadisa-kāya” at DA.I,250 & SnA 450. ‹-› The BSk. equivalent is var-aṅga-rūpin (distorted fr. vīr°), e. g. MVastu I.49; II,158; III,197. (Page 644)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vīriya: {'def': '(‹vīra英雄‹aj去+īr, vi取代aj),【中】精进，努力，勇悍。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(Viriya)精进、努力。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}

Vīsati: {'def': '【阴】二十。vīsatima,【形】第二十的。(在【合】中，有时 vīsati 取 vīsaṁ 的词形；例：vīsaṁvassasatikā)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& vīsaṁ (indecl.) [both for Vedic viṁśati; cp. Av. vīsaiti, Gr. ei)/kosi, Lat. viginti, Oir. fiche, etc.; fr. Idg. *ǔi+komt (decad), thus “two decads.” Cp. vi°] number 20. -- Both forms are used indiscriminately. -- (1) vīsati, e. g. Vin.II,271 (°vassa, as minimum age of ordination); Sn.457 (catu-vīsat’akkharaṁ); J.I,89 (°sahassa bhikkhū); III,360; VbhA.191 sq.; DhA.I,4 (ekūna°, 19); II,9, 54; III,62 (°sahassa bhikkhū, as followers); as vīsatiṁ at DhA.II,61 (vassa-sahassāni). ‹-› (2) vīsaṁ; e. g. Sn.1019 (°vassa-sata); It.99 (jātiyo); J.I,395 (°yojana-sata); V,36 (°ratana-sata); DhA.I,8; II,91 (°yojana-sataṁ). (Page 644)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】二十。 ~ma, 【形】第二十的。 (在【合】中，有时 vīsati 取 vīsaŋ的词形；例： vīsaŋvassasatikā)。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vīta: {'def': '² [pp. of vāyati¹, or vināti] woven Vin.III,259 (su°). (Page 643)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(= vigata),【过分】已无，已没有，(= vāyita), 已纺织。vītaccika,【形】无火焰的，炽热的。vītagedha, vītataṇha,【形】无贪欲的，无渴望的。vītamala,【形】无瑕疵的。vītamoha(vīta+moha),【形】无痴的(没有无知的)。vītarāga,【形】离染的。【阳】圣徒。Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, Tissa, rūpe vigatarāgassa vigatacchandassa vigatapemassa vigatapipāsassa vigatapariḷāhassa vigatataṇhassa, tassa rūpassa vipariṇāmaññathābhāvā uppajjanti sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā’ti? “No hetaṁ, bhante”.(低舍！於汝意云何？若於色离染、离欲、离爱、离渴、离热烦、离渴爱者，彼色之变易、变异而生愁、悲、苦、忧、恼耶？)「大德！不也。」) (S.22.84./III,107.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(= vigata), 【过分】已无，已没有，(= vāyita), 已纺织。 ~ccika, 【形】无火焰的，炽热的。 ~gedha, ~taṇha, 【形】无贪欲的，无渴望的。 ~mala,【形】无瑕疵的。 ~moha, 【形】无痴的（没有无知的）。 ~rāga, 【形】不热情的。【阳】圣徒。(p302)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) [vi+ita, pp. of i] deprived of, free from, (being) without. In meaning and use cp. vigata°. Very frequent as first part of a cpd., as e. g. the foll.:

--accika without a flame, i. e. glowing, aglow (of cinders), usually comb^d with °dhūma “without smoke” M.I,365; S.II,99 (so read for vītacchika)=IV.188=M.I,74; D.II,134; J.I,15, 153; III,447; V,135; DhA.II,68; Vism.301. --iccha free from desire J.II,258. --gedha without greed Sn.210, 860, 1100; Nd¹ 250; Nd² 606. --taṇha without craving Sn.83, 741, 849, 1041, 1060; Nd¹ 211; Nd² 607. --tapo without heat J.II,450. --(d)dara fearless Th.1, 525; Dh.385. --dosa without anger Sn.12. --macchara without envy, unselfish Sn.954; Nd¹ 444; J.V,398; Pv III,1¹⁵. --mada not conceited So 328, cp. A.II,120. --mala stainless (cp. vimala) S.IV,47, 107; DA.I,237; Miln.16. --moha without bewilderment Sn.13. I have to remark that the reading vīta° seems to be well established. It occurs very frequently in the Apadāna. Should we take it in meaning of “excessive”? And are we confronted with an attribute of osadhi, the morning star, which points to Babylonian influence (star of the East)? As it occurs in the Vatthugāthās of the Pārāyanavagga, this does not seem improbable. --raṁsi rayless (?) Sn.1016 (said of the sun; the expression is not clear. One MS. of Nd² at this passage reads pīta°, i. e. with yellow, i. e. golden, rays; which is to be preferred). Cp. note in Index to SnA. --rāga passionless Sn.11, 507, 1071; Pug.32; Pv.II,4⁷; Miln.76, and frequently elsewhere. --lobha without greed Sn.10, 469, 494. --vaṇṇa colourless Sn.1120. --salla without a sting S.IV,64. --sārada not fresh, not unexperienced, i. e. wise It.123. (Page 643)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vītaṁsa: {'def': '[fr. vi+tan, according to BR. The word is found in late Sk. (lexicogr.) as vītaṁsa. BR compare Sk. avataṁsa (garland: see P. vaṭaṁsa) & uttaṁsa. The etym. is not clear] a bird-snare (BR.: “jedes zum Fangen von Wild & Vögeln dienende Gerät”), a decoy bird Th.1, 139. Kern, Toev. s. v. “vogelstrik.” (Page 644)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vīthi: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. vīthi, to Idg. *ǔeịā- to aim at, as in Lat. via way, Sk. veti to pursue; Lat. venor to hunt; Gr. ei]ζato he went] 1. street, way, road, path, track A.V,347, 350 sq.; Vv 83⁶; J.I,158 (garden path); V,350 (dve vīthiyo gahetvā tiṭṭhati, of a house); VI,276 (v. and raccha); DhA.I,14; VvA.31; PvA.54. --antaravīthiyaṁ (Loc.) in the middle of the road J.I,373; PvA.96. --°sabhāga share of road J.I,422; --°siṅghāṭaka crossroad DhA.IV,4. -- Of the path of the stars and heavenly bodies J.I,23; VvA.326. -- Various streets (roads, paths) are named either after the professions carried on in them, e. g. dantakāra° street of ivory-workers J.I,320; pesakāra° weaver st. DhA.I,424; bhatakāra° soldier st. DhA.I,233; -- or after the main kind of traffic frequenting these, e. g. nāga° elephant road VvA.316; miga° animal rd. J.I,372; -- or after special occasions (like distinguished people passing by this or that road), e. g. buddha° the road of the Buddha DhA.II,80; rāja° King st. ThA.52; Mhvs 20, 38. -- 2. (t.t. in psychology) course, process (of judgment, senseperception or cognition, cp. Cpd. 25, 124, 241 (vinicchaya°), 266. -- Vism.187 (kammaṭṭhāna°); KhA 102 (viññāṇa°). --°citta process of cognition (lit. processed cognition) Vism.22; DhsA.269. (Page 644)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹vi+i去；cp. Epic Sk. vīthi),【阴】1.街，道，轨道(street, way, road, path, track)。2.历程，过程，认知之过程(paramparā)；音译：毗提(course, process (of judgment, senseperception or cognition))。vīthicitta,【中】心识的路线(路心。process of cognition (lit. processed cognition) 除了结生、有分、死三种‘离路心’(vīthimutta)心识刹那之外，其他的心识刹那皆属於‘路心’)(Vism.22.; DhsA 269.)。Anudīpanīpāṭha(CS:pg.132) ︰“Vīthī”ti vīthicittappabandho.(路︰连续不断的路心。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】街道，轨道。 ~citta, 【中】心识的路线。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vīthika: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. vīthi] having (as) a road Miln.322 (satipaṭṭhāna°, in the city of Righteousness). (Page 644)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'vīthika-,(‹vīthi) 有一路(having (as) a road Miln 322 (satipaṭṭhānavīthika, in the city of Righteousness))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vītiharati: {'def': '(vi + ati + har + a), 走路，迈大步走。【过】 ~hari。【独】 ~ritvā。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vi+ati超越+har拿+a), 走路，迈大步走(to associate with (at a meal))。【过】vītihari。【独】vītiharitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vītiharaṇa: {'def': '【中】 vītihāra, 【阳】换步，（一）大步，夹在中间搬运。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】vītihāra,【阳】换步，(一)大步，夹在中间搬运(passing (mutually), carrying in between)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vītihāra: {'def': '【阳】换步(in padavīti “taking over or exchange of steps,” a stride)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vītikkama: {'def': '【阳】1.违反，超越，罪(going beyond, transgression, sin)。2.(going on, course (of time) PvA.137 (vītikkamena by and by; v. l. anukkamena).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】违反，超越。(p302)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vītikkamati: {'def': '(vi+ati超越+kam(梵kram)超越+a), 违背，超越。【过】vītikkami。【过分】vītikkanta。【现分】vītikkamanta。【独】vītikkamitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + ati + kam + a), 违背，超越。【过】 ~kami。【过分】vītikkanta。【现分】 ~kamanta。【独】 ~kamitvā。(p302)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vītimissa: {'def': '混合(mingled, mixed (with))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vītināmeti: {'def': '(vi + ati + nam + e), 度时，等候。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~nāmtia。【独】 ~metvā。(p302)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vi+ati超越+nam+e), 度时间，等候(to make pass (time), to spend the time, to live, pass, wait)。【过】vītināmesi。【过分】vītināmtia。【独】vītināmetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vītipatati: {'def': '飞越(to fly past, to flit by, to fly up & down )。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vītisāreti: {'def': '(fr. vi+ati+ sr; not with Childers fr. smr; cp. BSk. vyatisārayati), 交换(to make pass (between), to exchange (greeting), to address, converse (kathaṁ), greet)。sārāṇīyaṁ sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ vītisāreti,互相问候，寒喧。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vītivatta: {'def': '(vītivattati 的【过分】), 已经过，已消磨，已克服(having passed or overcome, gone through; passed, spent)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vītivattati 的【过分】), 已经过，已消磨，已克服。(p302)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vītivatteti: {'def': '(vi+ati超越+vat+e), 克服，度时。【过】vītivattesi。【过分】vītivattita。【独】vītivattetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + ati + vat + e), 克服，度时。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~vattita。【独】 ~tetvā。(p302)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vīti°: {'def': 'is the contracted prepositional combⁿ vi+ati, representing an emphatic ati, e. g. in the foll.:

--(k)kama (1) going beyond, transgression, sin Vin.III,112; IV,290; J.I,412; IV,376; Pug.21; Miln.380; Vism.11, 17; DhA.IV,3. -- (2) going on, course (of time) PvA.137 (°ena by and by; v. l. anukkamena). --kiṇṇa sprinkled, speckled, gay with J.V,188. --nāmeti to make pass (time), to spend the time, to live, pass, wait J.III,63, 381; DhA.II,57; VvA.158; PvA.12, 21, 47, 76. --patati to fly past, to flit by, to fly up & down Sn.688; A.V,88=Miln.392. --missa mingled, mixed (with) M.I,318; D.III,96; J.VI,151. --vatta having passed or overcome, gone through; passed, spent S.I,14, 145; III,225; IV,52; A.II,44; Sn.6, 395, 796; J.I,374; ThA.170; PvA.21, 55, 83. --sāreti [fr. vi+ati+ sṛ; not with Childers fr. smṛ; cp. BSk. vyatisārayati] to make pass (between), to exchange (greeting), to address, converse (kathaṁ), greet. Often in phrase sārāṇīyaṁ sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ vītisāreti [for which BSk. sammodanīṁ saṁrañjanīṁ vividhāṁ kathāṁ vyatisārayati, e. g. AvŚ II.140] D.I,52, 90, 118, 152; Sn.419; cp. Miln.19; J.IV,98 (shortened to sārāṇīyaṁ vītisārimha; expl^d with sārayimha); V,264. --haraṇa passing (mutually), carrying in between J.VI,355 (bhojanānaṁ). --harati to associate with (at a meal) S.I,162. --hāra, in pada° “taking over or exchange of steps,” a stride S.I,211; A.IV,429; J.VI,354. Same in BSk., e. g. MVastu I.35; III,162. (Page 644)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vīvadāta: {'def': '(adj.) [vi+avadāta, the metric form of vodāta] clean, pure Sn.784, 881. (Page 644)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vīyati: {'def': '(vā+i+ya), 被纺织。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vā + i + ya), 被纺织。(p303)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Pass. of vināti] see viyyati. (Page 644)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vīṇā: {'def': '【阴】琵琶。vīṇādaṇḍaka,【阳】琴颈。vīṇādoṇi,【阴】〔琵琶的〕面板。vīṇāvāyana,【中】琵琶的演奏。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】琵琶。 ~daṇḍaka, 【阳】琴颈。 ~doṇi, 【阴】〔琵琶的〕面板。 ~vāyana, 【中】琵琶的演奏。(p302)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic vīṇā] the Indian lute, mandoline S.I,122=Sn.449 (kacchā bhassati “let the lyre slide down from hollow of his arm” K.S. I.153); Th.1, 467; S.IV,196 (six parts); A.III,375; J.III,91; V,196, 281 (named Kokanada “wolf’s howl”); VI,465=580; Vv 64¹⁹; 81¹⁰; Miln.53 (all its var. parts); VvA.138, 161, 210; PvA.151. -- vīṇaṁ vādeti to play the lute Mhvs 31, 82; ThA.203.

--daṇḍaka the neck of a lute J.II,225. --doṇikā the sounding board of a lute (cp. doṇī¹ 4) Vism.251; VbhA.234; KhA 45. (Page 643)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vūpakaṭṭha: {'def': '(vūpakāseti 的【过分】，BSk.(vyapakrsṭa 的【过分】),【形】隐蔽的、远离的。eko vūpakaṭṭho独一静处。SA.6.3./I,204.：ekoti ṭhānādīsu iriyāpathesu ekako﹐ekavihārīti attho.Vūpakaṭṭhoti kāyena vūpakaṭṭho nissaṭo.(独一：单独一人(行住坐卧)四威仪皆於住所等，一人独居。远离：以身远离出脱。)MA.57./III,107：Vūpakaṭṭhoti vatthukāma-kilesakāmehi kāyena ca cittena ca vūpakaṭṭho.(远离：\x1f身远离和心远离『事欲』与『烦恼欲』，称为远离。)?事欲：是指田园、财产、事业、衣服、饮食等欲望；烦恼欲：是指耽著於事欲，随逐爱味，产生种种妄想。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[doubtful, whether vi+upakaṭṭha (since the latter is only used of time), or=vavakaṭṭha, with which it is identical in meaning. Cp. also BSk. vyapakṛṣṭa AvS.I,233; II,194; of which it might be a re-translation] alienated, withdrawn, drawn away (from), secluded: often in phrase eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī etc. (see arahant II.B.), e. g. D.III,76; S.I,117; II,21, 244; III,35, 73 sq.; IV,72; A.IV,299. Cp. also A.IV,435 (gaṇasmā v.). (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vūpakāsa: {'def': '[formed fr. vūpakāseti] estrangement, alienation, separation, seclusion; always as twofold: kāya° & citta° (of body & of mind), e. g. D.III,285 (Dial. III,260 not correctly “serenity”); S.V,67; A.IV,152. (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vūpakāseti: {'def': '[Caus. of vavakassati] to draw away, alienate, distract, exclude Vin.IV,326; A.V,72 sq. -- Caus. II. vūpakāsāpeti to cause to distract or draw away Vin.I,49; IV,326. -- pp. vūpakaṭṭha. (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vavakassati‹krs‘拉’的【使】),【形】远离的、引离的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vūparati: {'def': '[vi+uparati]=uparati cessation DhsA.403. (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vūpasama: {'def': '【阳】 Vūpasamana, 【中】减轻，平静，停止。(p304)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. vi+upa+śam; cp. BSk. vyupaśama Divy 578] 1. allaying, relief, suppression, mastery, cessation, calmness S.III,32; IV,217; V,65 (cetaso); D.II,157 (saṅkhārā); A.I,4 (id.); II,162 (papañca°); V,72; Pug.69; J.I,392; DhsA.403. -- 2. quenching (of thirst) PvA.104. (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. vi+upa+ sam(梵wam)使平静、使安静),【阳】vūpasamana,【中】减轻，平静，停止。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vūpasamana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vi+upa+śam; cp. BSk. vyupaśamana AvŚ II.114] allayment, cessation J.I,393; Miln.320; PvA.37, 98. (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vūpasameti: {'def': '(vi + upa + sam + e), 安抚，使镇静，减轻。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~samita。【现分】 ~samenta。【独】 ~metvā。(p304)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vi+upa近+sam+e), 安抚，使镇静，减轻。【过】vūpasamesi。【过分】vūpasamita。【现分】vūpasamenta。【独】vūpasametvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vūpasammati: {'def': '[vi+upasammati] 1. to be assuaged or quieted S.IV,215. -- 2. to be suppressed or removed J.III,334. -- 3. to be subdued or extinguished, to go out (of light) Ap. 35. -- pp. vūpasanta. -- Caus. vūpasāmeti to appease, allay, quiet, suppress, relieve S.V,50: SnA 132 (reṇuṁ); PvA.20, 38 (sokaṁ), 200 (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+upa近+sam+ya), 被缓和，被安心，被熄灭。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + upa + sam + ya), 被缓和，被安心，被熄灭。(p304)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vūpasanta: {'def': '[pp. of vūpasammati] appeased, allayed, calmed S.IV,217, 294; A.I,4 (°citta); III,205; Sn.82; Pug.61 (°citta); PvA.113. (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vūpasammati 的【过分】), 已镇静，已平静下来。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vūpasammati 的【过分】), 已镇静，已平静下来。(p304)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vūḷha: {'def': 'see vuḷha. (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vuyhati 的【过分】)。(p304)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vuyhati 的【过分】) 已被运走。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Y: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第二十六个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中的 y。(p260)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第二十六个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中的 y。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ya: {'def': '【关代】1.凡是[…者] ，哪一，什么。 2. (a),我﹑你﹑彼(【单】), (b),我们﹑你们﹑彼等(【复】)。【阳】yo。【阴】yā。【中】yaṁ，yad。【阳】：单.主.yo；复.主ye；单.宾.yaṁ；复.宾.ye；单.具.yena；复.具.yehi﹑yebhi；单.离.yasmā﹑yamhā；复.离.yehi﹑yebhi；单.与.﹑属.yassa；复.与.﹑属.yesaṁ﹑yesānaṁ；单.处.yasmiṁ﹑yamhi；复.处.yesu。【阴】：单.主.yā；复.主.yā﹑yāyo；单.宾.yaṁ；复.宾.yā﹑yāyo；单.具.yāya；复.具.yāhi﹑yābhi；单.离yāya；复.离.yāhi﹑yābhi；单.与.﹑属.yāya﹑yassā；复.与.﹑属.yāsaṁ﹑yāsānaṁ；单.处.yassā﹑yāyaṁ﹑yassaṁ；复.处.yāsu。【中】：单.主.yaṁ﹑yad；复.主.yāni；单.宾.yaṁ﹑yad；复.宾.yāni。yassa yassa﹐无论何人的(whoseever)。yaṁ yaṁ﹐无论何物(whatever)。yathā yathā﹐无论何种方式(however, in whatever way)。yadā yadā﹐无论何时(whenever)。yaṁ yaṁ+地方…(yattha yattha…)﹐无论何处(wherever)。yo…, taṁ…；yā…, taṁ…；yaṁ…, taṁ…。(关系子句…，主要字句…)。ya°…, ya°…, 任何。yo…, yo…﹐若…，若…。yathāha﹐依据。yadetaṁ(=ya+d+etaṁ)﹐什么，这…。yopāyaṁ (=yo+p+ayaṁ)﹐任何，这…。yeme(=ye’me, ya彼+ime此), 这些。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【关代】哪一，什么，无论什么。(p260)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ya-kāra: {'def': '[ya+kāra] 1. the letter (or sound) y: J.I,430 (padasandhikara); III,433 (vyañjana - sandhi - vasena gahita). -- 2. the letter (or syllable) ya: J.V,427 (nipāta-matta). It is referred to at Vin.IV,7 as an ending implying ridiculing or insult, together with the ending °bha. The Cy. means words like dāsiya, gumbiya, bālya etc. where -ya either denotes descendency or property, or stands for -ka as diminutive (i. e. (disparaging) ending. The same applies to °bha. Here at Vin.IV,7 this way of calling a person by means of adding -ya- or -bha to his name (cp. E. --y in kid› kiddy etc.) is grouped with a series of other terms of insult (hīnā akkosā). (Page 545)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yabhati: {'def': '[one passage in Atharva Veda; cp. Gr. oi)/fw “futuo,” Lat. ibex (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.)] to cohabit, futuere, only given as root yabh with defⁿ “methune” at Dhtp 215 & Dhtm 308. (Page 550)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yad: {'def': 'Yad-idaṁ etc., see ya° 4^b. (Page 550)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yadi: {'def': '【无】如果，然而。 ~idaŋ, 【无】这是哪一，是，即。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [adv. formation, orig. Loc., fr. ya°; cp. Vedic yadi] 1. as conjunction: if; constructed either with pres. indic., as: Sn.189; “yadi bodhiṁ pattuṁ icchasi” J.I,24 (v. 167); “yadi dāyako dānaṁ deti . . . etaṁ bījaṁ hoti” PvA.8; or pot.; or with a participle, as: “yadi evaṁ sante” that being so, if this is so D.I,61; “gahito yadi sīho te” if the lion is caught by you Mhvs 6, 27. -- With other particles, e. g. yādi āsanamattaṁ pi even if only a seat VvA.39; yadi . . . atha kasmā if . . . how then Miln.4. yadi evaṁ . . . (tu) even if . . . yet (but) PvA.63 (y. e. pitā na rodati, mātu nāma hadayaṁ mudukaṁ). -- yadi va “or” (cp. Vedic yadi vā “or be it that”) Dh.195 (=yadi vā athavā DhA.III,252). So yadi vā at J.I,18 (v. 97: latā vā yadi vā rukkhā etc. Sn.119 (gāme vā yadi vâraññe). -- 2. as a strong particle of exhortation: yadi evaṁ if so, in that case, let it be that, alright, now then PvA.54 (y. e. yaṁ mayhaṁ desitaṁ ekassa bhikkhuno dehi), 217 (y. e. yāvadatthaṁ gaṇhāhi: take as much as you like). (Page 550)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】如果，然而，若。yadidaṁ(yadi+idaṁ),【无】这是哪一，是，即。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yadā: {'def': '【副】每当，当。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【副】每当，当…时。yadā…﹐tadā…=当…, 那时…(when…then)。yadi…, tadā…=若…, 则…(if…then)。yattha…,tattha…该处…, 此处…(where…there)。yathā…,tathā…=正如…,这样(as…in this way)。yasmā…,tasmā…=因为…, 所以…(since…therefore)。tathā…,yathā…=(如此…,)以便…(so…that)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adv.) [Vedic yadā; old Instr. of ya°] when Sn.200 (y. ca so mato seti), 681, 696 (here as yada, expl^d as yadā), 923; Dh.28, 69, 277 sq., 325, 384, 390; It.77 (y devo devakāyā cavati); PvA.54, 67. Cp. kadā & tadā. (Page 550)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yagghe: {'def': '(indecl.) [similar in formation & meaning to tagghe (q. v.). It is yaṁ (yad)+gha, the latter in a Māgadhised form ghe, whereas taggha (=tad+gha) only occurs as such] hortative part, used in addressing a (superior) person in the Voc., followed by Pot. of jānāti, either 2^nd jāneyyāsi, or 3^rd sg. jāneyya; to be trsl^d somewhat like “look here, don’t you know,” surely, you ought to know; now then; similarly to part. yaṁ nu, yaṁ nūna & yaṁ hi. The part. is found in the language of the Nikāyas only, thus indicating part of the oldest & original dialect. E. g.: y. bhante jāneyyāsi Vin.I,237; yagghe deva jāneyyāsi yo te puriso dāso . . . so . . . pabbajito do you know, Oh king D.I,60 (trsl.: “if it please your majesty, do you know . . .”; DA.I,169 expl^s as “codan’at‹11›the nipāto”); y. ayye jāneyyāsi M.II,62; mahārāja j. M.II,71; id. S.I,101; y. bhavan jāneyya S.I,180. -- The passage M.II,157 is somewhat doubtful where we find y. with the ind. and in var. forms (see v. l.) of yagghi & taggha: “jānanti pana bhonto yagghe . . .,” with reply “na jānāma yagghe . . .” Perhaps the reading taggha would be preferable. (Page 546)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】用来称呼大辈的忠告词。(p260)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】用来称呼大辈的忠告词。【副】确实。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yahaŋ: {'def': 'yahiŋ, 【副】哪里，无论那里，无论什么情况下。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Yahaṁ: {'def': 'yahiṁ,【副】哪里，无论那里，无论什么情况下。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yahiṁ: {'def': '(adv.) [after kuhiṁ] where, wherever Mhvs 15, 209 (corresp. to yattha in v. 210). (Page 551)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yajana: {'def': '【中】牺牲的行为，捐献的分配。(p260)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [late formation fr. yaj, yajati, for the earlier yañña] the act of sacrificing J.III,518; VI,133; Cp. I. 7²; Vism.224; PvA.135. (Page 547)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】牺牲的行为，捐献的分配。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yajanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. yajana] one who sacrifices J.VI,133. (Page 547)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yajati: {'def': '(yaj + a), 舍，牺牲，布施，送礼。【过】 yaji。【过分】 yiṭṭha, yajita。【独】 yajitvā。【现分】 yajamāna。(p260)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(yaj供奉+a), 上供，牺牲，布施，送礼，供养。【过】yaji。【过分】yiṭṭha, yajita。【独】yajitvā。【现分】yajamāna。【单】【叁】【祈】【反照】yajetha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[yaj, cp. Vedic yajati, yajus, Yajur-veda. To Av. yaƶaitē to sacrifice, Gr. a(/zomai to revere, worship. On etym. cp. also Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. aestimo. -- The Dhtp (62) defines root by “deva-pūjā, saṅgati-karaṇa, dānesu,” i. e. “said of deva-worship, of assembling, and of gifts.” Similarly Dhtm 79] to sacrifice, to make an offering (yaññaṁ); to give alms or gifts -- In the P. literature it refers (with yañña, sacrifice) either (when critical) to the Brahmanic rites of sacrificing to the gods according to the rules initiated in the Vedas & Vedic literature; or (when dogmatical) to the giving of alms to the bhikkhu. In the latter sense it implies liberal donation of all the necessities of a bhikkhu (see enum^d under yañña). The latter use is by far the more frequent. -- The construction is with the Acc. of the deity honoured and the Instr. of the gift. -- Pres. yajati D.I,139; A.I,168; II,43, 44; Sn.505, 509; DA.I,160. -- ppr. yajanto D.I,52; M.I,404; Miln.21; Gen. pl. yajataṁ Sn.569 (=Vin.I,246, where reading is jayataṁ). -- ppr. med. yajamāna D.I,138 (mahayaññaṁ); Sn.506; S.I,233; J.VI,502, 505. -- imper. 3^rd sg. yajatu DA.I,297; med. yajataṁ D.I,138 (=detu bhavaṁ DA.I,300). 2^nd sg. yajāhi J.III,519; PvA.280, and perhaps at Pv.II,1⁶ (for T. yāhi). 2^nd med. yajassu Sn.302, 506; J.V,488 (yaññaṁ), 490 (id.) -- Pot. 1^st sg. yajeyyaṁ D.I,134; 3^rd pl. yajeyyuṁ J.VI,211, 215; 3^rd sg. med. yajetha Dh.106 (māse māse sahassena yo y.=dānaṁ dadeyya DhA.II,231), 108; It.98; A.II,43; Sn.463. -- Fut. 2^nd sg. yajissasi J.III,515; 1^st sg. yajissāmi J.VI,527 (pantha-sakuṇaṁ tuyhaṁ maṁsena); 3^rd pl. yajissanti J.IV,184; 1^st pl. yajissāma J.VI,132. ‹-› aor. 1^st sg. yajiṁ Th.1, 341; 3^rd sg. ayajī It.102; yaji Miln.219, 221. -- inf. yajituṁ Miln.220; yiṭṭhuṁ D.I,138 (yiṭṭhu-kāma wishing to sacrifice), and yaṭṭhuṁ in °kāma D.II,244; Sn.461. -- ger. yajitvā D.I,143; A.II,44; Sn.509; J.VI,137 (puttehi), 202; Pv.II,9⁵⁶ (datvā+, i. e. spending liberally; cp. PvA.136); yajitvāna Sn.303, 979. -- grd. yajitabba J.VI,133 (sabbacatukkena). -- pp. yajita & yiṭṭha. -- Caus. I. yājeti; Caus. II. yajāpeti (q. v.). (Page 546)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yajita: {'def': '[pp. of yajati] sacrificed Miln.219; J.IV,19. (Page 547)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yajubbeda: {'def': '[fr. Vedic yajus the sacrificial formula,+veda] the Yajurveda, the 2^nd of the Vedas, dealing with sacrifice Miln.178; DA.I,247; SnA 447. As yajuveda at Dpvs.V,62, where the 3 Vedas are enum^d as iruveda, yaju° and sāma°. (Page 547)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Yaju-veda m. [Sk. Yajurveda] ヤジェル・ヴェーダ.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Yajāpeti: {'def': '(yajati‘供养’的【使】) 使…供养。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. II. of yajati] to cause a sacrifice to be held A.I,168 (yajati+). (Page 547)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yaka-peḷa: {'def': '[see peḷa] the lump of the liver Sn.195 (=yakana-piṇḍa SnA 247)=J.I,146. Dines Andersen suggests: “Could y.-p. possibly be an old error for sakapeḷa, cp. Sk. śaka-piṇḍa & śakṛt-piṇḍa?” Cp. paṭala (ref. Vism.257). (Page 545)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yakana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. Gen. yaknaḥ or sec. stem yakan- of Vedic yakṛt; cp. Av. yākars; Gr. Qpar, Lat. jecur. In formation cp. P. chakana fr. Ved. śakṛt.] the liver Kh III,; M.I,57, 421; D.II,293; A.V,109; Miln.26; Vism.257, 356; VbhA.60, 240. The old n-stem is to be seen in cpd. yaka-peḷa (q. v.). (Page 545)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】肝脏。(p260)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】肝脏(liver)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yakkha: {'def': '[Vedic yakṣa, quick ray of light, but also “ghost”; fr. yaks to move quickly; perhaps: swift creatures, changing their abode quickly and at will. -- The customary (popular) etym. of Pali Commentators is y. as quâsi grd. of yaj, to sacrifice, thus: a being to whom a sacrifice (of expiation or propitiation) is given. See e. g. VvA.224: yajanti tattha baliṁ upaharantī ti yakkhā; or VvA.333: pūjanīya-bhavato yakkho ti vuccati. -- The term yakṣa as attendants of Kubera occurs already in the Upanishads.] 1. name of certain non-human beings, as spirits, ogres, dryads, ghosts, spooks. Their usual epithet and category of being is amanussa, i. e. not a human being (but not a sublime god either); a being half deified and of great power as regards influencing people (partly helping, partly hurting). They range in appearance immediately above the Petas; many “successful” or happy Petas are in fact Yakkhas (see also below). They correspond to our “genii” or fairies of the fairy-tales and show all their qualities. In many respects they correspond to the Vedic Piśācas, though different in many others, and of diff. origin. Historically they are remnants of an ancient demonology and of considerable folkloristic interest, as in them old animistic beliefs are incorporated and as they represent creatures of the wilds and forests, some of them based on ethnological features. See on term e. g. Dial. III,188; on their history and identity Stede, Gespenstergeschichten des Peta Vatthu chap. v.; pp. 39--44. -- They are sometimes called devatā: S.I,205; or devaputtā: PvA.113, 139. A female Yakkha is called yakkhinī (q. v.).

2. Their usual capacity is one of kindness to men (cp. Ger. Rūbezahl). They are also interested in the spiritual welfare of those humans with whom they come into contact, and are something like “tutelary genii” or even “angels” (i. e. messengers from another world) who will save prospective sinners from doing evil (cp. Pv IV.1). They also act as guides in the “inferno”: Pv IV.11, cp. IV.3. A somewhat dangerous “Mentor” is represented at D.I,95, where the y. Vajirapāṇī threatens to slay Ambaṭṭha with an iron hammer, if he does not answer the Bhagavā. He is represented as hovering in the air; Bdhgh. (DA.I,264) says on this: na yo vā so vā yakkho, Sakko devarājā ti veditabbo: it is to be understood not as this or that y., but as Sakka the king of devas. -- Whole cities stand under the protection of, or are inhabited by yakkhas; D.II,147 (ākiṇṇa-yakkha full of y.; thus Āḷakamandā may here mean all kinds of supra-mundane beings), cp. Lankā (Ceylon) as inhabited by y.: Mhvs 7, 33. -- Often, however, they are cruel and dangerous. The female yakkhas seem on the whole more fearful and evilnatured than the male (see under yakkhinī). They eat flesh and blood: J.IV,549; devour even men: D.II,346; J.II,15--17, or corpses: J.I,265; mentioned under the 5 ādīnavā (dangers) at A.III,256. A yakkha wants to kill Sāriputta: Ud.4.

3. Var. classes of y. are enum^d at D.II,256, 257; in a progressive order they rank between manussa and gandhabba at A.II,38; they are mentioned with devas, rakkhasas, dānavas, gandhabbas, kinnaras and mah’oragas at J.V,420. According to VvA.333 Sakka, the 4 great kings (lokapālā), the followers of Vessavaṇa (alias Yama, the yakkhas proper) and men (see below 7) go by the name of yakkha. -- Sakka, the king of the devas, is often named yakkha: J.IV,4; DA.I,264. Some are spirits of trees (rukkha-devatā): J.III,309 345; Pv.I,9; II,9; PvA.5; are also called bhumma-devā (earthly deities) PvA.45, 55. Their cult seems to originate primarily from the woods (thus in trees: Pv.II,9; IV,3), and secondarily from the legends of sea-faring merchants (cp. the story of the flyingDutchman). To the latter origin point the original descriptions of a Vimāna or fairy-palace, which is due to a sort of mirage. These are usually found in or at the sea, or in the neighbourhood of silent lakes, where the sense of hauntedness has given rise to the fear of demons or supernatural witchcraft. Cp. the entrances to a Vimāna by means of a dried-up river bed (Pv.I,9; II,12) and the many descriptions of the Vimānas in the Lake-districts of the Himavant in Vv. (See Stede, Peta Vatthu trslⁿ p. 104 sq.)

4. Their names too give us a clue as to their origin and function. These are taken from (a) their bodily appearance, which possesses many of the attributes of Petas, e. g. Khara “Rough-skin” or “Shaggy” Sn.p. 48 (=khara-samphassaṁ cammaṁ SnA 302), also as Khara-loma “Rough-hair” Vism.208; Khara-dāṭhika “Rough-tooth” J.I,31. Citta “Speckled” Mhvs 9, 22; 10, 4; also as Citta-rājā J.II,372; Mhvs 10, 84. Silesa-loma “Sticky-hair” J.I,273. Sūci-loma “Needlehair” Sn.p. 47, 48; S.I,207; Vism.208; SnA 302. --(b) places of inhabitance, attributes of their realm, animals and plants, e. g. Ajakalāpaka “Goat-bundle” Ud.1. Āḷavaka “Forest-dweller” J.IV,180; VI,329; Mhvs 30, 84: Vism.208. Uppala “Lotus” DhA.IV,209. Kakudha “K.-tree” (Terminalia arjuna) S.I,54. Kumbhīra “Crocodile” J.VI,272. Gumbiya either “One of a troop” (soldier of Yama) or “Thicket-er” (fr. gumba thicket) J.III,200, 201. Disāmukha “Skyfacer” DhA.IV,209. Yamamoli “Yamachignon” DhA.IV,208. Vajira “Thunderbolt” DhA.IV,209; alias Vajira-pāṇī D.I,95, or Vajira-bāhu DhA.IV,209. Sātāgira “Pleasant-mount” D.II,256; Sn.153; J.IV,314; VI,440. Serīsaka “Acacia-dweller” VvA.341 (the messenger of Vessavaṇa). -- (c) qualities of character, e. g. Adhamma “Unrighteous” Miln.202 (formerly Devadatta). Katattha “Well-wisher” DhA.IV,209. Dhamma “Righteous” Miln.202 (=Bodhisatta). Puṇṇaka “Full(-moon?)” J.VI,255 sq. (a leader of soldiers, nephew of Vessavaṇa). Māra the “Tempter” Sn.449; S.I,122; M.I,338. Sakata “Waggon-load” (of riches) DhA.IV,209 -- (d) embodiments of former persons, e. g. Janavasabha “Lord of men” D.II,205. Dīgha M.I,210. Naradeva J.VI,383, 387. Paṇḍaka “Eunuch” Mhvs 12, 21. Sīvaka S.I,241=Vin.II,156. Serī “Self-willed” S.I,57. -- Cp. the similar names of yakkhinīs.

5. They stand in a close relationship to and under the authority of Vessavaṇa (Kuvera), one of the 4 lokapālas. They are often the direct servants (messengers) of Yama himself, the Lord of the Underworld (and the Peta-realm especially). Cp. D.II,257; III,194 sq.; J.IV,492 (yakkhinī fetches water for Vessavaṇa); VI,255 sq. (Puṇṇaka, the nephew of V,); VvA.341 (Serīsaka, his messenger). In relation to Yama: dve yakkhā Yamassa dūtā Vv 52²; cp. Np. Yamamolī DhA.IV,208. -- In harmony with tradition they share the rôle of their master Kuvera as lord of riches (cp. Pv.II,9²²) and are the keepers (and liberal spenders) of underground riches, hidden treasures etc., with which they delight men: see e. g. the frame story to Pv.II,11 (PvA.145), and to IV.12 (PvA.274). They enjoy every kind of splendour & enjoyment, hence their attribute kāma-kāmin Pv.I,3³. Hence they possess supernatural powers, can transfer themselves to any place with their palaces and work miracles; a frequent attribute of theirs is mah’iddhika (Pv.II,9¹⁰; J.VI,118). Their appearance is splendid, as a result of former merit: cp. Pv.I,2; I,9; II,11; IV,3¹⁷. At the same time they are possessed of odd qualities (as result of former demerit); they are shy, and afraid of palmyra leaf & iron: J.IV,492; their eyes are red & do not wink: J.V, 34; VI,336, 337. -- Their abode is their self-created palace (Vimāna), which is anywhere in the air, or in trees etc. (see under vimāna). Sometimes we find a communion of yakkhas grouped in a town, e. g. Āḷakamandā D.II,147; Sirīsa-vatthu (in Ceylon) Mhvs 7, 32.

6. Their essential human character is evident also from their attitude towards the “Dhamma.” In this respect many of them are “fallen angels” and take up the word of the Buddha, thus being converted and able to rise to a higher sphere of existence in saṁsāra. Cp. D.III,194, 195; J.II,17; VvA.333; Pv.II,8¹⁰ (where “yakkha” is expl^d by Dhpāla as “pet-attabhāvato cuto (so read for mato!) yakkho ataṁ jāto dev-attabhāvaṁ patto” PvA.110); SnA 301 (both Sūciloma & Khara converted). -- See in general also the foll. passages: Sn.153, 179, 273, 449; S.I,206--15; A.I,160; Vism.366 (in simile); Miln.23.

7. Exceptionally the term “yakkha” is used as a philosophical term denoting the “individual soul” [cp. similar Vedic meaning “das lebendige Ding” (B.R.) at several AV. passages]; hence probably the old phrase: ettāvatā yakkhassa suddhi (purification of heart) Sn.478, quoted VvA.333 (ettāvat’aggaṁ no vadanti h’eke yakkhassa sudhiṁ idha paṇḍitāse). Sn.875 (cp. Nd¹ 282: yakkha=satta, nara, puggala, manussa).

--ânubhāva the potency of a yakkha J.I,240. --āviṭṭha possessed by a y. J.VI,586. --iddhi (yakkh°) magic power of a y. PvA.117, 241. --gaṇa the multitude of ys. J.VI,287. --gaha=following DhA.III,362. --gāha “yakkha-grip,” being seized by a y. S.I,208; PvA.144. --ṭṭhāna the dwelling-place of a y. --dāsī “a female temple slave,” or perhaps “possessed by a demon” (?) J.VI,501 (v. l. BB devatā-paviṭṭhā cp. p. 586: yakkh’āviṭṭhā.) --nagara city of ys. J.II,127 (=Sirīsavatthu); cp. pisāca-nagara. --pura id. Mhvs 7.32. --bhavana the realm or abode of the y. Nd¹ 448. --bhūta a yakkha-being, a ghost Pv III,5² (=pisāca-bhūta vā yakkha-bh. vā PvA.198); IV,1³⁵. --mahiddhi=°iddhi; Pv IV.1⁵⁴. --yoni the y.-world, realm of the y. SnA 301. --samāgama meeting of the y. PvA.55 (where also devaputtā join). --sūkara a y. in the form of a pig VbhA.494. --senā army of ys. D.III,194; SnA 209. --senāpati chief-commander of the yakkha-army J.IV,478; SnA 197. (Page 545)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】夜叉。 ~gaṇa, 【阳】夜叉群众。 ~gāha, 【阳】夜叉占有（着魔）。 ~tta, 【中】夜叉的情况。 ~bhūta, 【形】出生为夜叉的。~samāgama, 【阳】夜叉的集会。 ~adhipa, 【阳】夜叉王。(p260)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(梵yaksa),【阳】夜叉，阅叉。yakkhagaṇa,【阳】夜叉群衆。yakkhagāha,【阳】夜叉占有(著魔)。yakkhatta,【中】夜叉的情况。yakkhabhūta,【形】出生为夜叉的。yakkhasamāgama,【阳】夜叉的集会。yakkhadhipa,【阳】夜叉王。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yakkhatta: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. yakkha] condition of a higher demon or yakkha D.II,57; A.II,39; PvA.117. (Page 546)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yakkhinī: {'def': '(f.) [fr. yakkha, perhaps corresponding directly to Vedic yakṣiṇī, f. of yakṣin; adj. persecuting, taking vengeance, appl^d to Varuṇa at RV. VII.88⁴] a female yakkha, a vampire. Their character is usually fierce & full of spite & vengeance, addicted to man- & beastmurder (cp. yakkha 2). They are very much like Petīs in habits. With their names cp. those of the yakkhas, as enum^d under yakkha 4. -- Vin.III,37; IV,20 (where sexual intercourse with y. is forbidden to the bhikkhus); S.I,209 (Piyaṅkara-mātā); J.I,240 (as a goat), 395 sq.; II,127; III,511; V,21 (eating a baby), 209 (eaten by a y.); VI,336 (desirous of eating a child); Vism.121 (singing), 382 (four: Piyaṅkara-mātā, Uttaramātā, Phussa-mittā, Dhammaguttā), 665 (in simile); Mhvs 7, 11 (Kuvaṇṇā, i. e. bad-coloured); 10, 53 (Cetiyā); 12, 21 (Hāritā “Charming” or fr. harita “green” (?)); DhA.I,47; II,35, 36 (a y. in the form of a cow, eating 4 people in successive births). Note. A by-form of yakkhinī is yakkhī.

--bhāva the state of being a yakkhinī J.I,240; II,128 (yakkhini°). (Page 546)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'yakkhī, 【阴】母夜叉。(p260)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(梵yaksiṇī), yakkhī,【阴】母夜叉，夜叉女。通常与「罗刹」(梵 rāksasa)并称。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yakkhī: {'def': '(f.) [direct formation fr. yakkha, like petī fr. peta; form older than yakkhinī (?)]=yakkhinī S.I,11; Vin.III,121; IV,20; J.IV,492; Mhvs 7, 26. (Page 546)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yama: {'def': '1(fr. yam), 克制(restraint PvA.98 (+niyama))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [fr. yam] restraint PvA.98 (+niyama). (Page 550)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '³ (m. nt.) [Vedic yama=yama²; fr. yam in meaning “to combine,” cp. Av. y&schwamacr;ma twin, Mir. emuin id.] (nt.) a pair, (m.) a twin Abhp 628. See der. yamaka. (Page 551)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '阎魔，夜摩，焰摩，琰摩，阎罗', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '【阳】阎摩（死亡王国的统治者）。 ~dūta, 【阳】阎摩的使者（死亡的报信者）。 ~purisa, 【阳】阎摩的人（地狱的兵卒）。 ~rāja, 【阳】阎摩王。 ~loka, 【阳】亡灵的世界。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [Vedic Yama] the ruler of the kingdom of the dead. See details in Dicty. of Names. In cpds. often in general sense of “death” or “manes,” or “petā”; e. g. --dūta Death’s messenger Sdhp.287; cp. Yamassa dūtā Vv 52² (see VvA.224), or deva-dūta A.I,138 (see under dūta), alias niraya-pāla A.I,138 and passim. --purisa (a)=°dūta Dh.235 (cp. DhA.III,335); VvA.223; (b) °purisā Yama-people, i. e. Petas Pv IV.3³ (cp. PvA.251). --loka the yama-world or world of the Petas Dh.44, 45; PvA.107 & freq. --visaya=°loka Pv.II,8² & passim. --sādana Y’s kingdom, or the realm of the dead J.VI,267, 304; VI,457, 505. (Page 550)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '3 (Vedic yama=yama2; fr. yam in meaning “to combine,” cp. Av. y&schwamacr;ma twin, Mir. emuin id.) ,【阳】一双，一对。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'm. [〃] 夜摩, 閻摩, 死王. -dūta, -purisa 死王の使者. -loka 閻摩界, 死者の世界. -visaya 閻摩境. cf. Yāma.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '2,【阳】阎摩(死亡王国的统治者)( the ruler of the kingdom of the dead)。yamadūta,【阳】阎摩的使者(死亡的报信者)。yamapurisa,【阳】阎摩的人(地狱的兵卒)。yamarāja,【阳】阎摩王。yamaloka,【阳】亡灵的世界。yamavisaya=yamaloka。yamasādana, 阎摩的王国，阎摩界。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yamaka: {'def': '【形】两倍的，双胞胎的，一对的，相似的。【中】（一）对，（一）双。 ~sāla, 【阳】一对的婆罗双树。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. yama³] 1. (adj.) double, twin; only in foll. comb^ns: °pāṭihāriya (& °hīra) the miracle of the double appearances, a miracle performed by the Buddha in Sāvatthī to refute the heretical teachers (cp. Vin.III,332, Samanta-pāsādika; and in detail DA.I,57). It consisted in the appearance of phenomena of opposite character in pairs, as e. g. streaming forth of fire & water. (Cp. Mhvs trslⁿ 120). The miracle was repeatedly performed by the Buddha & is often referred to, e. g. at Ps.I,125 (°hīra); J.I,77, 88, 193; Miln.106 (°hīraṁ), 349 (°hāriyaṁ); Mhvs 17, 44, 50; 30, 82; 31, 99; Dāvs.I,50 (°hīraṁ); DhA.III,213 (id.); SnA 36; Vism.390; PvA.137. --sālā the pair of Sal willows in between of which the Buddha passed away VvA.165; PvA.212. -- 2. (adj. or m.) a twin, twin child Mhvs 6, 9 (yamake duve puttaṁ ca dhītaraṁ janesi), 37 (soḷasakkhattuṁ yamake duve duve putte janayi); DhA.I,353 (same, with vijāyi). -- 3. (nt.) a pair, couple, N. of one of the Abhidhamma canonical books, also called Yamaka-ppakaraṇa; Tikp 8. -- The Yamakasutta refers to the conversion of the bhikkhu Yamaka and is given at S.III,109 sq.; mentioned at Vism.479 & VbhA.32. The phrase yamakato sammasana at Vism.626 may mean “in pairs” (like kalāpato “in a bundle” ibid.), or may refer to the Yamaka-sutta with its discussion of anicca, dukkha, anatta. (Page 551)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】两倍的，双胞胎的，一对的，相似的。【中】(一)对，(一)双。yamakasāla,【阳】一对的(或双胞胎的)婆罗双树。《双论》(Yamaka)︰内容系以双对问答之方式阐明诸法相互之摄不摄、起灭等关系，共分十品，即根本、蕴、处、界、谛、行、随眠、心、法、根等十双论。各品又通立施设分、转分、遍知分三分说明，其中，施设分列举各品论述的法数；转分，则深入探讨各问题；遍知分，则界定各法遍知。但十品中，有三品结构特异，即第一、八品均未立转分及遍知分，而第七品则分为随增分、有随眠分、断分、遍知分、已断分、生分、界分等七分。(《中华佛教百科全书(六)》p.3253.1~2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'm. 双論 [パーリ七論の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Yamala: {'def': '[fr. yama³] a pair Abhp 628. -- yamalī occurs in BSk. only as a kind of dress, at Divy 276; AvŚ I.265. (Page 551)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yamataṁ: {'def': 'at S.I,14 (sa vītivatto yamataṁ sumedho) we should read (with Mrs. Rh. D.’s emendation K.S. p. 320) as yaṁ mataṁ (Cy.: maññanaṁ; trsl. “he rich in wisdom hath escaped beyond conceits and deemings of the errant mind”). (Page 551)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yamati: {'def': '[yam, given in meaning “uparame” i. e. cessation, quieting at Dhtp 226 & Dhtm 322, at the latter with additional “nāse.” On etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. redimio and emo: cp. yanta] to restrain, suppress, to become tranquil; only in stanza Dh.6=Th.I,275=J.III,488 as 1^st pl. med. yamāmase in imper. sense: “pare ca na vijānanti mayaṁ ettha yamāmase,” which is expl^d both at DhA.I,65, Th.1 A, & J.III,489 in connection with yama,² viz. “yamāmase: uparamāma nassāma satataṁ samitaṁ maccu-santikaṁ gacchāmā ti na jānanti,” i. e. let us go continually into the presence of death. A little further at DhA.I,66 the explⁿ of it is “bhaṇḍ’‹-› ādīnaṁ vuddhiyā vāyamāmā ti na vijānanti.” The meaning is “to control oneself,” cp. saṁyamāmase S.I,209. Leop. v. Schroeder however trsls. “Und mancher Mann bedenket nicht: wir alle müssen sterben hier” (Worte der Wahrheit, p. 2.). -- yameyyātha at S.I,217 is wrongly separated from the preceding vā, which ought to be read as vāyameyyātha (so K.S. I.281). (Page 551)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yamunā: {'def': 'f. [〃] 耶牟那 [カンジス河の支流, 五河の一] , ジュムナー河.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Yannūna: {'def': 'see ya° 2°. (Page 550)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yanta: {'def': '【中】机器。yantanāḷi,【阴】机械的管。yantamutta,【形】经过机器抛出或射击的。yantayutta,【形】以机器连接的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】机器。 ~nāḷi, 【阴】机械的管。 ~mutta, 【形】经过机器抛出或射击的。 ~yutta, 【形】以机器连接的。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic yantra, a kind of n. ag. formation fr. yam to hold by means of a string or bridle, etc. Idg. *em & *ịem, as in Lat. emo to take & red-imio.] a means for holding, contrivance, artifice, instrument, machine, mechanism; fig. instrumentality (as perhaps in, kamma° at Th.passages). -- Referring to the machinery (outfit) of a ship (as oars, helm, etc.) J.IV,163 (sabbayant’ûpapanna=piy’--ârittā etc. C.); Miln.379. To mechanism in general (mechanical force) J.V,333 (°vegena=with the swiftness of machinery). To a sugar-mill Miln.166; usually as ucchu-yanta J.I,25, 339 (°yante gaṇṭhikā), cp. ucchūnaṁ yanta DhA.IV,199. --tela-yanta (-cakka) (the wheel of) an oil mill J.I,25. --dāru-yanta a wooden machine (i. e. a mechanical man with hands & feet moved by pulling of strings) DA.I,197; Vism.595 (quoted as simile). --kamma-yanta the machinery of Kamma Th.1, 419 (i. e. its instrumentality, not, as trslⁿ “car”; cp. Brethren 217: “it breaks in pieces K’s living car,” evidently influenced by C. explⁿ “attabhāva-yanta”), 574 (similarly: see discussed under yantita). Note. yantāni at Nd² 529 (on Sn.48 saṅghaṭṭa-yantām) is expl^d as “dhuvarāni.” The spelling & meaning of the latter is not clear. It must refer to bracelets. ‹-› Cp. SnA 96 valayāni.

--ākaḍḍhana pulling the machine Vism.258=VbhA.241. --cakkha-yaṭṭhi the stick of the wheel of a (sugar-) mill VbhA.60. --nāḷi a mechanical tube DhA.III,215. --pāsāṇa an aerolite (?) J.III,258 (read °pāsāṇo). --phalakāni the boards of a machine Vism.258. --yutta combined by machinery J.VI,432. --sutta the string of a machine (or mill). Vism.258 (as °ka)=VbhA.241. --hatthi a mechanical (automatic) elephant DhA.I,192 (of King Caṇḍa-pajjota; cp. the horse of Troy). (Page 550)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yantaka: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. yanta] a bolt Vin.II,148 (vihārā aguttā honti . . . anujānāmi yantakaṁ sūcikan ti), cp. Vin. Texts III,162; DA.I,200 (kuñcikā+); DhA.I,220 (yantakaṁ deti to put the bolt to, to lock up). (Page 550)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yanteti: {'def': '[denom. fr. yanta. Dhtm 809 gives a root yant in meaning of “saṅkocane,” i. e. contraction] to set into motion, to make go, impel, hurl J.I,418 (sakkharaṁ aṅguliyā yantetvā); pp. yantita. (Page 550)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yanti: {'def': 'is 3^rd pl. pres. of yā: see yāti. -- Note. At D.II,269 we should combine yanti with preceding visamā & sambādhā, thus forming denom. verbs: visamāyanti “become uneven” and sambādhāyanti “become oppressed or tight.” The trslⁿ Dial II.305 gives just the opposite by reading incorrectly. (Page 550)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yantika: {'def': '【阳】机械工。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】机械工。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Yantita: {'def': '[pp. of yanteti] made to go, set into motion, impelled Th.1, 574: evâyaṁ vattati kāyo kamma-yantena yantito “impelled by the machinery of Karma”; trslⁿ Brethren 261 not quite to the point “carried about on Karma’s car.” Kern, Toev. s, v. quite out of place with “fettered, held, restrained,” in analogy to his trslⁿ of yanta id. Loc. with “fetter.” He may have been misled by Dhtm defⁿ of yant as “saṅkocana” (see yanteti). (Page 550)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yapana: {'def': 'see yāpana. (Page 550)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yapeti: {'def': ' see yāpeti. (Page 550)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yasa: {'def': '（比库名）亚沙，（古音译：）耶舍，耶输陀', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '【阳、中】 (mano-组), 名望，光荣，成功，（要人的一批）随行人员。~dāyaka, 【形】财富的施主，名望的施主。 ~mahatta, 【中】大名望，大财富，高地位。 ~lābha, 【阳】获得名望，获得财富。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Yasassimant: {'def': '(adj.) [double adj. ending; yasas+vin+ mant] splendid, glorious, full of splendour J.V,63 (pāvako yasassimā=teja-sampattiyā yassassinīhi accīhi yutto C.). (Page 551)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yasassin: {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic yaśasvin] glorious, famous, renowned, having all endowments or comforts of life (as expl^d at Nd² 530: yasappatta, sakkata, lābhī etc.) D.I,48 (ñāta+); A.II,34; Sn.179, 298, 343, 1117; Pv.I,4¹; III,1¹⁷; III,3⁵; III,10⁸; Vv 15⁹ (=kittimant parivāravant VvA.73); DA.I,143; PvA.10; Sdhp.420. -- f. yasassinī shining, resplendent J.V,64. (Page 551)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yasavant: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Vedic yaśasvat] famous, having renown A.II,64 (dīghāyu+). (Page 551)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yaso: {'def': '& Yasa (Vedic yawah)【阳】【中】(mano-group), 名声，名望，光荣，荣光，成功，(要人的一批)随行人员(glory, fame, repute, success, high position)。yasadāyaka,【形】财富的施主，名望的施主。yasamahatta,【中】大名望，大财富，高地位。yasalābha,【阳】获得名望，获得财富。Nom. & Acc. sg. both forms yaso & yasa(ṁ)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& Yasa (nt.) [Vedic yaśaḥ (nt.). The word follows the a° declension, but preserves & favours the Instr. yasasā after the s° decl. (like mano, ceto etc,), e. g. at J.I,134. -- In the Nom. & Acc. sg. both forms yaso & yasa(ṁ) occur; in cpds. the form yasa° is the usual; yaso as masc. is found at Sn.438] glory, fame, repute, success, high position. On term as used with ref. to the brahmin see Fick, Sociale Gliederung 128, 129 ‹-› The prevailing idea of Dhammapāla is that yaso consists of a great retinue, & company of servants, followers etc. This idea is already to be found at D.I,118=126 where y. is founded on parisā (cp. DA.I,143 on D.I,48; DA.I,298: yasasā ti āṇā-ṭhapana-samatthatāya). See e. g. VvA.122 (yaso=parivāra); PvA.137 (yasasā= mahati parivāra-sampattiyā); cp. J.I,134 (rājā mahantena yasena uppanaṁ gacchati). -- D.I,137 (as quality of a king); III,260, 286; J.IV,275 sq. (dibba y. as one of the 10 qualities of greatness, viz. divine duration of life, complexion, happiness, fame, power, and the 5 sense-objects rūpa, sadda, gandha, rasa, phoṭṭhabba. The same 10 are found at Pv.II,9^{58, 59}); A.I,15; II,32, 66, 188; III,31, 47 sq.; IV,95, 195 sq.; Dh.24, 303 (+bhoga); Th.1, 554; Nd¹ 147; Pv III,3⁵ (=dev’iddhi PvA.189); Vv 29¹; J.I,134; VI,468; Miln.291 (bhoga+); Vism.393; Sdhp.306, 518. -- yasaṁ deti to give credit J.I,180. mahā-yaso great fame J.I,46 (v. 266), cp. yas-agga the highest (of) fame J.I,51, where coupled with lābh-agga the greatest gain. The latter combⁿ is stereotype in the Niddesa (see e. g. Nd² 55), where the 4 worldly ideals are given in sequence lābha, yaso, pasaṁsā, sukha. -- With kitti we find yaso at Sn.817 (see defⁿ & exegesis at Nd¹ 147). -- Opp. ayasa D.III,260, 286; A.II,188; IV,157 sq.

--dāyika giving (or a giver of) repute J.VI,285. --mada pride of fame VbhA.467. --mahatta greatness of fame Vism.233. --lābha the gain of fame J.III,516 (+dhanalābha). (Page 551)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yasodhara: {'def': '【形】出名的。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】出名的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yasodharā: {'def': 'f. [BSk. Yaśodharā] =Rāhulamātar. 耶輸陀羅 [釈尊の出家前の妃, 後に出家].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '（比库尼名）亚寿塔拉，（古音译：）耶输陀罗', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Yasoladdha: {'def': '【形】通过名望而获得的。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】通过名望而获得的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yata: {'def': '(yameti 的【过分】), 已制止，已控制，已抑制。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(yameti 的【过分】), 已制止，已控制，已抑制。(p260)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of yam] held, checked, controlled, restrained, careful S.II,15, 50; Sn.78, 220, 1079 (=yatta, paṭiyatta, gutta etc. Nd² 525); J.VI,294 (C. appamatta; Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes reading yatta for yata Vism.201 (?). Esp. in two phrases: yat-atta (yata+attan) selfcontrolled, one whose heart is kept down D.I,57 (cp. Dial. I.75); Sn.216, 490, 723; DA.I,168. --yata-cārin living in self-restraint, living or behaving carefully Sn.971 (=yatta paṭiyatta gutta etc. Nd¹ 498); Miln.300 (+samāhita-citta, where Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes to read yatta-cārin for yata°). A similar passage at Th.1, 981 reads yathā-cārin (q. v. for further explⁿ). ‹-› Cp. saṁyata & see also yatta. (Page 548)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yatana: {'def': '【中】努力。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. yat, cp. Epic Sk. yatna] endeavour, undertaking J.V,346 (C. expl^s samosaraṇa-ṭṭhāna?); Dhtp 121 (in explⁿ of yatati¹). (Page 548)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】努力。(p260)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Yatati: {'def': '¹ [yat, given by Dhtp 121 in meaning “yatana,” by Dhtm 175 as “paṭiyatana”] to exert oneself, strive, endeavour, to be cautious or careful; ppr. yataṁ It.120 (care, tiṭṭhe, acche etc.; Seidenstūcker trsl^s “gezügelt,” thus taking it in meaning of yata). -- pp. yatta. (Page 548)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(yat+a), 尽力，努力。【过】yati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [unidentified, perhaps as explⁿ of yati?] is given in meaning of “lead out” (?) at Dhtp 580 (“niyyātane”) and Dhtm 813 (id.). (Page 548)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(yat + a), 尽力，努力。【过】 yati。(p260)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Yathariva: {'def': '(yathā+iva),【无】正如，正当，正像。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(yathā + iva), 【无】正如，正当，正象。(p260)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Yathatta: {'def': '【中】真实，本性，真面目。(p260)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】真实，本性，真面目。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yathicchitaŋ: {'def': '【副】随个人的喜欢。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Yathicchitaṁ: {'def': '【副】随个人的喜欢。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yathā: {'def': '【副】同样地，可能，关於，涉及，与…相比，依照，在任何方式，正如。yathākammaṁ,【副】依照个人的行动。yathākāmaṁ,【副】依照个人的心愿，随意。yathākāmakārī,【阳】为所欲为的人。yathākārī,【形】正如他所做的。yathākāla,【阳】适当的时间。yathākālaṁ,【副】在适当的时间。yathākkamaṁ,【副】整齐，状况良好，适宜，接著，接连地。yathāṭhita,【形】像现在这样的；正如站著的。yathātatha,【形】真实的，真正的。yathātathaṁ,【副】依照事实。yathādhammaṁ,【副】依照法。yathādhota,【形】好像被洗的。yathānusiṭṭaṁ,【副】符合忠告。yathānubhāvaṁ,【副】依照个人的能力。yathāpasādaṁ,【副】依照个人的满足。yathāpūrita,【形】所能充满的。yathāphāsuka,【形】舒服的。yathābalaṁ,【副】依照个人的力量。yathābhataṁ,【副】像现在这样的被携带。yathābhirantaṁ,【形】喜欢多久就多久的。yathābhucca, yathābhūta,【形】真正的，显然的，依照事实的。yathābhūtaṁ,【副】真实地，实在，实际上，事实上，实质上。yathāyaṁ(=yathā + ayaṁ) , 【阳.主.单】如,这…。yathārahaṁ,【副】适宜时，适当时，根据情况。yathāruciṁ,【副】依照爱好。yathāvato,【副】实质上。yathāvidhiṁ,【副】的确，适当地。yathāvihita,【形】正如安排的。yathāvuḍḍhaṁ,【副】依照辈份。yathāvutta,【形】上述的。yathāvuttaṁ,【副】如上所说，按照之前所规定。yathāsaka,【形】依照个人的所有权的。yathāsakaṁ,【副】每个人自己的。yathāsattiṁ,【副】依照个人的力量。yathāsaddhaṁ,【副】依照个人的热爱。yathāsukhaṁ,【副】安乐地。Idaṁ dukkhaṁ yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti，如实知此是苦、知此苦如真。yathā yathā…tathā tathā﹐如此如此…如是如是。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【副】同样地，可能，关于，涉及，与…相比，依照，在任何方式，正如。 ~kammaŋ, 【副】依照个人的行动。 ~kāmaŋ, 【副】依照个人的心愿，随意。 ~kāmakārī, 【阳】为所欲为的人。 ~kārī, 【形】正如他所做的。 ~kāla, 【阳】适当的时间。 ~kālaŋ, 【副】在适当的时间。~kkamaŋ, 【副】整齐，状况良好，适宜，接着，接连地。 ~ṭhita, 【形】象现在这样的；正如站着的。 ~tatha, 【形】真实的，真正的。 ~tathaŋ,【副】依照事实。 ~dhammaŋ, 【副】依照法。 ~dhota, 【形】好像被洗的。 ~nusiṭṭaŋ, 【副】符合忠告。 ~nubhāvaŋ, 【副】依照个人的能力。 ~pasādaŋ, 【副】依照个人的满足。 ~pūrita, 【形】所能充满的。~phāsuka, 【形】舒服的。 ~balaŋ, 【副】依照个人的力量。 ~bhataŋ,【副】象现在这样的被携带。 ~bhirantaŋ, 【形】喜欢多久就多久的。~bhucca, ~bhūta, 【形】真正的，显然的，依照事实的。 ~bhūtaŋ, 【副】真实地，实在，实际上，事实上，实质上。 ~rahaŋ, 【副】当适宜时，当适当时。 ~ruciŋ, 【副】依照爱好。 ~vato, 【副】实质上。 ~vidhiŋ, 【副】的确，适当地。 ~vihita, 【形】正如安排的。 ~vuḍḍhaŋ, 【副】依照辈份。 ~vutta, 【形】上述的。 ~vuttaŋ, 【副】按照之前所规定。 ~saka, 【形】依照个人的所有权的。 ~sakaŋ, 【副】每个人自己的。 ~sattiŋ, 【副】依照个人的力量。 ~saddhaŋ, 【副】依照个人的热爱。 ~sukhaŋ, 【副】安乐地。(p260)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adv.) [fr. ya°; Vedic yathā; cp. kathā, tathā] as, like, in relation to, after (the manner of). -- As prep. (with Acc.): according (to some condition, norm or rule): yathā kāmaṁ (already Vedic) according to his desire, after his liking PvA.113, 136; y. kālaṁ in time, timely PvA.78; matiṁ to his own mind or intention Pv IV.1⁶⁷; ruciṁ to his satisfaction, amply, satisfactorily PvA.88, 126, 242; vibhavaṁ Acc. to their wealth, i. e. plentifully PvA.53; sukhaṁ as they liked or pleased PvA.133. Sometimes with Loc.: yathā padese “according to place,” in the right place J.III,391. Or Instr.: y. sattiyā as much as you can DhA.I,92; y. manena from his heart, sincerely, voluntarily DhA.I,42. -- Also with ger. yathā haritvā according to his taking (or reward: see under cpd. °bhata) It.14 (y. h. nikkhipeyya, which Seidenstücker, not doing justice to context translates “so wie man etwas nimmt und dann wegwirft”). With foll. adj. expressing something like “as it were” and often untranslateable (see cpds.) -- As conjunction: “as if,” or “so that”: yathā mata like dead Dh.21; yathā na “in order that not”: Vism.31 (y. sarīre ābādhaṁ na uppādeti, evaṁ tassa vinodan’atthaṁ); DhA.I,311 (y. assa patitaṭthānaṁ na passāmi, tathā naṁ chaḍḍessāmi: so that I shall not see . . ., thus shall I throw him). -- As adv. just, as, so, even; in combⁿ with other particles: yathā kathaṁ pana how so then, how is it then that S.II,283 (cp. yathā tathaṁ under cpds.); yathā kiṁ viya somewhat like this Miln.91; yathā pana like as DhA.I,158; yatha-r-iva (for yathā-iva) just as D.I,90; yathā pi . . . evaṁ just as . . . so Dh.51--52. --yatha-yidaṁ (for yathā-idaṁ) positive: “as just this,” “so that,” “e. g.,” “like,” “i. e.”; after negation “but” It.8, 9 (na aññaṁ . . . yathayidaṁ); Sn.1092 (tvañ ca me dīpam akkhāhi, yathayidaṁ n’âparaṁ siyā “so that there be no further ill”; cp. SnA 597). See also the enlarged forms seyyathā & seyyathīdaṁ. -- In correlation with tathā: the same . . . as, like . . . as, as . . . so; Pv.I,12³ (yath’āgato tathā-gato as he has come so has he gone). Often elliptically in direct juxtaposition: yathā tathā in whatever way, in such & such a manner; so and so, according to the occasion; also “correctly, truly, in reality” Sn.504 (tvaṁ h’ettha jānāsi y. t. idaṁ); PvA.199 (y. t. vyākāsi). See yathā- tathaṁ under cpds. About phrase yathā taṁ see yathātaṁ. -- For further refs. on the use of yathā see Indexes to Saṁyutta (S VI,81 s. v. yathābhūtaṁ); Aṅguttara (A. VI,91 ibid.); Sutta-Nipāta (Index p. 751); & Dhammapada.

--ânudhammaṁ according to the rules (leading to enlightenment) Sn.963, cp. Nd¹ 481. --ânurūpa suitable, proper Mhvs 28, 42. --ânusiṭṭhaṁ in accordance with what has been taught DhA.I,158. --âbhirantaṁ (adv. nt. of ppr.) to (their) heart’s content, as much (or as long) as one likes Vin.III,145; Sn.53; DhA.I,385; VvA.181. --āraddha [=ālabdha] as much as was to be had, sufficient Vin.III,160. --ârahaṁ (nt. adv.) as is fit or proper, seeming, fitful, appropriately, duly (cp. Cpd. 111¹, 118²) S.I,226; Sn.403; Pv.II,9²³; PvA.78, 132 (yathā codanaṁ v. l. SS), 287; VvA.139. So to be read at all Pv & PvA.passages for T. yathā rahaṁ. Very freq. in Mhvs. e. g. 3, 27; 5, 148; 7, 70; 14, 54; 20, 8; 22, 58. --âlaṅkata dressed as he was, in full (state-) dress DhA.III,79. --âvajjaṁ “as if to be blamed,” i. e. (imitating) whatever is faulty, mimicry of deformities (as a forbidden pastime) D.I,7 (=kāṇakuṇi-khañj’ādīnaṁ yaṁ yaṁ vajjaṁ taṁ taṁ payojetvā dassana-kīḷā DA.I,86); Vin.II,10. --icchitaṁ according to one’s wish, as he liked, after his heart’s content J.I,27 (v. 188)=Bu II.179; is preferably to be read as yad-icchitaṁ at all PvA.passages, e. g. PvA.3 (°ṁ dento), 110 (°ṭhāna whichever place I like), 265 (where T. has yat°). The ed. of Mhvs however reads yath° throughout; e. g. 7, 22; 22, 50. --odhi as far as the limit, final, utmost M.I,37; J.III,302. --odhika to (its or their) full extent, altogether, only in phrase yathodhikāni kāmāni Sn.60 (cp. Nd² 526); J.III,381 (C. not quite to the point with explⁿ “attano odhivasena ṭhitāni,” giving variant yatodhikāni, with explⁿ “yato uparato odhi etesan ti yatodhikāni uparata-koṭṭhāsāni”); IV,487 (with better C. explⁿ: “yena yena odhinā thitāni tena tena ṭhitān’eva jahissāmi, na kiñce avasissāmī ti attho”); V,392 (C.: “yathāṭhita-koṭṭhasāni”). --kamma‹11›(ṁ) according to one’s karma or action J.I,57, 109; IV,1. Freq. in phrase yathā-kamm-ûpage satte (pajānāti) “(he recognises) the beings passing away (or undergoing future retribution) Acc. to their deeds” D.I,82; M.I,482; II,21; III,178; S.II,122; A.IV,141, 178, 422; V,35; Sn.587; It.99; and yathā-kamm-ûpaga-ñāṇa “the knowledge of specific retribution” Vism.433 sq.; Tikp 321; VbhA.373 sq. (°catuttha). --kāmaṁ according to wish, at random (see above); ° --karaṇiya to be done or dealt with ad lib., i. e. a victim, prey S.II,226; IV,91, 159; It.56. --kārin as he does It.122 (corresp. to tathāvādin). --kālaṁ according to time, in one time Mhvs 5, 180. --kkamaṁ Acc. to order, in one order or succession Mhvs 4, 54; Sdhp.269. --cārin virtuous (for the usual yatacārin as indicated by C. explⁿ yata kāyādīhi sanyati: see Brethren, p. 342!) Th.1, 981 (trsl. “Whoso according to his powers is virtuous”). --ṭhita so-being, such & such, as they are, as they were J.V,392; VvA.256. --tathaṁ according to truth, true & real (corresponding to yathā tathā adv.: see above) It.122 (here as Nom. sg.: as he is in one respect, so in the other, i. e. perfect); Sn.1127 (=yathā ācikkhitabbaṁ tathā ācikkhi Nd² 527); Th.1, 708 (diṭṭhe dhamme yathātathe: is reading correct? perhaps better as yathātathā, cp. trslⁿ Brethren 292: “the truths are seen e’en as they really are”); Dpvs III,2 (so read for yathā-kathaṁ; v. l. has °tathaṁ); V,64 (pañhaṁ byākarohi yathātathaṁ). --dhamma (used as adj. & adv. °ṁ) “one according to the law,” i. e. as the rule prescribes; nt. according to the rule put down. See Vin. Texts I.203; Geiger, Dhamma, p. 19, 67. ‹-› Vin.I,135 (yo uddiseyya, yathā-dhammo kāretabbo), 168 (yo pavāreyya, y.-dhammo kāretabbo), 191 (yo māreyya y.-dh. k.); II,67 (ubho pi yathādhammaṁ kārāpetabbā), 132 (yo ajjhohareyya, y.-dhammo kāretabbo); IV,126 (yo jānaṁ (i. e. knowing) yathādhammaṁ nihat’âdhikaraṇaṁ punakammāya ukkoṭeyya, pācittiyan ti i. e. a dispute settled in proper form; with explⁿ: y.-dhammaṁ nāma dhammena vinayena satthu sāsanena kataṁ), 144 (na tassa . . . mutti atthi yañ ca tattha āpattiṁ āpanno tañ ca yathādhammo kāretabbo, uttari c’assa moho āropetabbo). Cp. the foll. passages; as adj.: Vin.I,205; II,132, 142, 263; M.III,10; Miln.195; as adv.: with paṭikaroti (to atone, make amends) Vin.I,173, 315; II,126; IV,19; D.I,85; III,55; M.III,247; S.II,128, 205; A.I,103, 238; II,146; IV,377; cp. yathādhammaṁ paṭigaṇhāti S.I,239; A.I,59, 103. At S.III,171 yathādhammaṁ is used in the sense of “according to the truth, or reality,” where yathā-bhūtaṁ takes its place; similarly at Th.1, 188. --dhota as if it were washed (so to speak), clean, unsoiled DhA.I,196; cp. MVastu I.301 yathā-dhauta. --pasādhanaṁ according to a clear state of mind, to one’s gratification Dh.249 (=attano pasād’ânurūpaṁ DhA.III,359). --puggalaṁ according to the individual, individually Pv III,5¹ (read yathāpu°). --pūrita as full as could be, quite full J.I,101. --phāsuka comfortable, pleasant DhA.I,8. --balaṁ according to one’s power or means DhA.I,107 (v. l. °satti); Sdhp.97; Mhvs 5, 180. --buḍḍha see °vuḍḍha. --bhataṁ is an unexpl^d a(/pac legomέnon, difficult of analysis because occurring in only one ster. phrase, viz. yathā bhataṁ nikkhitto evaṁ niraye (& sagge) at M.I,71; S.IV,325 (where T. has yathāhataṁ, v. l. bhataṁ); A.I,8, 105, 292, 297; II,71, 83; It.12, 14, 26. We have analyzed it as y. bhataṁ in Corr. to pt. 3; vol. II.100 (“according to his upbringing”), but we should rather deviate from this explⁿ because the P. usage in this case would prefer the Nom. instead of the (adv.) Acc. nt. It remains doubtful whether we should separate yathā or yath’ābhataṁ. Suggestions of a trslⁿ are the foll. (1) “as soon as brought or taken” (see Dict. s. v. ābhata); (2) “as one has brought” (merit or demerit); thus taking ābhataṁ as irregular ger. of ā+bhar, trslⁿ suggested by the reading āharitvā (yathâharitvā) in the complementary stanzas at It.12 & 14; (3) “according to merit or reward,” after Kern’s suggestion, Toev. s. v. to read yathā bhaṭaṁ, the difficulty being that bhaṭa is nowhere found as v. l. of bhata in this phrase; nor that bhaṭa occurs in the meaning of “reward.” -- There is a strong likelihood of (ā)bhata resembling āhata (āhaṭa?) in meaning “as brought,” on account of, cp. It context and reading at S.IV,325; still the phrase remains not sufficiently cleared up. – Seidenstūcker’s trslⁿ has been referred to above (under haritvā) as unbefitting. -- The suspicion of yathābhataṁ being a veiled (corrupted) yathābhūtaṁ has presented itself to us before (see vol. I. under ābhata). The meaning may suggest something like the latter, in as far as “in truth,” “surely” is not far off the point. Anyhow we shall have to settle on a meaning like “according to merit,” without being able to elucidate the phrase in all its details. -- There is another yathābhataṁ in passage . . . ussavo hoti, yathābhataṁ lasuṇaṁ parikkhayaṁ agamāsi “the garlic diminished as soon as it was brought” Vin.IV,258. Here ābhata stands in rel. to harāpeti (to have it fetched & brought) and is clearly pp. of ābharati. --bhucca as is the case, i. e. as one might expect, evident, real, in conformity with the truth D.I,12; II,222; Miln.183, 351; Th.2, 159 (=yathābhūtaṁ ThA.142); PvA.30, 31 (°guṇā). --bhutta see bhutta. --bhūta(ṁ) in reality, in truth, really, definitely, absolutely; as ought to be, truthfully, in its real essence. Very freq. in var. combn^ns which see collected & classified as regards Saṁyutta & Aṅguttara-Nikāyas in Index vols to these texts. E. g. S.IV,195 (vacanaṁ, Ep. of Nibbāna); V,440 (abhisamaya); Sn.194, 202, 653; Dh.203; PvA.215 (guṇa). yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti he knows as an absolute truth or in reality D.I,83, 162; S.IV,188; V,304 & passim; ditto yathābhūtaṁ jānāti passati Ps.II,62. Similarly with noun: yathābhūta-ñāṇa absolute knowledge S.V,144; Ps.II,63=Vism.605 (+sammādassana); Vism.438, 629, 695; VbhA.459 (=maggañāṇa); also as °ñāṇa-dassana in same meaning: A III,19, 200; IV,99, 336; V,2 sq., 311 sq.; Ps.I,33, 43 sq.; II,11 sq.; Nett 29. --mano according to (his) mind Sn.829; Nd¹ 170 (expl^d as Nom.=yathācitto, yathāsaṅkappo, yathāviññāṇo). --ruciṁ according to pleasure or liking Mhvs 4, 43 (ruci T.; ruciṁ v. l.; thus generally in Mhvs.); 5, 230 (°ruci); 22, 58 (°ruci). --vādin as speaking, as he speaks (followed by tathā-kārin so doing) D.II,224, 229; Sn.357; It.122. --vidhi(ṁ) duly, fitly Mhvs 10, 79. --vihita as appointed or arranged Mhvs 10, 93. --vuḍḍhaṁ according to seniority Vin.II,221; Mhbv 90 (T. reads °buḍḍhaṁ). --vutta(ṁ) as is said, i. e. as mentioned, aforesaid, of this kind Mhvs 34, 57; PvA.45, 116 (°o puggalo). --saka(ṁ) each his own, according to his (or her) own, respective(ly) Vism.525; SnA 8, 9; VvA.7; Mhvs 5, 230 (here simply “their own”). --sata saintly (?), mindful Th.1, 981 (cp. yathā cārin & Brethren p. 342). --satti(ṁ) according to one’s power S.IV,348 (+yathābalaṁ); DhA.I,107 (v. l. for °balaṁ); Sdhp.97. --satthaṁ according to the precepts, as law ordains M.III,10 (perhaps an error for yathāsaddha? ). --saddhaṁ Acc. to faith, as is one’s faith Dh.249. --santhatika accepting whatever seat is offered D.I,167; A.III,220; Pug.69; Th.1, 855 --°aṅga one of the 13 dhutaṅgas Miln.342, 359; Vism.61, 78. --sukhaṁ according to ease, at ease, at will Th.1, 77; Dh.326. (Page 548)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yathābhūtadassana: {'def': '【中】如实知见。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yathātaṁ: {'def': '(adv.) [yathā+taṁ] as it is, as, as if Vin.III,5; S.I,124; M.I,253. The spelling in our books is yathā taṁ (in two words). (Page 550)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yathāva: {'def': '(adj.) [der. fr. yathā, as yathā+vant, after analogy of yāvant, but following the a-decl., cp. Epic Sk. yathāvat] having the character of being in accordance with (the truth or the occasion), real, true, just It.44 (santaṁ paṇītaṁ yathāvaṁ, nt.); Th.1, 188, 422 (°āloka-dassana seeing the real light); Miln.171 (°lakkhaṇa true characteristics); Vism.588 (as yāthāvasarasa), 639 (id.). -- Abl. yathāvato (also found as yāthāvato, probably more correctly, being felt as a der. fr. yathā) according to fitness, fitfully, duly, truly, sufficiently PvA.60 (so read for yathā vato), 128 (all MSS. yāthāvato!); ThA.256 (yā°; the explⁿ given by Morris, J.P.T.S. 1889, 208 is not correct). (Page 550)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yathāvaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. yathāva] being according to reality or sufficiency, essential, true, real, sufficient Th.1, 347; VbhA.409 (°vatthu, referring to the “māna”--division of the Khuddaka-vatthu Vbh.353 sq., cp. Nd² 505≈) Should we read yāthāvaka°? (Page 550)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yati: {'def': '[fr. yat, cp. Vedic yati leader, guide] a Buddhist monk Mhvs 5, 37 (racchāgataṁ yatiṁ); 25, 4; 30, 26 (mattikā-dāyakaṁ yatiṁ); 32, 32 (khīṇāsavassa yatino); Dāvs.IV,33 (yatī); Vism.79 (vikampeti Mārassa hadayaṁ yatī); PvA.287 (Instr. muni-vara-yatinā). (Page 548)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】出家人。(p260)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹yat, cp. Vedic yati leader, guide),【阳】出家人(a Buddhist monk)。Vism.79：ābhujitvāna pallaṅkaṁ, paṇidhāya ujuṁ tanuṁ; Nisīdanto vikampeti, mārassa hadayaṁ yati.(结跏趺坐正身的行者，动乱了魔的心。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yato: {'def': '(the Abl. case of yayato, used as conjunction, cp. Vedic yatah wherefrom, by which, out of which),【无】从哪里，从何处，以后，因为，由於。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】从哪里，从何处，以后，因为，由于。(p260)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adv.) [the Abl. case of ya°, used as conjunction, Cp. Vedic yataḥ wherefrom, by which, out of which] 1. (local) from where D.I,240 (uggacchanti candima-suriyā; opp. yattha where). -- 2. (temporal) whence, since, when, from which time VvA.344 (yato paṭṭhāya). -- 3. (modal) from which, out of what cause, because, in as far as D.I,36 sq. (yato . . . ettāvatā because . . . therefore); Sn.p. 113 (id.) Dh.374, 390 (doubled=from whichever source). -- Freq. in two comb^ns: yatvâdhi-karaṇaṁ (yato+adhikaraṇaṁ) because (lit. by reason of which; cp. kim-ādhikaraṇaṁ, see adhik.) D.I,70; D.I,113; M.I,269; Dhs.1346; cp. similarly BSk. yato adhikaraṇaṁ MVastu III,52; and yato-nidānaṁ on account of which, from which (or what) reason, because M.I,109; Sn.273, 869; Pv IV.1⁶¹ (cp. PvA.242). -- Note. yaticchita at PvA.265 is to be read yadicchita. (Page 548)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yatra: {'def': '(adv.) [the (older?) reconstituted Sk. form of P. yattha, cp. Vedic yatra in which, where. The P. form is younger than the Vedic, as the P. meaning is doubtful for the V, period. It is merely a differentiation of forms to mark a special meaning in the sense of a causal conjunction, whereas yattha is adv. (of place or time) only] in which, where, since; only in phrase yatra hi nāma (in emphatic exclamations) with Fut.; “as indeed, inasmuch as, that” S.II,255 (ñāṇabhūtā vata sāvakā y. h. n. savako ñassati etc.); J.I,59 (dhir-atthu vata bho jātiyā y. h. n. jātassa jarā paññāyissati “woe to birth that old age is to be noticed in that which is born!”); Miln.13 (acchariyaṁ vata bho . . . y. h. n. me upajjhāyo ceto-parivitakkaṁ jānissati). (Page 548)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yatta: {'def': '[pp. of yatati¹] strenuous, making an effort, watchful Nd² 525 (+paṭiyatta, in exegesis of yata); J.IV,222 (+paṭiyatta); VI,294 (Kern’s reading for yata; vv. ll. saṁyata & sata, thus warranting yata); Miln.373 (°payatta), 378 (id.=in keen effort). -- Note. Kern, Toev. s. v. would like to equal yatta=Sk. yatna effort. (Page 548)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yattaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. yāvant, a late formation; cp. Trenckner, Notes, 80] however much, whatever, as many (in correlation with ta° or tattaka) J.V,74 (=yāvant); Vism.184 (yattakaṁ ṭhānaṁ gaṇhāti . . . tattakaṁ . . .), 293 (yattakā=yāvatā); DA.I,118 (yattaka . . . tattaka as long as); DhA.II,50 (°ṁ kālaṁ as long), 128; VbhA.73 (yattakaṁ ṭhānaṁ . . . tattakaṁ), 391 (yattakāni kusala-cittāni . . . tesaṁ sabbesaṁ); VvA.175 (yattakāni . . . tāni as many . . . so many, i. e. whatever), 285 (yattakā āhuneyyā nāma . . . tesu sabbesu . . .). -- Instr. yattakena as adv. “because, on account of” DhA.III,383, 393. (Page 548)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】无论多少的，无论如何，不管有几多的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】无论多少的，不管有几多的。(p260)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Yattha: {'def': 'yatra, 【副】无论那里，哪里。(p260)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adv.) [the regular P. form of Ved. yatra. See also P. yatra] rel. adv. of place “where,” at which spot; occasionally “at which time,” when; with verbs of motion=“whereto.” -- D.I,240 (whither); Sn.79, 170 (here closely resembling yatra in meaning=“so that”), 191, 313, 445, 995, 1037; Dh.87, 127 (yattha ṭhita, cp. PvA.104) 150, 171, 193, PvA.27. --yattha vā tattha vā wherever (or whenever) DhA.IV,162; similarly yattha yattha wherever (he likes) A.II,64. yattha kāmaṁ (cp. yathākāmaṁ in same meaning) where to one’s liking, i. e. wherever Dh.35 (=yattha katthaci or yattha yattha icchati DhA.I,295, 299), 326. Similarly we find yatth-icchakaṁ, almost identical (originally variant?) with yadicchakaṁ and yāvadicchakaṁ at Vism.154. (Page 548)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'yatra,【副】无论那里，哪里。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yava: {'def': '[Vedic yava, corn; see Zimmer, Altind. Leben 239. Cp. Gr. zeά spelt; Lith. javaī corn; Oir. eorna barley] corn (in general), barley (in particular) Vin.IV,264; S.IV,220; A.IV,169.

--karaṇa the preparation of corn A.IV,169. --kalāpī (or °inī) a sheaf of barley S.IV,201. --kāraṇḍava chaff of corn (or barley) A.IV,169. --kummāsa barley-gruel VvA.62. --khetta corn-field Vin.IV,47, 266; VvA.294. --dūsin spoiling the corn A.IV,169. --majjhaka lying in the midst of a corn-field, in pācīna° of the c.-f. on the E. side (+dakkhiṇa° S.; pacchima° W.; uttara° N.); names of 4 market-places near Mithilā J.VI,330. --sūka the awn or beard of corn (barley) A.I,8; S.V,10, 48. (Page 551)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】大麦。 ~sūka, 【阳】（麦）芒。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】大麦(barely)。yavasūka,【阳】(麦)芒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yavaka: {'def': '(nt.) [yava+collect. ending °ka] in cpd. sāli° (whatever there is of) rice & corn (i. e. rice- and cornfields C.) J.IV,172. Cp. yāvaka. (Page 551)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yavana: {'def': '=Yona.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Yavasa: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. yava; Vedic yavasa] grass, hay, fodder J.I,338. (Page 551)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】草，干草，草料。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(fr. yava; Vedic yavasa),【阳】草，乾草，草料(grass, hay, fodder)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ya°: {'def': '[pron. rel. base; Vedic yaḥ=Gr. o(ζ who; cp. Goth. jabai if, --ei rel. part. An amplification of the dem. pron. base *i-, *ei- (cp. ayaṁ). See on detail Brugmann, “Die indogerm. Pronomina” in Ber. d. sächs. Ges. LX. 41 sq.) I. Forms. (See inflection also at Geiger, P.Gr. § 110.) The decl. is similar to that of ta°; among the more rarely found forms we only mention the foll.: sg. Nom. m. yo with by-form (in hiatus) yv-, as yv’âyaṁ=yo ayaṁ M.I,258; yv’âssa=yo assa M.I,137. Notice the lengthening of the subsequent vowel. ‹-› An unsettled ya is to be found at J.V,424 (Fausböll remarks “for yassā”?; perhaps to be comb^d with preceding pañcapatikā; C. on p. 427 expl^s ya-kāro nipātamatto)-- Abl. yasmā in adv. use; yamhā Dh.392. -- Loc. yamhi Dh.261, 372, 393. -- f. Loc. yassaṁ A.III,151 (see below). See further adv. use of cases (below II.5). -- At Pv.II,1⁶ yāhi is doubtful (perhaps imper.=yajahi, of yajati; C. leaves it unexpl^d).

Special mention must be made of the nt. n. Acc. sg., where both yaṁ and yad are found. The (Vedic) form yad (Ved. yat) has been felt more like ya+expletive (Sandhi-) d, and is principally found in adv. use and certain archaic phrases, whereas yaṁ represents the usual (Pali) form (like tad and taṁ). See more under II. -- A Māgadhized form is ye (after se=taṁ), found at D.II,278 (see Geiger § 105² & 110². Cp. Trenckner, Notes 75.). The expression ye-bhuyyena may belong under this category, if we explain it as yad+bhuyyena (bhuyyena equivalent to bhiyyoso). It would then correspond to seyyathā (=sad+yathā, cp. sayathā, sace, taṁyathā). See refs. under yebhuyyena. -- The expression yevāpanaka is an adj. formⁿ from the phrase ye-vā-pana (=yaṁ vā pana “whatever else there is”), i. e. belonging to something of the same kind, i. e. corresponding, reciprocal, as far as concerned, respective. (See s. v.) -- In adv. use it often corresponds to E. as; see e. g. yad-icchakaṁ, yad-idaṁ (under II.2 b; II,4 b.).

II. Meaning: “which,” in correspondence to a following demonstr. pron. (ta°); whichever (generalizing); nt. what, whatever. In immediate combⁿ with the demonstr. pron. it is qualifying and specifying the person, thing or subject in discussion or question (see below 4).

1. Regular use as correl. pron., when ya° (+noun) is followed by ta° (+noun). Sometimes (in poetry) the reverse is the case, e. g. at It.84 where ta° (m. sa) is elliptically omitted: atthaṁ na jānāti yaṁ lobho sahate naraṁ “he does not know good, whom greed overcomes.” -- Otherwise regular, e. g.: yassa jātarūparajataṁ kappati pañca pi tassa kāmaguṇā kappanti S.IV,326. In a generalizing sense (cp. below II.3): yo vā so vā “der erste beste,” some or other, whoever, any J.IV,38; V,362; yaṁ vā taṁ vā karotu let her do whatever she likes VvA.208; yasmiṁ vā tasmiṁ vā on every occasion S.I,160 na yo vā so vā yakkho not this or that yakkha i. e. not any (ordinary) kind of Yakkha (but Inda) DA.I,264. -- The same use (ordinary correlative) applies to the nt. forms yaṁ & yad in correl. to taṁ and tad. (See sep. under II. 2.)

2. Use of nt. forms. -- (a) nt. yaṁ (a) as pronoun: S.III,44 (yaṁ dukkhaṁ . . . tad anattā); It.78 (yañ c’aññaṁ whatever else); VbhA.54 (yaṁ labbhati yañ ca na labbhati taṁ sabbaṁ pucchitvā). See also under 3 a (yaṁ kiñci, yaṁ yaṁ). -- (b) as adj. adv.: yaṁmukha facing what, turned where (?) J.V,475 (but C. reads & expl^s sammukha!); yaṁ--vipāka having what or which kind of fruit D.II,209. yaṁ vā . . . yaṁ vā whether . . . or S.II,179; yaṁ no . . . na tv’eva neither . . . nor S.II,179-180. -- yaṁ with pot.: “so that,” that (corresp. to Lat. ut consecutivum) S.III,41 (yaṁ rūpe anatt’ânupassī vihareyya). J.V,339 (n’esa dhammo yaṁ taṁ jahe that I should leave you). -- In the function of other conjunctions e. g. as temporal= when, since, after: J.IV,319 (yaṁ maṁ Suruci-m-ānayi that, or since, S. married me). As conditional or causal =if, even if, because: Vin.I,276 (yaṁ te sakkā . . . arogaṁ kātuṁ, taṁ karohi if it is possible . . . do it; or may be taken in sense of “in whatever way you can do it, do”); J.III,206=IV.4 (yaṁ me sirasmiṁ ūhacca cakkaṁ bhamati matthake=because; C.: yena pāpena). -- (c) as adv. deictive “so,” in combⁿ with var. other (emphatic) particles as e. g. yaṁ nūna used in an exhortative sense “well, now”; or “rather, let me”; or “so now,” always in phrase yaṁ nūn’âhaṁ “now then let me” (do this or that) very freq., either with foll. pot., e. g. “y. n. âhaṁ araññaṁ paviseyyaṁ” DhA.II,91. “y. n. â. katakammaṁ puccheyyaṁ” VvA.132; dasseyyaṁ VvA.138; pabbajjeyyaṁ M.II,55; āneyyaṁ DhA.I,46, vihareyyaṁ ibid. 56; etc. cp. J.I,14, 150, 255; III,393; DhA.I,91; PvA.5 (avassayo bhaveyyaṁ). -- Similarly yañ hi “well then, now then” (with Pot.) S.II,210, 221 (taṁ vadeyya). Cp. yagghe. yañ ca & yañ ce [Sk. yac ca, or cet, ca here=ce see ca. & cp. sace=sa+ce] (rather) than that: yañ ca Th.2, 80; J.I,210; yañce (with Pot.) S.I,176; It.43; Th.1, 666. saṅgāme me mataṁ seyyo yañ ce jīve parājito (than that I live vanquished) Sn.440 (cp. the intricate explⁿ at SnA 390); similarly J.IV,495: me maraṇaṁ seyyo yañ ce jīve tayā vinā. -- (b) nt. yad: (a) as pron in regular relative use e. g. S.III,44 (yad aniccaṁ taṁ dukkhaṁ); It.59 (yad eva diṭṭhaṁ tad ev’âhaṁ vadāmi). (b) as adv., e. g. yad-agge (Loc.) from what on, i. e. from which time, since what time D.I,152 (=mūladivasato paṭṭhāya yaṁ divasaṁ aggaṁ patvā DA.I,311); Vv 84³³ (=yato paṭṭhāya VvA.344). Also as yad-aggena (Instr.) Vin.II,257 (y. Mahāpajāpati-gotamiyā aṭṭha garudhammā paṭiggahitā tad eva sā upasampannā); VbhA.387. -- yad -- atthaṁ for what, why Th.2, 163. yad-atthiya as much as necessary, as required, sufficient, proper Th.1, 12; 1274 (“which, for the goal desirous, he led” trsl.; refers to brahmacariyaṁ). The same verse occurs at Sn.354. The latter passage is mentioned in P.D. under atthiya with meaning “on account of what” (cp. kim-atthiyaṁ S.III,189). The Sn.passage is not expl^d in SnA. -- yad-icchakaṁ whatever is pleasant, i. e. according to liking, as he pleases A.III,28; Pug.11, 12; J.I,141 (y. bhutta eaten heartily); Vism.154 (+yavadicchaka); VvA.341. Cp. yen’icchakaṁ below II. 5. -- yad-icchita see under yathā-icchita! -- yadidaṁ: see below II. 4 b.

3. Generalizing (or distributive) use of ya: There are two modes of generalization, viz. (a) by repeating ya°: yassa yass’eva sālassa mūle tiṭṭhasi, so so muñcati pupphāni; “at the foot of whichever tree you stand, he (in all cases concerned) sheds flowers” Vv 39³; yaṁ yaṁ hi manaso piyaṁ “whatever is pleasant to the senses” Pv.II,1¹⁸; yaṁ yaṁ passati taṁ taṁ pucchati “whomsoever he sees, him he asks” J.III,155; yassaṁ yassaṁ disāyaṁ viharati, sakasmiṁ yeva vijite viharati” in whichever region he lives, he lives in his own realm” A.III,151; yo yo yaṁ yaṁ icchati tassa tassa adāsi “whatever anybody wished he gave to him” PvA.113; yaṁ yaṁ padesaṁ bhajati tattha tatth’eva assa lābhasakkāro nibbattati “whichever region he visits, there (in each) will he have success” DhA.II,82. -- (b) by combination with ko-ci (cp. the identical Lat. qui-cun-que): yassa kassaci rāgo pahīno ayaṁ vuccati . . . “the lust of whosoever is abandoned he is called so & so” It.56. yāni kānici vatthūni . . . sabbāni tāni . . . It.19; ye keci ārabbha “with ref. to whosoever” PvA.17; yaṁ kiñci whatever Pv.I,4¹.

4. Dependent & elliptic use of ya (with pron. demonstr.). This represents a sort of deictic (emphatic) use, with ref. to what is coming next or what forms the necessary compliment to what is just being said. Thus it introduces a general truth or definition, as we would say “just this, namely, i. e.,” or Ger. “so wie, und zwar.” -- (a) The usual comb^ns are those of ya+sa (nt. taṁ) and of ya+ayaṁ (nt. idaṁ), but such with amu (nt. aduṁ) also occur: yaṁ aduṁ khettaṁ aggaṁ evam eva mayhaṁ bhikkhu-bhikkhuniyo “as there is one field which is the best, thus to me the bh. & bhikkhunīs” S.IV,315. Cp. the foll.: ya+sa e. g. at M. I.366 (yo so puriso paṭhamaṁ rukkhaṁ ārūḷho sace so na khippam eva oroheyya “just that man, who climbed up the tree first, if he does not come down very quickly”); J.II,159 (yena tena upāyena with every possible means); Pv.I,9¹ (yā tā [so read for yā ca!] “just she over there; who as such, i. e. such as she is”); cp. also the foll.: yā sā sīmā . . . taṁ sīmaṁ Vin.I,109; ye te dhammā ādikalyāṇā etc. . . . sātthaṁ brahmacariyaṁ abhivadanti tathā rūpā ‘ssa dhammā honti . . . M.III,11; yāni etāni yānāni (just) these DhA.IV,6. --ya+ayaṁ e. g. at M.I,258 (yv’āyaṁ vado vedeyyo tatra tatra . . . vipākaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti); It.35=93 (nibbāpenti moh’aggiṁ paññāya yā ‘yaṁ nibbedha-gāminī: “as it is also penetrating, which as such, or in this quality, or as we know, is penetrating”); Vin.IV,134 (ye ‘me antarāyikā dhammā vuttā . . . te paṭisevato n’âlaṁ antarāyāya “just those which, or whichever”). Th.1, 124 (paṅko ti hi naṁ avedayuṁ yâyaṁ vandanapūjanā; here=yā ayaṁ); Dh.56 (appamatto ayaṁ gandho yâyaṁ tagara-candanī; here=yo ayaṁ); M.II,220 (yaṁ idaṁ kammaṁ . . . taṁ). -- (b) nt. yadidaṁ lit. “as that,” which is this (i. e. the following), may be translated by “viz.,” that is, “i. e.” in other words, so to speak, just this, “I mean”; e. g. kāmānaṁ etaṁ nissaraṇaṁ yad idaṁ nekkhammaṁ “there is an escape from the lusts, viz. lustlessness”; or: “this is the abandoning of lusts, in other words lustlessness” It.61; dve dānāni āmisa° dhamm°, etad aggaṁ imesaṁ yad idaṁ dhamma° “this is the best of them, I mean dh-d.” It.98=100; supaṭipanno sāvaka-saṅgho, y. i. cattāri purisa-yugāni etc. M.I,37. Instead of yadidaṁ we also find yāvañ c’idaṁ. See also examples given under yāvatā.

5. Cases used adverbially: Either locally or modally; with regards to the local adverbs it is to be remarked that their connotation is fluctuating, inasmuch as direction and place (where) are not always distinguished (cp. E. where both meanings=where & where-to), but must be guessed from the context. (a) Instr. yena: (local) where (i. e. at which place) D.I,71 (yena yena wherever), 220 (yattha yena yahiṁ=whence, where, whither; not with trslⁿ Dial. I. 281: where, why, whence!), 238 (id.); yenatena where (he was) --there (he went) D.I,88, 106, 112 & passim; cp. D.II,85 (yena âvasath’âgāraṁ ten’upasaṅkami); A.II,33 (yena vā tena vā here & there or “hither & thither”). --(modal) Dh.326 (yen’icchakaṁ II. 2 b.); Pv.I,11² (kiṁ akattha pāpaṁ yena pivātha lohitaṁ: so that).-Loc. yahiṁ where (or whither) Vv 84²⁹ (yahiṁ yahiṁ gacchati tahiṁ tahiṁ modati); & yasmiṁ: yasmiṁ vā tasmiṁ vā on every occasion S.I,160. -- Abl. yasmā (only modal) because A.I,260; It.37 (corresp. to tasmā). On yasmā-t-iha see Geiger, P.Gr. 73⁵. (Page 543)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yañña: {'def': '【阳】牺牲，给捐献的，布施。参考 Yāga。yaññasāmī,【阳】牺牲者，施主。yaññāvāṭa,【阳】牺牲的深坑。yaññupanīta,【形】为牺牲带来的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic yajña, fr. yaj: see yajati. The metric reading in the Veda is sometimes yajana, which we are inclined to look upon as not being the source of the P. yajana] 1. a brahmanic sacrifice. -- 2. almsgiving, charity, a gift to the Saṅgha or a bhikkhu. The brahmanic ritual of Vedic times has been given a changed and deeper meaning. Buddhism has discarded the outward and cruel form and has widened its sphere by changing its participant, its object as well as the means and ways of “offering,” so that the yañña now consists entirely in a worthy application of a worthy gift to a worthy applicant. Thus the direct and as it were self-understood definition of yañña is at Nd² 523 given with “yañño vuccati deyyadhammo,” and as this the 14 constituents of the latter are enum^d; consisting of the 4 paccayas, and of anna, pāna, vattha, yāna, mālā, gandhā, vilepana, seyya, avasatha, padīpeyya. Cp. Nd¹ 373. -- The term parikkhāra, which refers to the requisites of the bhikkhu as well (see DA.I,204--207), is also used in the meaning of “accessory instrument” concerning the brahmanic sacrifice: see D.I,129 sq., 137 sq. They are there given as 16 parikkhāras, as follows: (4) cattāro anumati-pakkhā viz. the 4 groups khattiyas, ministers, brahmans and householders, as colleagues by consent; (8) aṭṭhaṅgāni of a king-sacrificer; (4) cattār’aṅgāni of a purohita. ‹-› The term mahāyañña refers to the brahmanic ritual (so at M.II,204; DhsA.145, cp. Expositor 193); its equivalent in Buddhist literature is mahādāna, for which yañña is also used at Pv.II,9⁵⁰ (cp. PvA.134). ‹-› The Jātakas are full of passages referring to the ineffectiveness and cruelty of the Brahmanic sacrifice, e. g. J.III,518 sq.; VI,211 sq., & cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung, p. 146 sq. One special kind of sacrifice is the sabba-catukkayañña or the sacrifice of tetrads, where four of each kind of gifts, as elephants, horses, bulls, and even men were offered: J.I,335; III,44, 45; PvA.280. The number 4 here has the meaning of evenness, completeness, or harmony, as we find it freq., in the notion of the square with ref. to Vimānas & lotus ponds (in J., Vv & Pv etc.); often also implying awfulness & magic, as attached e. g. to cross-roads. Cp. the Ep. of niraya (Purgatory) “catu-dvāra” (esp. at Pv.I,10). See cpds. of catur. -- It may also refer to the 4 quarters of the sky, as belonging to the 4 Guardians of the World (lokapālā) who were specially worth offering to, as their influence was demonic (cp. Pv.I,4).

The prevailing meaning of yañña in the Suttapiṭaka is that of “gift, oblation to the bhikkhu, almsgiving. “ Cp. Sn.295, 461, 484, 1043. At Vv 34²⁶ the epithets “su-dinna, su-huta, su-yiṭṭha” are attributed to dāna. -- The 3 constituents which occur under dāna & deyyadhamma as the gift, the giver and the recipient of the gift (i. e. the Saṅgha: cp. opening stanza Pv I¹) are similarly enum^d under yañña (or yaññapatha) as “ye yaññaṁ (viz. cīvaraṁ etc.) esanti” those who wish for a gift, “ye yaññaṁ abhisaṅkharonti” those who get it ready, and “ye yaññaṁ denti” those who give it, at Nd² 70 (under appamatta). Similarly we find the threefold division of “yañña” (=cīvara etc.), “yaññayājaka” (=khattiyā, brāhmaṇā etc., including all 8 classes of men: see Nd² p. 129 s. v. khattiya, quoted under jana^b), and “dakkhiṇeyya” (the recipient of the gift, viz. samaṇa-brāhmaṇā, kapaṇ’addhikā vanibbakā, yācakā) at Nd² 449^b (under puthū). -- Cp. the foll. (mixed) passages: D.I,97, 128--144 (brahmanic criticised); II,353, 354 (profitable and unprofitable, criticised); M.I,82 (brahm.); S.I,76, 160; II,42 sq., 63, 207; III,337; IV,41; A.I,166; II,43 (nirārambhaṁ yaññaṁ upasaṅkamanti arahanto, cp. DhsA.145); Sn.308 (brahm.), 568 (aggihutta-mukhā yaññā: the sacrifices to Agni are the best; brahm.); Th.1, 341; J.I,83, 343; III,517 (°ṁ yajati; brahm.); IV,66; V,491, 492; VI,200 (yañña-kāraka-brāhmaṇa), 211 sq.; DA.I,267; DhA.II,6.

--âgāra a hall for sacrifices Pug.56 (=yañña-sālā PugA 233). --āvāṭa the sacrificial pit D.I,142, 148; J.I,335; III,45, 517; VI,215 (where reading yaññavāṭa, cp. yaññavāṭaka at Cp. I.7²). It has been suggested by Kern, Toev, s. v., and it seems more to the sense, to read yañña-vāṭa for yanñ’āvāṭa, i. e. enclosed place for sacrifice. Thus at all passages for °āvāṭa. --kāla a suitable (or the proper) time for sacrifice D.I,137; Sn.458, 482; DA.I,297. --upanīta one who has been brought to the sacrifice S.I,168 (trsl. K.S. 211 not quite to the point: “the oblation is brought.” Reading is uncertain; v. l. °opanīta which may be read as opavīta “wearing the sacrificial cord”: see foll.). --opavīta (?) [see upavīta] in phrase yaññ’opavīta-kaṇṭhā “having the (sacrificial, i. e.) alms-cord wound round their necks” SnA 92 (v. l. BB yaññ-opacita-kammā). Cp. yañña-suttaka. --patha [cp. patha²] (way of) sacrificing, sacrifice Sn.1045; Nd² 524 (yañño y’eva vuccati yañña-patho); J.VI,212, 215. --vaṇṇa praise of sacrifice J.VI,200. --vidhāna the arrangement or celebration of a sacrifice J.VI,202. --sampadā success of the sacrifice D.I,128 sq. (in its threefold mode), 134, 143, 144; Sn.505, 509. --sāmin lord or giver of a sacrifice D.I,143. --suttaka “sacrificial string,” i. e. alms-cord (the sign of a mendicant) DhA.II,59. Cp. above: °opavīta. (Page 547)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】参考 Yāga。 ~sāmī, 【阳】牺牲者，施主。 ~āvāṭa, 【阳】牺牲的深坑。 ~upanīta, 【形】为牺牲带来的。(p260)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Yaññatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. yañña] “sacrificiality,” the function or ceremony of a sacrifice J.VI,202 (=yañña-vidhāna C.). (Page 547)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yaŋ: {'def': '(ya 的【中、单】), 哪个，无论什么事物。【副】因为。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Yaṁ: {'def': '(ya 的【中、单】), 哪个，无论什么事物。【副】因为。yaṁ kiñci﹐无论何物(whatever)。yaṁ kadāci﹐无论何时(whenever)。yattha katthaci﹐无论何处(wherever)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yaṭṭhi: {'def': '【阳】【阴】棍，棒，手杖，杆，拐杖，七腕尺的长度。yaṭṭhikoṭi,【阴】棒端。yaṭṭhimadhukā,【阴】甘草属植物(liquorice)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic yaṣṭi. Another Pali form is laṭṭhi] 1. a staff, stick, pole M.III,133 (tomara° goad); S.I,115 (pācana° driving stick, goad); Miln.2; DhA.III,140 (kattara° a mendicant’s staff); PvA.241; VbhA.241 (yantacakka°); Mhvs 11, 10 (veḷu° a bamboo pole). ‹-› 2. a stem, stalk (of a plant), cane in ucchu° sugarstick, sugar-cane DhA.III,315 (=ucchu-khaṇḍika at Vv 33²⁶); IV,199. -- 3. a measure of length (=7 ratanas) VbhA.343.

--koṭi the end of the stick or staff DhA.I,15. --madhukā (“cane-sweetness”) liquorice Mhvs 32, 46. --luddaka “stick-hunter” at J.IV,392 means a hunter with a lasso. (Page 547)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳、阴】棍，棒，手杖，杆，拐杖，七腕尺的长度。 ~koṭi, 【阴】棒端。 ~madhukā, 【阴】甘草属植物。(p260)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Yebhuyasikā: {'def': '【阴】依多数(决定)( “according to the majority”)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yebhuyya: {'def': '【形】很多的，大部分的，丰富的。 ~yena, 【副】几乎所有，大概。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】很多的，大部分的，丰富的。yebhuyyena,【副】大概，一般而言，几乎所有。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [ye=yad in Māgadhī form; thus yad bhūya=yad bhiyya “what is more or most(ly)”] abundant, numerous, most. Not found as adj. by itself, except in phrase yebhuyya-vasena mostly, as a rule ThA.51 and PvA.136, which is identical with the usual Instr. yebhuyyena occurring as adv. “as according to most,” i. e. (1) almost all, altogether, practically (as in our phrase “practically dead”), mostly D.I,105 (addasā dvattiṁsa lakkhanāṇi y. ṭhapetvā dve: all except two)=109; Vin.III,29 sq.; J.I,246 (gāmako y. andha-bāla-manussehi yeva ussanno the village was peopled by mostly foolish folk); V,335 (y. asīti-mahātherā, altogether). -- (2) as it happens (or happened), usually, occasionally, as a rule, ordinarily D.I,17 (saṁvaṭṭamāne loke y. [as a rule] sattā Ābhassarasaṁvaṭṭanikā honti; expl^d by half allegorical, half popular etym. at DA.I,110 as follows: “ye upari Brahma-lokesu vā Āruppesu vā nibbattanti, tadavasese sandhāya vuttaṁ”); D.II,139: yebhuyyena dasasu loka-dhātusu devatā sannipatitā (as a rule); Sn.p. 107 (=bahukāni SnA 451); Miln.6 (y. Himavantam eva gacchanti: usually); DA.I,280 (ordinarily); VvA.234 (occasionally), 246 (pihita-dvāram eva hoti: usually); PvA.2 (Sattari tattha tattha viharante y. tāya tāya atth’uppattiyā), 46 (tassā kesa-sobhaṁ disvā taruṇa-janā y. tattha paṭibaddha-cittā adesuṁ invariably). -- na yebhuyyena not as a rule, usually not (at all): nâpi y. ruditena kāci attha-siddhi PvA.63. (Page 557)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yebhuyyasikā: {'def': '(f.) [formation fr. yebhuyya like tassapāpiyya-sikā. Originally adj., with kiriyā to be understood] lit. “according to the majority,” i. e. a vote of majority of the Chapter; name of one of the adhikaraṇa-samathas, or means of settling a dispute. -- Vin. II.84 (anujānāmi bh. adhikaraṇaṁ yebhuyyasikāya vūpasametuṁ), 93 (vivād’âdhikaraṇaṁ dvīhi samathehi sammati: sammukhā-vinayena ca yebhuyyasikāya ca). As one of the 7 methods of settling a dispute mentioned at Vin.IV,207=351 (the seven are: sammukhā-vinaya, sati-vinaya, amūḷha°, paṭiññā, yebhuyyasikā, tassa-pāpiyyasikā, tīṇ’avatthāraka). Expl^d in detail at M.II,247: if the bhikkhus cannot settle a dispute in their abode, they have to go to a place where there are more bh., in order to come to a vote by majority. Cp. D.III,254 (the seven enum^d); A.I,99; IV,144. (Page 558)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yena: {'def': '【副】因为，哪里。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【副】因为，哪里。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yeva: {'def': '【无】（强调词）甚至（…也），正好，也。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [=eva with accrudescent y from Sandhi. On form and relation between eva & yeva cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 66, 1. See also eva 2. -- The same form in Prākrit: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 336] emphatic particle, meaning “even, just, also”; occurring most frequently (for eva) after palatal sounds, as ṁ: Sn.580 (pekkhataṁ yeva), 822 (vivekaṁ); DhA.II,20 (saddhiṁ); PvA.3 (tasmiṁ), 4 (imasmiṁ), 13 (tumhākaṁ); -- further after o: PvA.39 (apanīto yeva); -- after ā: Sn.1004 (manasā yeva); -- after i: S.II,206 (vuddhi yeva); PvA.11 (ahosi); -- after e: J.I,82 (vihāre yeva; pubbaṇhe y.); VbhA.135 (na kevalaṁ ete yeva, aññe pi “not only these, but also others”). Cp. Mhvs 22, 56; VvA.222; PvA.47. (Page 558)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】(强调词)甚至(…也)，正好，也。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yevāpana: {'def': '(ka) (adj.) [not connected with yeva, but an adj. formation from phrase ye vā pana; ye here standing (as Māgadhism) for yaṁ: cp. yebhuyya] corresponding, reciprocal, respective, in corresponding proportion, as far as concerned; lit. “whatever else.” The expression is peculiar to exegetical (logical) literature on the Abhidhamma. See e. g. DhsA.152 (yevāpanā, pl. and °kā); Vism.468, 271 sq.; VbhA.63, 70 sq.; cp. Dhs. trsl.¹ p. 5 and introd. p. 56. -- Note. The expression occurring as phrase shows ye as Nom. pl., e. g. Dhs.1, 58, 151--161 & passim: ye vā pana tasmiṁ samaye aññe pi dhammā; but cp. in § 1: yaṁ yaṁ vā pan’ārabbha, in same sense. (Page 558)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yevāpanaka: {'def': '(ye+vā+pana=yaṁ vā pana)﹐无论怎样(whatever else there is)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yidha: {'def': 'in mā yidha at Vin.I,54 is to be read mā-y-idha, the y being an euphonic consonant (see y.). (Page 556)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yiṭṭha: {'def': '(yajati 的【过分】), 已授予，已牺牲。SA.24.5.：Yiṭṭhaṁ vuccati mahāyāgo.(上供品︰被称为「大牲醴」)。DhA(v.108)：Yiṭṭhanti yebhuyyena maṅgalakiriyādivasesu dinnadānaṁ.(上供品：一般而言，在庆典等场合，以丰盛的施物祭祀。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of yajati with a petrified sandhi y.; Vedic iṣṭa] med.: having sacrificed D.I,138 (mahā-yaññaṁ y. rājā). -- pass.: sacrificed, (nt.) sacrifice D.I,55 (dinna, y. huta); expl^d at DA.I,165 by “mahāyāga” Vbh.328, (id.); J.I,83 (y.+huta); IV,19 (=yajita C.); V,49; VI,527. -- duyyiṭṭha not properly sacrificed, a sacrifice not according to rites J.VI,522. In specific Buddhistic sense “given, offered as alms, spent as liberal gift” Vin.I,36; J.I,168=A.II,44; M.I,82. Dh.108 (yaṁ kiñci yiṭṭhaṁ va hutaṁ va; DhA.II,234=yebhuyyena maṅgalakiriya-divasesu dinna-dānaṁ). -- suyiṭṭha well given or spent A.II,44; ThA.40; Vv 34²⁶ (in both senses; VvA.155 expl^s “mahā-yāga-vasena yiṭṭhaṁ”). (Page 556)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(yajati 的【过分】), 已授予，已牺牲。(p262)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Yo: {'def': '(【主、单】ya), 谁，若，哪个人，任何人。yo koci﹐无论谁，若有人(whoever)。yo yo﹐无论何人(whoever)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(【主、单】 ya), 谁，哪个人，任何人。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Yobbana: {'def': 'yobbañña(cp.late Vedic & Epic Sk.yauvana, fr.yuvan),【中】年轻人(youth)。yobbanamada,【阳】年轻的自豪(pride of youth)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nf.) [cp. late Vedic & Epic Sk. yauvana, fr. yuvan] youth D.I,115; A.I,68; III,5, 66, 103; Dh.155, 156; Sn.98, 110, 218; Pv.I,7⁶; DhA.III,409; PvA.3.

--mada pride of youth D.III,220; A.I,146; III,72; VbhA.466. (Page 560)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'yobbañña, 【中】年轻人。 ~mada, 【阳】年轻的自豪。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Yodha: {'def': '2(=yo’dha=yo那+idha这)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】军人。 ~ājīva, 【阳】战士。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '1(=yodhin)(Vedic yodha;‹yudh),【阳】军人(a warrior, soldier, fighter, champion)。yodhājīva,【阳】战士，《杂阿含908经》译：战斗活。yodhahatthin﹐战象(a war elephant)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic yodha; fr. yudh] a warrior, soldier, fighter, champion Vin.I,73 (yodhā yuddh’âbhinandino . . . pabbajjaṁ yāciṁsu); J.I,180; Miln.293.

--ājīva one who lives by battle or war, a soldier S.IV,308=A.III,94; A.I,284; II,170, 202; III,89 sq. (five kinds); Sn.617, 652; Pug.65, 69. --hatthin a war elephant DhA.I,168. (Page 559)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yodheti: {'def': '(yudh + e), 对抗，发动战争。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~dhita。【独】~dhetvā。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of yujjhati] to attack, to fight against (Acc.) Dh.40 (yodhetha=pahareyya DhA.I,317); J.V,183. (Page 559)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(yudh对抗+e), (caus.of yujjhati)对抗(to attack)，发动战争(to fight against)。【过】yodhesi。【过分】yodhita。【独】yodhetvā。(yodhetha=pahareyya DhA I.317)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yodhi: {'def': '=yodhikā J.V,420. (Page 559)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yodhikā: {'def': '(有时作yūthikā),【阴】一种特别品种的茉莉花(jasmine)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [a var. reading of yūthikā (q. v.)] a special kind of jasmine Vv 35⁴; J.IV,440 (yoth°), 442; V,422; VvA.162 (as thalaja and a tree). (Page 559)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yodhin: {'def': '[=yodha] a warrior; camma° a warrior in cuirass, a certain army grade D.I,51; A.IV,107. (Page 559)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yoga: {'def': '【阳】瑜伽，连接，束缚，尽力，联合，执着，努力，混合。 ~kkhema,【阳】从执着中释放。 ~yutta, 【形】被执着束缚的。 ~gāvacara, 【阳】修瑜伽的人，修行者。 ~gātiga, 【形】已经征服再生的束缚者。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic yoga, see etym. under yuga & yuñjati. Usually m.; pl. nt. yogāni occurs at D.II,274 in meaning “bonds”] lit. “yoking, or being yoked,” i. e. connection, bond, means; fig. application, endeavour, device. -- 1. yoke, yoking (rare?) J.VI,206 (meant here the yoke of the churning-sticks; cp. J.VI,209). -- 2. con‹-› nection with (-°), application to; (natural) relation (i. e. body, living connection), association; also conjunction (of stars). mānusaka yoga the relation to the world of men (the human body), opp. dibba yoga: S.I,35=60; Sn.641; Dh.417; expl^d at DhA.IV,225 as “kāya.” ‹-› association with: D.III,176; application: Vism.520 (+uppāda). yogato (Abl.) from being connected with, by association with PvA.40 (bālya°), 98 (sammappadhāna°). -- pubba° connection with a former body, one’s former action or life-history J.V,476; VI,480; Miln.2. See pubbe¹. -- aḍḍhayoga a “half-connected” building, i. e. a half-roofed monastery Vin.I,239; Vism.34. -- nakkhatta° a conjunction of planets, peculiar constellation (in astrology) J.I,82, 253 (dhana-vassāpanaka suitable for a shower of wealth); III,98; DhA.I,174; DhsA.232 (in simile). -- 3. (fig.) bond, tie; attachment (to the world and its lusts), or what yokes to rebirth (Cpd. 171²). There are 4 yogas, which are identical with the 4 oghas viz. kāma°, bhava°, diṭṭhi°, avijjā°, or the bonds of craving, existence, false views, and ignorance; enum^d in detail at A.II,10; D.III,230, 276; J.I,374; cp. Ps.I,129 (catūhi yogehi yutto lokasannivāso catu-yoga-yojito); VbhA.35. Mentioned or referred to at S.V,59; Dhs.1059 (ogha+, in defⁿ of taṇhā), cp, Dhs.trslⁿ 308; Nett 31 (with ogha), 114 (id.); as sabba- (or sabbe) yogā at Th.2, 4; 76; S.I,213; DhA.III,233; severally at It.95 (bhava-yoga-yutta āgāmī hoti, +kāma°); ogha+yoga: Pug.21 (avijjā°); Vism.211, 684; cp. also D.II,274 (pāpima-yogāni the ties of the Evil one); It.80 (yogā pamocenti bahujanaṁ). -- 4. application, endeavour, undertaking, effort DhA.III,233, 234 (=samma-ppadhāna). yogaṁ karoti to make an effort, to strive after (Dat.) S.II,131; A.II,93 (āsavānaṁ khayāya y. karaṇīya); Miln.35. yogaṁ āpajjati to show (earnest) endeavour, to be active S.III,11 sq.; Vbh.356 (attanā). -- dhamma° one who is devoted to the Dhamma A.III,355; yutta° (bent on, i. e.) earnest in endeavour J.I,65; yāca° given to making offerings: see yāca. -- 5. pondering (over), concentration, devotion M.I,472; Dh.209 (=yoniso manasikāra DhA.III,275), 282 (same explⁿ at DhA.III,421); Miln.3; Vbh.324 (yoga-vihitesu kamm’& sipp’--āyatanesu; VbhA.410 expl^s: y. vuccati paññā; -- perhaps better to above 4?). -- 6. (magic) power, influence, device, scheme J.VI,212 (yoga-yogena practice of spells etc. =tāya tāya yuttiyā C.); PvA.117 (comb^d with manta, ascribed to devas). -- 7. means, instrument, remedy J.I,380 (vamana° an emetic); VI,74 (ekaṁ yogaṁ datvā; but we better read bhesajjaṁ tassa datvā for vatvā, and ekaṁ yogaṁ vatvā for datvā; taking yoga in meaning of “charm, incantation”); Miln.109 (yena yogena sattānaṁ guṇa-vaḍḍhi . . . tena hitaṁ upadahati).

--âtiga one who has conquered the yoke, i. e. bond of the body or rebirth It.61 (muni), 81 (id.). --âtigāmin= °âtiga; A.II,12 (same as sabba-yoga-visaṁyutta). --âvacara “one at home in endeavour,” or in spiritual (esp. jhāna-) exercises; one who practises “yoga”; an earnest student. The term is peculiar to the Abhidhamma literature. -- J.I,303, 394, 400; III,241 (saṁsārasāgaraṁ taranto y.); Ps.II,26; KvuA 32; Miln.33 sq., 43, 366, 378 sq.; Vism.245 (as hunter) 246 (as begging bhikkhu), 375 (iddhi-study), 587, 637, 666, 708; DhA.II,12 (padhānaṁ padahanto y.); III,241 (°bhikkhu); DhsA.187 (ādhikammika), 246 (°kulayutta); VbhA.115, 220, 228 (as bhikkhu on alms-round), 229 (as hunter), 258, 331; KhA 74; SnA 20, 374. --kkhema [already Vedic yoga-kṣema exertion & rest, acquisition & possession] rest from work or exertion, or fig. in scholastic interpretation “peace from bondage,” i. e. perfect peace or “uttermost safety” (K.S. II.132); a freq. epithet of nibbāna [same in BSk.: yogakṣema, e. g. Divy 98, 123, 303, 498] M.I,117 (°kāma), 349, 357, (anuttara); S.I,173 (°adhivāhana); II,195 (anuttara), 226; III,112 (°kāma, neg.); IV,125; V,130 sq.; A.I,50 (anuttara); II,40, 52 (a°), 87, 247; III,21, 294 sq., 353; D.III,123, 125, 164 (°kāma); Vin.II,205=It.11 (°ato dhaṁsati, whereas Vin °ā padhaṁsati); It.9, 27 (abhabbo °ssa adhigamāya); Th.2, 6; Sn.79 (°adhivāhana), 425; Dh.23 (anuttara, cp. DhA.I,231); Ps.I,39; II,81; Vbh.247 (kulāni y-kh-kāmāni, which VbhA.341 expl^s: catūhi yogehi khemaṁ nibbhayaṁ icchanti); ThA.13. --kkhemin finding one’s rest, peace, or salvation; emancipated, free, an Arahant S.III,13 (accanta°); IV,85; A.II,12; IV,310 (patta°); V,326 (accanta°); DhA.III,233, 234 (=sabba-yoga-visaṁyutta); neg. a° not finding one’s salvation A.II,52 (in verse)=Ps.II,80; It.50. --ññu knowing the (right) means Miln.169 sq. --bahula strong in exertion A.III,432. --yutta (Mārassa) one who is tied in the bonds (of Māra) A.II,52 (so read for °gutta; the verse also at Ps.II,80, 81, and It.50). --vibhāga dividing (division) of the relation (in grammar: to yoga 2) SnA 266. (Page 558)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹yuj轭),【阳】音译：瑜伽。连接(connection)，束缚(bond)，执著(attachment (to the world and its lusts))，努力(endeavour)，工具(means)。yogakkhema,【阳】瑜伽安稳，从执著中释放(release from the attachments)。yogayutta,【形】被执著束缚的。yogagāvacara,【阳】修瑜伽的人，修行者。yogagātiga,【形】已经征服再生的束缚者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yoganīya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. yoga; grd. formation] of the nature of trying, acting as a bond, fetter-ish Dhs.584; DhsA.49 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 301). The spelling is also yoganiya, cp. oghaniya. (Page 559)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yogga: {'def': '【形】适当的，适宜的。【中】交通工具，发明。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [Vedic yogya; a grd. formation fr. yoga in meaning of yoga 1] “what may be yoked,” i. e. 1. a coach, carriage, waggon (usually large & covered, drawn by bullocks) J.VI,31 sq. (paṭicchanna), 368 (mahā°); DhA.II,151 (mahā° & paṭicchanna). -- 2. a draughtbullock, ox Vv 84⁸; Pv.II,9³⁶ (=ratha-yuga-vāhana PvA.127); J.VI,221. yoggāni muñcati to unharness the oxen PvA.43, 100. (Page 559)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】适当的，适宜的。【中】交通工具，发明。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (nt. & adj.) [same as last, in meaning of yoga 7] 1. (nt.) a contrivance J.IV,269 (yoggaṁ karoti, may be in meaning “training, practice” here: see yoggā); VvA.8 (gahaṇa°). -- 2. (adj.) fit for (=yutta), adapted to, suitable; either --° or with inf.: VvA.291; PvA.25 (here spelt yogya), 135 (bhojana°), 152 (kamma-vipāk’ânubhavana°), 154 (gamana° passable, v. l. yogya), 228 (anubhavana°). (Page 559)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yoggā: {'def': '(f.) [Vedic and Epic Sk. yogyā; same as yogga², fr. yoga] training, practice J.II,165 (yoggaṁ karoti to practise); IV,269 (id.); DhA.I,52 (lakkha-yoggaṁ karoti to practise shooting). -- adj. (-°) katayogga wellpractised, trained S.I,62, 98 (neg.). Only at these passages, missing at the other daḷha-dhamma-passages, e. g. at S.II,266; M.I,82; A.II,48.

--ācariya a groom, trainer S.IV,176=M.I,124; M.III,97, 222; Th.1, 1140; J.I,505. (Page 559)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yogi: {'def': '(m.)[yoginī (f.)]为法精进的人，禅修者。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}

Yogin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. yoga, cp. Class. Sk. yogin] 1. (-°) applying oneself (to), working (by means of), using Vism.70 (hattha° & patta° using the hand or the bowl; but trslⁿ p. 80: “hand-ascetic” & “bowl-ascetic”). ‹-› 2. one who devotes himself to spiritual things, an earnest student, one who shows effort (in contemplation), a philosopher, wise man. The word does not occur in the four Nikāyas. In the older verses it is nearly synonymous with muni. The oldest ref. is Th.1, 947 (pubbake yogī “Saints of other days” Mrs. Rh. D.). Freq. in Miln, e. g. pp. 2, 356 (yogi-jana); at pp. 366, 393, 404, 417, 418 in old verses. Comb^d with yogâvacara Miln.366, 404. -- Further passages are Nett 3, 10, 61; Vism.2, 14, 66, 71 (in verse), 150, 320, 373, 509, 620, 651, 696; DhsA.195, 327. (Page 559)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yoginī: {'def': '【阴】女修行者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yogāvacara: {'def': '(and yogi), These 2 terms belong to the commentarial literature, but the first term appears also in Mil.', 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}

Yogī: {'def': '【阳】修瑜伽的人，修行者。参考 Yogāvacara。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '参考 Yogāvacara。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Yojaka: {'def': '【阳】连接的人，套上轭者，著作者。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】连接的人，套上轭者，著作者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yojana: {'def': '【阴】〔语法〕造句，意见，提议，注释。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic yojana] 1. the yoke of a carriage J.VI,38, 42 (=ratha-yuga). -- 2. a measure of length: as much as can be travelled with one yoke (of oxen), a distance of about 7 miles, which is given by Bdhgh. as equal to 4 gāvutas (DhA.II,13). It occurs in descending scale of yojana-tigāvuta-usabha at DhA.I,108. ‹-› Dh.60; J.V,37 (yojana-yojana-vitthatā each a mile square); SnA 194. More favoured comb^ns of yojana with numbers are the foll.: 1/2 (aḍḍha°): DA.I,35; DhsA.142. -- 3: DhA.II,41. -- 4: PvA.113. -- 5: VvA.33. -- 15: DhA.I,17; J.I,315; PvA.154. -- 18: J.I,81, 348. -- 20: DhA.IV,112 (20 X 110, of a wilderness). -- 25: VvA.236. -- 45: J.I,147, 348; DhA.I,367. -- 50: Vism.417. -- 100: D.I,117; It.91; Pv.I,10¹⁴. -- 500: J.I,204. -- 1,000: J.I,203. -- Cp. yojanika. (Page 559)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】1.轭，应用。2.由旬、踰缮那(长度单位。据佛音论师说，一只公牛oxen走一天的距离，大约七英里，即11.2公里)。在台湾骑赤牛犅ㄍㄤ(公牛，年壮的黄牛)「日可百里」，约有二、三十公里。1 yojana = 4 gāvutas', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】轭，应用，由旬（长度，大约七英里）。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Yojanika: {'def': '【形】有一由旬的范围的。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有一由旬的范围的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. yojana] a yojana in extent J.I,92 (vihāra); Dpvs 17, 108 (ārāma); DhA.I,274 (maṇipallaṅka). (Page 559)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yojanā: {'def': '(f.) [*Sk. yojanā, fr. yojeti] (grammatical) construction; exegesis, interpretation; meaning KhA 156, 218, 243; SnA 20, 90, 122 sq., 131 sq., 148, 166, 177, 248, 255, 313; PvA.45, 50, 69, 73, 139 (attha°), and passim in Commentaries. (Page 559)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(*Sk. yojanā, fr. yojeti),【阴】〔语法〕造句，意见，提议，注释((grammatical) construction; exegesis, interpretation; meaning)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yojeti: {'def': '(yuj + e), 套上轭，束以马具，结合，联合，混合，应用，准备，催促。【过】 yojesi。【现分】 ~jenta。【独】 yojetvā, yojiya。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(yuj连接+e), 套上轭，束以马具，结合，联合，混合，应用，准备，催促。【过】yojesi。【现分】yojenta。【独】yojetvā, yojiya。【未被】yojetabba。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of yuñjati] 1. to yoke, harness, tie, bind Pv.II,9³⁶ (vāhana, the draught-bullock); Mhvs 35, 40 (yojayi aor.; v. l. for yojāpayi); PvA.74 (sindhave). ‹-› 2. to furnish (with), combine, unite, mix, apply J.I,252 (suraṁ), 269 (id.); Mhvs 22, 4 (ambaṁ visena y. to poison a mango); 36, 71 (visaṁ phalesu poison the fruit). ‹-› 3. to prepare, provide, set in order, arrange, fix, fit up Mhvs 30, 39 (pāde upānāhi fitted the feet with slippers); dvāraṁ to put a door right, to fix it properly J.I,201; IV, 245 (cp. yojāpeti). -- 4. to engage, incite, urge, commission, put up to, admonish Mhvs 17, 38 (manusse); 37, 9 (vihāraṁ nāsetuṁ y. incited to destroy the v.); PvA.69. -- 5. to construct, understand, interpret, take a meaning SnA 148 (yojetabba); PvA.98 (id.), 278 (id.). -- Caus. II. yojāpeti to cause some one to yoke etc.: D.II,95 (yānāni, to harness); J.I,150 (dvāraṁ, to set right); Mhvs 35, 40 (rathe, to harness). -- Pass. yojīyati to become yoked or harnessed J.I,57 (naṅgalasahassaṁ y.). -- pp. yojita. (Page 559)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yojita: {'def': '(Yojeti的【过分】) 已结合，已套上轭，已准备，已混合(yoked, tied, bound)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of yojeti] yoked, tied, bound Ps.I,129 (catuyoga° fettered by the four bonds); SnA 137 (yottehi y.). (Page 559)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yojitaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. yojita] connected with, mixed; neg. a° not mixed (with poison), unadulterated J.I,269. (Page 559)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yojjha: {'def': 'in a° M.II,24 read yujjha (of yudh). (Page 559)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yojāpeti: {'def': '(yojeti 的【使】) 令套上轭，令结合，令准备。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(yojeti 的【使】)。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Yona: {'def': 'm. [Sk. Yavana] 余尼, 臾那, ギリシャ(イオニア), ギリシャ領.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Yonaka: {'def': 'a. m. [Yona-ka] ギリシャの, ギリシャ人, インド西北部以西の外国人. -loka 臾那世界, ギリシャ植民地.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Yoni: {'def': '【阴】起源，生存的王国，女性的器官，知识，种类。 ~so。【副】聪明地，适当地，判断正确地。 ~somanasikāra, 【阳】适当的考虑。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Vedic yoni] 1. the womb. -- 2. origin, way of birth, place of birth, realm of existence; nature, matrix. There are four yonis or ways of being born or generation, viz. aṇḍaja oviparous creation, jalābuja viviparous, saṁsedaja moisture-sprung, opapātika spontaneous: M.I,73; D.III,230; Miln.146; Vism.552, 557 sq.; cp. VbhA.203 sq. -- Freq. in foll. comb^ns: tiracchāna° the class of animals, the brute creation A.I,37, 60; V,269; It.92; Pv IV.11¹; Vism.103, 427; PvA.27, 166; nāga° birth among the Nāgas S.III,240 sq. (in ref. to which the 4 kinds of birth, as mentioned above, are also applied); Vism.102 (niraya-nāga-yoni); pasu°=tiracchāna° Pv.II,13¹²; pisāca° world of the Pisācas S.I,209; peta° the realm of the Petas PvA.68 (cp. peta). --kamma° K. as origin A.III,186. -- yoni upaparikkhitabba (=kiṁjātikā etc.) S.III,42. --ayoni unclean origin Th.1, 219. -- 3. thoroughness, knowledge, insight Nett 40. --ayoni superficiality in thought S.I,203 (“muddled ways” Mrs. Rh. D.). --yoniso (Abl.) “down to its origin or foundation,” i. e. thoroughly, orderly, wisely, properly, judiciously S.I,203 (“in ordered governance” K.S. I.259); D.I,118 (wisely); It.30 (āraddha āsavānaṁ khayāya); Pug.25; Vism.30, 132, 599; PpA 31. Opp. ayoniso disorderly improperly Pug.21; DhA.I,327; PvA.113, 278. -- Esp. frequent in phrase yoniso manasikāra “fixing one’s attention with a purpose or thoroughly,” proper attention, “having thorough method in one’s thought” (K.S. I.259) Ps.I,85 sq.; It.9; J.I,116; Miln.32; Nett 8, 40, 50, 127; Vism.132; PvA.63. See also manasikāra. -- Opp. ayoniso manasikāra disorderly or distracted attention D.III,273; VbhA.148; ThA.79. In BSk. the same phrase: yoniśo manasikāraḥ Divy 488; AvŚ I.122; II,112 (Speyer: “the right & true insight, as the object of consideration really is”). See further on term Dial. III,218 (“systematized attention”); K.S. I.131; II,6 (“radical grasp”).

--ja born from the womb Sn.620; Dh.396. --pamukha principal sort of birth D.I,54; M.I,517. (Page 559)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Vedic yoni),【阴】1.女性的性器官(the womb)，知识，种类。2.起源(origin)，出生地(place of birth)，生存界(realm of existence)。四种生(四生four yonis)：卵生(aṇḍaja；oviparous creation)，胎生(胎盘中出生jalābuja；viviparous)，湿生(saṁsedaja；moisture-sprung)，化生(opapātika；spontaneous)。tiracchānayoni。畜生胎、畜生道。yoniso﹐【副】从起源地。yonisomanasikāra,【阳】从起源作意。(古译作：如理作意。proper consideration)。经中说诸佛觉悟之前都是以观智，从根源作意(yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāya abhisamayo)：「有生故有老死，缘生故有老死。」乃至「有无明故有行，缘无明而有行」；「无生故无老死，生灭乃老死灭」乃至「无无明故无行，无明灭乃行灭。」(《相应部》S.12.4~10./II,5~10?S.12.65./II,104~5；《长部》D.14/II,31.；《杂阿含369经》)经文可作为yoniso manasikāra译作「从根源作意」的最佳引证。《瑜伽师地论》说：「若於谛智增上如理及不如理。不如实知，不能尽漏；与此相违，如实知故。能尽诸漏，当知此中闻不正法，不为寂静，不为调伏，不为涅盘，所起诸智，名不如理。听闻正法，…与上相违。当知如理。」(T30.840)【反】ayonisomanasikāra,【阳】未从起源作意。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yotta: {'def': '【中】縻，线，细绳。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】线，细绳。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic yoktra, cp. Lat. junctor, Gr. zeukth_res yoke-straps; Epic Sk. yoktṛ one who yokes] the tie of the yoke of a plough or cart S.I,172=Sn.77; S.IV,163, 282; J.I,464; II,247 (camma°); IV,82; V,45 (cammay.--varatta), 47; Vism.269; DhA.I,205; SnA 137. As dhura-yotta at J.I,192; VI,253. (Page 559)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yottaka: {'def': '(nt.) [yatta+ka] a tie, band, halter, rope J.VI,252; Miln.53; Vism.254, 255; DhA.III,208. (Page 559)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yuddha: {'def': '【中】打架，战争，打战。 ~bhūmi, 【阴】 ~maṇḍala, 【中】战场。(p262)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】打架，战争，打战。yuddhabhūmi,【阴】yuddhamaṇḍala,【中】战场。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [orig. pp. of yujjhati; cp. Vedic yuddha (pp.) and yudh (f.) the fight] war, battle, fight D.I,6 (daṇḍa° fighting with sticks or weapons); J.III,541 (id.); Sn.442 (Dat. yuddhāya); J.VI,222; Miln.245 (kilesa°, as pp.: one who fights sin); Mhvs 10, 45 (°atthaṁ for the sake of fighting); 10, 69 (yuddhāya in order to fight); 25, 52 (yuddhāy’āgata); 32, 12 (yuddhaṁ yujjhati); 32, 13 (maccu° fight with death); 33, 42; DhA.II,154 (malla° fist-fight). -- The form yudhāya at Sn.831 is to be taken as (archaic) Dat. of Vedic yudh (f.), used in sense of an inf. & equal to yuddhāya. Nd¹ 172 expl^s as “yuddh’atthāya.”

--kāla time for the battle Mhvs 10, 63. --ṭṭha engaged in war S.I,100 (so read for °ttha). --maṇḍala fightingring, arena J.IV,81; Vism.190; VbhA.356 (in comparison). (Page 557)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yuddhaka: {'def': '[fr. yuddha, for the usual yodha (ka)] a fighter, in malla° fist-fighter, pugilist J.IV,81. (Page 557)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yudhikā: {'def': '(f.) [doubtful] N. of a tree J.V,422 (for T. yodhi, which appears as yodhikā in C. reading). The legitimate reading is yūthikā (q. v.), as is also given in vv.ll. (Page 557)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yuga: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. yuj; Vedic yuga (to which also yoga)= Gr. zugόn; Lat. jugum=Goth. juk; Ohg. juh; E. yoke; Lith. jungas] 1. the yoke of a plough (usually) or a carriage DhA.I,24 (yugaṁ gīvaṁ bādhati presses on the neck); PvA.127 (ratha°); Sdhp.468 (of a carriage). Also at Sn.834 in phrase dhonena yugaṁ samāgamā which Bdhgh. (SnA 542) expl^s as “dhuta-kilesena buddhena saddhiṁ yugaggāhaṁ samāpanno,” i. e. having attained mastery together with the pure Buddha. Neumann, Sn.trslⁿ not exactly: “weil abgeschüttelt ist das Joch” (but dhona means “pure”). See also below °naṅgala. -- 2. (what is yoked or fits under one yoke) a pair, couple; appl^d to objects, as --°: dussa° a pair of robes S.V,71.; DhA.IV,11; PvA.53; sāṭaka° id. J.I,8, 9; PvA.46; vattha° id. J.IV,172. -- tapassi° a pair of ascetics Vv 22¹⁰; dūta° a pair of messengers S.IV,194; sāvaka° of disciples D.II,4; S.I,155; II,191; V,164; in general: purisa° (cattāri p.--yugāni) (4) pairs of men S.IV,272 sq.=It.88; in verse at Vv 44²¹ and 53³; expl^d at Vism.219 as follows: yugaḷa-vasena paṭhamamagga-ṭṭho phala-ṭṭho ti idam ekaṁ yugaḷan ti evaṁ cattāri purisa-yugaḷāni honti. Practically the same as “aṭṭha purisa-puggalā.” Referring to “pairs of sins” (so the C.) in a somewhat doubtful passage at J.I,374: sa maṅgala-dosa-vītivatto yuga-yog’âdhigato na jātum eti; where C. expl^s yugā as kilesā mentioned in pairs (like kodho ca upanāho, or makkho ca paḷāso), and yoga as the 4 yojanas or yogas (oghas?), viz. kāma°, bhava°, diṭṭhi°, avijjā°. -- Also used like an adj. num. in meaning “two,” e. g. yugaṁ vā nāvaṁ two boats Dpvs.I,76. -- 3. (connected by descent) generation, an age D.I,113 (yāva sattamā pitāmahā-yugā “back through seven generations.” Cp. DA.I,281: āyuppamāṇa); KhA 141 (id.); J.I,345 (purisa°). There are also 5 ages (or stages) in the [life of the] sāsana (see Brethren, p. 339): vimutti, samādhi, sīla, suta, dāna.

--anta (-vāta) (storm at) the end of an age (of men or the world), whirlwind J.I,26. --ādhāna putting the yoke on, harnessing M.I,446. --ggāha “holding the yoke,” i. e. control, dominance, domineering, imperiousness; used as syn. for palāsa at Vbh.357=Pug.19 (so read for yuddha°), expl^d by sama-dhura-ggahaṇaṁ “taking the leadership altogether” at VbhA.492. See further Nd¹ 177; VvA.71 (yugaggāha-lakkhaṇo paḷāso); SnA 542; DhA.III,57 (°kathā=sārambhakathā). --°ṁ ganhāti to take the lead, to play the usurper or lord J.III,259 (C. for T. palāsin); DhA.III,346. --ggāhin trying to outdo somebody else, domineering, imperious VvA.140. --cchidda the hole of a yoke Th.2, 500 (in famous simile of blind turtle). --naṅgala yoke and plough (so taken by Bdhgh. at SnA 135) Sn.77= S.I,172 (“plough fitted with yoke” Mrs. Rh.D.). --nandha (with v. l. °naddha, e. g. at Ps.II,92 sq.; KhA 27 in T.) putting a yoke on, yoking together; as adj. congruous, harmonious; as nt. congruity, association, common cause Ps.II,98=Vism.682; Ps.II,92 sq. (°vagga & °kathā); KhA 27 (nt.); Vism.149 (°dhammā things fitting under one yoke, integral parts, constituents). --mattaṁ (adv.) “only the distance of a plough,” i. e. only a little (viz. the most necessary) distance ahead, with expressions of sight: pekkhati Sn.410 (“no more than a fathom’s length” Rh.D. in Early Buddhism 32); pekkhin Miln.398; °dassāvin Vism.19 (okkhitta-cakkhu+) pekkhamāna SnA 116 (as explⁿ of okkhittacakkhu). --sāṭaka (=s.--yuga) a pair of robes, two robes Dpvs VI,82. (Page 556)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. yuj; Vedic yuga (to which also yoga)),【中】1.犁、轭(台语：牛担gu5 tann) ( the yoke of a plough (usually) or a carriage)。1.(一)对，(一)双(a pair, couple)。3.时代，世代(generation, an age)。yuganta,【阳】时代的终点，世代的结束。yugaggāha,【阳】专横，敌对，竞争。yugaggāhī,【阳】对手，能胜任的。yugacchidda,【中】轭的洞。yuganaddha, yuganandha,【形】连接轭的(putting a yoke on, yoking together)。yugamatta,【形】轭的距离(only the distance of a plough)。yugamattañca pekkhati, 只看一犁轭长(之地)。守护眼根，通常说看眼前「一寻」(vyāma)，少说看「一轭长」。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】轭，（一）对，（一）双，时代，世代。 ~nta, 【阳】时代的终点，世代的结束。 ~ggāha, 【阳】专横，敌对，竞争。 ~ggāhī, 【阳】对手，能胜任的。 ~cchidda, 【中】轭的洞。 ~naddha, ~nandha, 【形】一致的，和谐的，连接轭的。 ~matta, 【形】轭的距离。(p262)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Yugala: {'def': 'yugalaka, 【中】（一）对，（一）双。(p262)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'yugalaka,【中】(一)对，(一)双。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& Yugaḷa (nt.) [Class. Sk. yugala; in relation to yuga the same as Lat. jugulum (“yoke-bone”) to jugum. Cp. also Gr. zeu/glh yoking strap] a pair, couple J.I,12 (yugaḷa-yugaḷa-bhūtā in pairs), 500 (bāhu°); VI,270 (thana° the 2 breasts); Vism.219; VbhA.51 (yugaḷato jointly, in pairs); the six “pairs of adaptabilities” or “words,” Yog. 18--23, Mystic 30 sq.; cp. Dhs.40 sq. Also used as adj. (like yuga) in phrase yugalaṁ karoti to couple, join, unite Dpvs.I,77; VvA.233. (Page 556)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yugalaka: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. yugala] a pair Tikp 66; VbhA.73. (Page 556)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yugandhara: {'def': 'm. [〃] 由犍陀羅, 持双山 [須弥山の周囲の山, 九山の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Yuja: {'def': '(adj.) (--°) [either a direct root-derivation fr. yuj, corresponding to Sk. yuj (or yuk, cp. Lat. con-jux “conjugal,” Gr. o(mό--zuc companion, su/--zuc=conjux; Goth. ga-juka companion); or a simplified form of the grd. *yujya›*yujja›yuja] yoked or to be yoked, applicable, to be studied, only in cpd. duyyuja hard to be mastered, difficult J.V,368 (atthe yuñjati duyyuje he engages in a difficult matter; C. reads duyyuñja). (Page 556)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yujjha: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of yujjhati] to be fought; neg. a° not to be fought, invincible M.II,24 (so read for ayojjha). (Page 556)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yujjhana: {'def': '【中】对抗。(p262)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】对抗。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. yujjhati] fighting, making war J.III,6, 82. (Page 556)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yujjhati: {'def': '[cp. Vedic yudhyate, yudh, given in meaning “sampahāra” at Dhtp 415. -- Etymologically to Idg. *ieudh to shake, fr. which in var. meanings Lat. jubeo to command, juba horse’s mane; Gr. u(smi/nh battle, Lith. jundù, jùdra whirlwind; cp. also Av. yaošti agility] to fight, make war. Rare in older literature; our refs. only from the Mahāvaṁsa; e. g. 22, 82 (fut. yujjhissāma, with Instr.: Damiḷehi); 25, 23 (aor. ayujjhi); 25, 58 (ppr. yujjhamāna); 33, 41 (aor. yujjhi). To which add DhA.II,154 (mallayuddhaṁ yujjhanto); III,259 (Ajātasattunā saddhiṁ yujjhanto). -- pp. yuddha. -- Caus. yodheti (q. v.). (Page 556)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(yudh + ya), 对抗，发动战争。【过】 yujjhi。【过分】 yujjhita。【现分】 ~jhanta, ~jhamāna。【独】 yujjhitvā, yujjhiya。【不】 ~jhituŋ。(p262)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(yudh对抗+ya), 对抗，发动战争。【过】yujjhi。【过分】yujjhita。【现分】yujjhanta, yujjhamāna。【独】yujjhitvā, yujjhiya。【不】yujjhituṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yujjhāpana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. yujjhati Caus.] making somebody fight, inciting to war Miln.178. (Page 557)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yuta: {'def': '[pp. of yu, yauti to fasten but Dhtp 338: “missane”] fastened to (Loc.), attracted by, bent on, engaged in D. I.57 (sabba-vārī°); Sn.842 (pesuṇeyye; Nd¹ 233 reads yutta in exegesis, do. at p. 234, with further explⁿ āyutta, payutta etc.), 853 (atimāne); Dāvs.V,18 (dhiti°). -- Note. yuta is doubtful in phrase tejasā-yuta in Niraya passage at A.I,142=M.III,183=Nd¹ 405=Nd² 304^III=J.V,266. The more likely reading is either tejas’āyuta (so BSk. M.Vastu 9), or tejasā yutta (so Nd² & PvA.52), i. e. endowed with, furnished with, full of heat. -- We find a similar confusion between uyyuta & uyyutta. (Page 557)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yutta: {'def': '(Yuñjana的【过分】), 已把…套上轭，已束以马具，已与…关联，已给，已参加，已适当。yuttaka,【形】适当的，适宜的。yuttakāri,【形】适当地举止，端正地行动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of yuñjati; Vedic yukta, cp. Lat. junctus, Gr. zeuktόs, Lith. jùnktas] 1. (lit.) yoked, harnessed (to= Loc.) Pv.I,11⁴ (catubbhi yutta ratha); Mhvs 35, 42 (goṇā rathe yattā); DhA.I,24 (dhure yuttā balivaddā). -- 2. coupled; connected with; (appl^d) devoted to, applied to, given to, engaged in (-°, Instr. or Loc.) Sn.820 (methune), 863 (macchiriya°), 1144 (tena, cp. Nd² 532); It.93 (Buddha-sāsane); J.VI,206 (yoga°). -- 3. furnished; fixed, prepared, in order, ready Sn.442 (Māra; =uyyutta SnA 392); PvA.53. -- 4. able, fit (to or for=inf.), suitable, sufficient Sn.826 (cp. Nd¹ 164); J.V,219; DA.I,141 (dassituṁ yutta=dassanīya); VvA.191 (=alaṁ); PvA.74. -- 5. proper, right PvA.159. -- 6. due to (-°, with a grd., apparently superfluous) J.III,208 (āsaṅkitabba°); cp. yuttaka. -- 7. (nt.) conjunction, i. e. of the moon with one or other constellation Vin.II,217. -- ayutta not fit, not right, improper PvA.6 (perhaps delete), 64. -- suyutta well fit, right proper, opp. duyutta unbefitting, in phrase suyuttaṁ duyuttaṁ ācikkhati J.I,296 (here perhaps for dur-utta?). du° also lit. “badly fixed, not in proper condition, in a bad state” at J.IV,245 (of a gate).

--kāra acting properly PvA.66. --kārin acting rightly Miln.49. --paṭibhāṇa knowledge of fitness Pug.42 (cp. PugA 223). --payutta intent on etc. PvA.150. --rūpa one who is able or fit (to=inf.) J.I,64. --vāha justified VvA.15. (Page 557)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yuttaka: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. yutta] proper, fit (for); nt. what is proper, fitness: dhamma-yuttakaṁ katheti to speak righteous speech J.IV,356. -- Usually comb^d with a grd., seemingly pleonastically (like yutta), e. g. kātabba° what had to be done PvA.81; DhA.I,13 (as kattabba°); āpucchitabba° fit to be asked DhA.I,6. (Page 557)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yutti: {'def': '【阴】正义，适当。yuttito,【副】符合正义。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】正义，适当。 ~to, 【副】符合正义。(p262)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic yukti connection, fr. yuj] “fitting,” i. e. 1. application, use Miln.3 (opamma°). --2. fitness, vāda°, KVA 37; in Instr. yuttiyā in accordance with Mhvs 10, 66 (vacana°); Sdhp.340 (sutti°); and Abl. yuttito Sdhp.505. -- 3. (logical) fitness, right construction, correctness of meaning; one of the 16 categories (hārā), appl^d to the exposition of texts, enum^d in the 1st section of the Netti; e. g. at Nett 1--3, 103; KhA 18; SnA 551, 552. Thus Abl. yuttito by way of correctness or fitness (contrasted to suttato) VbhA.173=Vism.562; and yutti-vasena by means of correctness (of meaning) SnA 103 (contrasted to anussava). -- 4. trick, device, practice J.VI,215.

--kata combined with; (nt.) union, alloy VvA.13. (Page 557)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yuva: {'def': '【阳】年轻人。 (yuvā 的【主、单】)。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Yuvan)(Vedic yuvan),【阳】年轻人(a youth)。(yuvā 的【主.单】；D.I,80=yobbanena samannāgata DA.I,223; =paṭhama-yobbane ṭhita DhA.III,409; =taruṇa PvA.205). -- Cp. yava, yuvin & yobbana.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yuvan: {'def': '[Vedic yuvan; cp. Av. yavan=Lat. juvenis, Lith. jáunas young; Lat. juvencus “calf”; juventus youth; Goth. junda, Ohg. jugund & jung, E. young. -- The n.-stem is the usual, but later Pāli shows also decl. after a-stem, e. g. Gen. yuvassa Mhvs 18, 28] a youth. -- Nom. sg. yuvā D.I,80=yobbanena samannāgata DA.I,223; Sn.420; Dh.280 (=paṭhama-yobbane ṭhita DhA.III,409); Pv III,7¹ (=taruṇa PvA.205). -- Cp. yava, yuvin & yobbana. (Page 557)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yuvatī: {'def': '【阴】年轻女人。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】年轻女人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yuvin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [=yuvan with diff --adj. ending] young J.IV,106, 222. (Page 557)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yuñjana: {'def': '【中】从事，参加。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】从事，叁加。(p262)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Yuñjati: {'def': '[Vedic yunakti, yuñjati & yuñkte, yuj; cp. Gr. zeu/gnumi, Lat, jungo to unite, put together (pp. junctus=Sk. yukta, cp. E. junct-ion); Lith. jùngin. The Idg. root *ịeug is an enlarged form of *ịeǔe “to unite,” as in Sk. yanti, yuvati, pp. yuta; f. yuti, to which also Lat. jūs=P. yūsa. The Dhtp gives several (lit. & fig.) meanings of yuj, viz. “yoge” (No. 378), “samādhimhi” (399), “saṁgamane” (550)] (lit.) to yoke; (fig.) to join with (Instr. or Loc.), to engage in (Loc.), to exert oneself, to endeavour. All our passages show the applied meaning, while the lit. meaning is only found in the Caus. yojeti. -- Often expl^d by and coupled with the syn. ghaṭati & vāyamati, e.g. at J.IV,131; V,369; DhA.IV,137. -- Forms: pres. yuñjati Dh.382; J.V,369; 2^nd pl. yuñjatha Th.2, 346 (kāmesu;=niyojetha ThA.241); ppr. yuñjanto J.IV,131 (kammaṭṭhāne); imper. yuñja S.I,52 (sāsane); ThA.12; med. imper. yuñjassu Th.2, 5. -- Pass. yujjati (in grammar or logic) is constructed or applied, fits (in), is meant KhA 168; SnA 148, 403, 456. -- Caus. I. yojeti & II. yojāpeti (q.v.). -- pp. yutta. (Page 557)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(yuj + ŋ-a), 会合，参加，试图。【过】 yuñji。【过分】 yutta。【现分】 ~janta, ~jamāna。【独】 ~jitvā。【潜】 ~jitabba。(p262)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(yuj连接+ṁ-a), 会合(to yoke)，参加(to join with (Instr.or Loc.))，试图(to exert oneself)。【过】yuñji。【过分】yutta。【现分】yuñjanta, yuñjamāna。【独】yuñjitvā。【义】yuñjitabba。【使】yojeti。2pl.yuñjatha。imper. yuñja。med.imper. yuñjassu。pass. yujjati。caus.I. yojeti & II. yojāpeti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yā: {'def': '(ya 的【阴、单】), 她，无论什么女人。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ya 的【阴.单】), 她，无论什么女人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yāca: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. yāc] anything asked for, donation, alms, begging J.III,353; V,233, 234.

--yoga (y.+*yogga; perhaps yāja° the original. The variant yājayoga is old & well established: cp. Vism.224) accessible to begging, one ready to comply with another’s request, devoted to liberality, open-handed. Freq. in ster. phrase mutta-cāga payata-pāṇī vossaggarata yāca-yoga dāna-saṁvibhāga-rata to denote great love of liberality, e. g. at A.I,226; II,66; III,313. See also A.III,53, 313=Vism.223, 224 (where expl^d as follows: yaṁ yaṁ pare yācanti tassa tassa dānato yācanayogo ti attho; yājayogo ti pi pāṭho; yājana-saṅkhātena yājena yutto ti attho); A.IV,6, 266 sq., 271, 284; V,331, 336; Sn.p. 87 (cp. explⁿ SnA 414: “yācituṁ yutto, yo hi yācake disvā bhakuṭiṁ katvā pharusavacan’ādīni bhanati, so na yācayogo hoti” etc.); Sn.487, 488, 489, 509; J.III,307 (expl^d in C. as “yaṁ yaṁ āgantukā yācanti tassa tassa yutto anucchaviko bhavitvā, sabbaṁ tehi yācita-yācitaṁ dadamāno ti attho”); IV,274 (“yācitabba-yuttaka” C.); VI,98 (=yācana-yuttaka or yañña-yuttaka; “ubhayath’âpi dāyakass’ev’etaṁ nāma” C.); Miln.215, 225. -- The form yājayoga at Sn.1046 (expl^d at Nd² 531 as “yāje yutta”); and mentioned at Vism.224 (see above). ‹-› On diff. meaning of yācayoga see Kern, Toev. s. v. with unidentified ref. Cp. also Mvyut. 140, 4. (Page 552)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yācaka: {'def': '【阳】乞丐，讨的人。【阴】yācikā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】乞丐，讨的人。【阴】 yācikā。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. yāca, cp. Epic & later Sk. yācaka] requesting, one who begs, a recipient of alms, a beggar J.III,353; Pv.II,9³⁸; PvA.78, 102 (=yācanaka); Sdhp.324, 331. Freq. in combⁿ with similar terms of wayfaring people in phrase samaṇa-brāhmaṇa-kapaṇ’iddhika-vaṇibbaka-yācakā e. g. at D.I,137; It.64. See single terms. -- yācaka at Sn.618 (as Fick, Soc.Gliederung 144 quotes yācaka) is to be read yājaka. (Page 552)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yācana: {'def': '(dt.) [fr. yāc] begging, asking, entreaty J.III,353; SnA 161 (iṅghā ti yācan’atthe nipāto) 551 (id.); PvA.113 (=sādhuka).

--jīvāna living by begging J.III,353. (Page 552)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】请求，恳求。yācanaka,【形】请求。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】请求，恳求。 ~ka, 【形】请求。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Yācanaka: {'def': '[cp. BSk. yācanaka Divy 470, 585]=yācaka A.III,136 (ati°); Pv.II,7⁶; 9¹⁶; 9⁴⁶; J.III,49; DA.I,298. (Page 552)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yācanā: {'def': '(f.)=yācana; J.III,354=Miln.230; J.V,233, 404. (Page 552)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yācati: {'def': '(yāc+a), 乞，讨，恳求。【过】yāci。【过分】yācita。【现分】yācanta, yācamāna。【独】yācitvā。【不】yācituṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic yācati; yāc, with which cp. Lat. jocus (dial. juca “prayer”); Ohg. jehan to confess, etc.: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. jocus. -- Dhtp (38) only expl^s yāca= yācane] to beg, ask for, entreat Vin.IV,129 (pabbajjaṁ); Sn.566, 980, 983; J.III,49, 353; V,233, 404. -- aor. 3^rd pl. yāciṁsu PvA.13, 20, 42; ayācisuṁ Mhvs 33, 76 (v. l. ayācayuṁ). -- inf. yācituṁ PvA.29, 120. -- ger. yāciya Sn.295; yācitvā M.I,365; yācitvāna Mhvs 17, 58. ‹-› pp. yācita. (Page 552)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(yāc + a), 乞，讨，恳求。【过】 yāci。【过分】 yācita。【现分】 yācanta, ~māna。【独】 yācitvā。【不】 yācituŋ。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Yācayoga: {'def': '【形】容易取得的恳求，预备照做其他人的请求。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有求必应，照他人的请求(accessible to begging, one ready to comply with another’s request)。SnA 414.︰Yācayogoti yācituṁ yutto. Yo hi yācake disvāva bhakuṭiṁ katvā pharusavacanādīni bhaṇati, so na yācayogo hoti.(照他人的请求︰照乞求给。若是见到的乞求者，轻薄、言语粗鲁，他就不会有求必应。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yācita: {'def': '(yācati 的【过分】), 已要求，已请求。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(yācati 的【过分】), 已要求，已请求。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of yācati] begged, entreated, asked (for) A.III,33; Dh.224; J.III,307; PvA.39. -- Cp. yācitaka. (Page 552)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yācitaka: {'def': '(adj.) [yācita+diminutive (disparaging) ending °ka] asked, begged, borrowed M.I,365 (°ṁ bhogaṁ); J.IV,358=VI,127 (°ṁ yānaṁ and °ṁ dhanaṁ, alluding to M.I,365--366), with explⁿ J.IV,358: “yaṁ parena dinnattā labbhati taṁ yācita-sadisam eva hoti.” -- (nt.) anything borrowed, borrowed goods: yācitak’ûpamā kāmā (in app’assādā kāmā passage) “the pleasures of the senses are like borrowed goods” Vin.II,25=M.I,130= A.III,97=Th.2, 490=Nd² 71 (correct yācitan’); expl^d in detail at M.I,365. -- See also DhA.I,403 (ye y. gahetvā na paṭidenti); ThA.288 (kāmā=yācitaka-bhaṇḍasadisā tāvakālik’aṭṭhena). (Page 552)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】借来的事物。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】借用物(借来的东西)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Yādicchakaṁ: {'def': 'at VvA.341 read as yadicchakaṁ (see ya°). (Page 553)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yādisa: {'def': 'yādisaka,【形】无论哪一个，无论什么，相似的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'yādisaka, 【形】无论那一个，无论什么，相似的。(p262)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic yādṛś & yādṛsa, yad+dṛśa] which like, what like, whichever, how much; in neg. sentence: any, whatever little. -- Pv. II.1¹⁹ (=yāva mahanto PvA.77). -- Often comb^d with kīdisa in meaning “any one, this or that, whoever,” e. g. Vv 50¹⁴ (=yo vā so vā pacura-jano ti attho VvA.213). As adj.: yādisi (sic!=Sk. yādṛśī) --kīdisā jīvikā (no livelihood, whatever little) J.VI,584 (v.728; Trenckner, Miln.p. 423 gives v. 732!), expl^d by C as “yā vā sā vā, lāmakā ti attho”; yādisaṁ kīdisaṁ dānaṁ a gift of whatever kind Miln.278. So also with tādisa: yādisā vā tādisā vā (viz. kāmā) of whichever kind A.III,5. (Page 553)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yādisaka: {'def': '=yādisa; in correlation (generalising sense) yādisaka-tādisaka whatsoever . . . such, any whatsoever A.IV,308; S.V,96. (Page 553)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yāga: {'def': '(fr. yaj, *Sk. yāga, cp. yañña & yaja),【阳】1.牺牲，给捐献的，布施(a (brahmanic) sacrifice, known otherwise as mahāyāga (or pl. °yāgā), and consisting of the 4: assamedha, purisamedha, sammāpāsa, vāja-peyya. Thus mentioned at S.I,76 & Sn.303.)。2.布施(In Buddhistic sense: gift, alms giving, charity; expense or expenditure of giving (almost syn. with cāga)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】牺牲，给捐献的，布施。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. yaj, *Sk. yāga, cp. yañña & yaja] 1. a (brahmanic) sacrifice, known otherwise as mahāyāga (or pl. °yāgā), and consisting of the 4: assamedha, purisamedha, sammāpāsa, vāja-peyya. Thus mentioned at S.I,76 & Sn.303. -- 2. In Buddhistic sense: gift, alms‹-› giving, charity; expense or expenditure of giving (almost syn. with cāga) A.I,91 (here given in line with dāna & cāga, with distinction of āmisa° & dhamma°, i. e. the material sacrifice, as under 1, and the spiritual sacrifice or help); with the same contrast of ā° & dh.° at D.III,155; It.98, 102; J.V,57, 65; DhA.I,27. -- J.IV,66 (sahassena yāgaṁ yajanto); Miln.21 (dhamma°); VvA.155; PvA.135 (mahā°-saññita yañña), 136 (mahā°). -- suyiṭṭha yāga sampadā “well-given is the perfection of charity” ThA.40 (Ap. v. 7)=230 (id.).

--piṇḍa the sacrificial oblation consisting in a ball of meat or flour (cp. piṇḍa-pitṛ-yajña) J.VI,522 (with v. l. yāgu°). (Page 551)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yāgin: {'def': '(‹yāga),【形】牺牲，给捐献的，布施(sacrificing, giving, spending S I.19=J IV.66 (sahassayāgī, giving the worth of a thousand pieces)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. yāga] sacrificing, giving, spending S.I,19=J.IV,66 (sahassa° giving the worth of a thousand pieces). (Page 552)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yāgu: {'def': '【阴】稀粥(rice-gruel, rice-milk (to drink))，台语︰糜(be5/mue5)。(A.5.207./III,250.说：粥有五利，即：khuddaṁ paṭihanati(治饥), pipāsaṁ paṭivineti(除渴), vātaṁ anulometi(顺风), vatthiṁ sodheti(清净膀胱), āmāvasesaṁ pāceti(消化胃之残食)。另参考《律藏》〈大品〉药犍度Vin.I,221.(CS:p.315)；《四分律》卷第五十九：食粥五事好：除饥、解渴、消宿食、大小便通利、除风。是为五。(T22.1005.3))', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic yavāgū; on form see Geiger, P.Gr. § 27⁴] rice-gruel, rice-milk (to drink). See Vin. Texts II.89. ‹-› Vin.I,46=II.223 (sace yāgu hoti, bhājanaṁ dhovitvā yāgu upanametabbā; yāguṁ pītassa udakaṁ datvā . . .), 51 (id.), 61 (id.), 84, 210 (Bhagavato udara-vāt-ābādho tekaṭulāya yāguyā dhuva-yāguṁ dātuṁ; i. e. a constant supply of rice-gruel), 339 (na mayaṁ iminā bhikkhunā saddhiṁ yāgupāne nisīdissāma); IV,311; A.III,250 (ānisaṁsā: 5 good qualities: it is good for hunger, for thirst, allays wind, cleans the bladder, helps to digest any undigested food); J.I,186; II,128 (for drink); PvA.12, 23, 274. -- Often comb^d (and eaten) with cakes (khajjaka) & other soft food (bhojja), e. g. yāgukhajjaka J.I,270; III,20; DhA.IV,20; Mhvs 14, 55 (°khajja-bhojja); 36, 100 (+khajja-bhojja).

--pāna a drink of rice-milk Vin.I,84. --piṇḍa see yāga°. --bhājaka one who distributes the rice-gruel Vin.II,176 (pañcah’aṅgehi samannāgataṁ; together with cīvarabhājaka, phala-bhājaka & khajja-bhājaka); IV,38 (yāgu°, phala°, khajja°), 155 (id.); A.III,275. (Page 552)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】稀粥。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Yāja: {'def': '[fr. yaj; cp. yāja & yājeti] sacrificing, giving alms, liberality (felt as synonymous with cāga, thus influenced by tyaj, cp. Sk. tyājana): see yācayoga; -- Nd² 531 (yāye yutta); Vism.224. (Page 552)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yājaka: {'def': '【阳】令人牺牲的人。(p261)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】令人牺牲的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. yaj in its Caus. form yājeti] sacrificing, one who sacrifices, a priest Sn.312, 313 (=yanna-yājino janā SnA 324), 618 (of a purohita; v. l. BB yācaka). (Page 552)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Yājana: {'def': '(nt)=yāja; Vism.224: see yācayoga. (Page 552)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

【經文資訊】
【原始資料】原始资料皆来自网络
【其他事項】本資料庫可自由免費流通，詳細內容請參閱【中華電子佛典協會資料庫版權宣告】